Oki CX2033 MC560Series MM Rev3

CX2033/CX2033Plus
MC560/MC560Plus
Maintenance Manual
07710C
Oki Data CONFIDENTIAL

Please refer to the
"Illustrated Parts Manual"
for spare part information.
Preface
This maintenance manual describes maintenance methods in filed of MC560/CX2033MFP/ES-
5460MFP targeting service personnel.
Names of components that require procurement, such as printed circuit board, are assigned with
numbers.
(Example) ABCD-3 Printed circuit board
The number is assigned to specify type of the component and is not the manufacturing version of
the printed circuit board and so on.
In the body of this manual except the components list, numbers are not assigned to components
unless otherwise necessary.
Regarding the methods for handling and operating the device, please refer to "Instruction Manual".
Attention!
• Reprinting this document entirely or partially without permission is prohibited.
• Contents of this document are subject to change without notice because of remodeling
of the device or modification of descriptions.
44158801TH Rev.3 /
Contents
1. CONFIGURATION.................................................................................................8
1.1 System configuration..............................................................................................................8
1.2 MFP configuration................................................................................................................10
1.3 Composition of optional items.............................................................................................. 11
1.4 Specifications.......................................................................................................................12
1.5 Interface specifications........................................................................................................18
1.5.1 Parallel interface specifications (N/A)..........................................................................18
1.5.2 USB interface specifications........................................................................................18
1.5.2.1 Outline of USB interface.......................................................................................18
1.5.2.2 USB interface connectors and cables..................................................................18
1.5.2.3 USB interface signals...........................................................................................18
1.5.3 Network interface specifications..................................................................................19
1.5.3.1 Outline of network interface..................................................................................19
1.5.3.1.1 Basic specifications of network interface.....................................................19
1.5.3.1.2 Basic specifications of network interface.....................................................19
1.5.3.2 Network interface connectors and cables.............................................................20
1.5.3.3 Network interface signals......................................................................................20
1.5.4 Telephone Line Interface Specification . .....................................................................21
1.5.4.1 Outline of telephone Line Interface.......................................................................21
1.5.4.2 Telephone Line Interface Connector and Cable...................................................21
1.5.4.3 Telephone Line Interface signal............................................................................21
2. EXPLANATION OF OPERATION . .....................................................................22

2.1 Electrophotographic processing mechanism.......................................................................22
2.2 Printing process...................................................................................................................27
2.3 Theory of Operation of MFP................................................................................................37
3. INSTALLATION....................................................................................................38
3.1 Cautions, and do's and don'ts..............................................................................................38
3.2 Unpacking method...............................................................................................................40
3.3 MFP Installation Instructions................................................................................................42
3.4 Listing of component units and accessories........................................................................43
3.5 Assembly Procedure............................................................................................................44
3.5.1 MFP main body............................................................................................................44
3.5.2 Connection of power cable..........................................................................................53
3.5.3 Installation of optional items.........................................................................................58
3.5.4 Confirmation of recognition of optional items...............................................................63
3.6 Menu Map print....................................................................................................................64
3.7 Connection methods............................................................................................................65
3.8 Confirmation of paper used by the user...............................................................................67
4. REPLACEMENT OF PARTS...............................................................................68
4.1 Precautions on the replacement of parts.............................................................................68
4.2 Part replacement methods...................................................................................................70
4.2.1 Left side cover..............................................................................................................70
4.2.2 Right side cover...........................................................................................................71
4.2.3 Detachment methods of the scanner and printer.........................................................72
44158801TH Rev.3 /
4.2.4 Scanner........................................................................................................................73
4.2.4.1 ADF Unit...............................................................................................................73
4.2.4.1.1 ASS'Y STOPPER.........................................................................................73
4.2.4.1.2 ASS'Y PAPER SUPPORT............................................................................73
4.2.4.1.3 ASS'Y PAPER TRAY.................................................................................... 74
4.2.4.1.4 ADF ROLLER............................................................................................... 74
4.2.4.1.5 ASS'Y PAD...................................................................................................75
4.2.4.1.6 ASS'Y HINGE LIGHT/HEAVY......................................................................76
4.2.4.1.7 ADF LEVER RELEASE................................................................................77
4.2.4.1.8 ASS'Y ADF DOCUMENT (with Hinge).........................................................78
4.2.4.2 Flatbed unit...........................................................................................................79
4.2.4.2.1 ASS'Y CONTROL PANEL............................................................................79
4.2.4.2.2 ASS'Y MAIN BOARD, ASS'Y STAND-L, R.................................................80
4.2.4.2.3 ASS'Y FLATBED UNIT.................................................................................83
4.2.5 Printer...........................................................................................................................84
4.2.5.1 Face-Up Tray........................................................................................................84
4.2.5.2 Rear cover.............................................................................................................85
4.2.5.3 LED Assy/LED Assy springs.................................................................................86
4.2.5.4 Control PCB..........................................................................................................87
4.2.5.5 Print engine controller PCB...................................................................................88
4.2.5.6 Top cover assembly..............................................................................................90
4.2.5.7 Top cover..............................................................................................................91
4.2.5.8 Controller Panel Assy...........................................................................................92
4.2.5.9 Board PRP/ Top Cover Handle.............................................................................93
4.2.5.10 Low-Voltage Power Supply / Low-Voltage Fan / Hopping Motor / Fuser Motor....94
4.2.5.11 Guide Eject Assy / Color Register Assy / Board-PRY..........................................96
4.2.5.12 Fan (Fuser)/ Belt Motor / High-Voltage Power Supply Board / Cover-Open Switch.... 98
4.2.5.13 MPT Assy..............................................................................................................99
4.2.5.14 Feeder Unit / Board-RSF/ MPT Hopping Roller / Frame Assy Separator / Cover Front...100
4.2.5.15 Board-PRZ Lift-Up Motor/Solenoid/Paper-End Sensor...................................... 101
4.2.5.16 Feed Roller.........................................................................................................103
4.2.5.17 Shaft Eject Assy(FU) / Shaft Eject Assy(FD) / Eject Sensor..............................104
4.2.5.18 Fuser Unit............................................................................................................105
4.2.5.19 Belt Unit..............................................................................................................106
4.3 Lubricating points...............................................................................................................107
4.4 Precautions for Main Board Replacement.........................................................................126
4.4.1 Deleting e-mail addresses.........................................................................................126
4.4.1.1 Steps of exporting and deleting data..................................................................126
4.4.1.2 Steps of importing the exported data..................................................................129
4.4.2 Deleting Server Profiles............................................................................................. 131
4.4.2.1 Steps of exporting and deleting data.................................................................. 131
4.4.2.2 Steps of importing the exported data..................................................................134
5. PANEL SWITCH FUNCTIONS..........................................................................136

5.1 Scanner Operator Panel ...................................................................................................136
5.1.1 Layout.........................................................................................................................136
5.1.1.1 Buttons . .............................................................................................................136
5.1.2 LED/LCD....................................................................................................................138
5.1.3 Control Panel.............................................................................................................139
44158801TH Rev.3 /
6. MAINTENANCE MENUS...................................................................................142
6.1 System maintenance menu (For maintenance personnel).................................................142
6.2 Maintenance utility.............................................................................................................145
6.3 Functions of user's maintenance menu.............................................................................149
6.3.1 Maintenance menu (For end users)...........................................................................149
6.3.2 Self-diagnostic mode.................................................................................................150
6.3.2.1 Operator panel....................................................................................................150
6.3.2.2 Normal self-diagnostic mode (Level 1)...............................................................153
6.3.2.2.1 Activation method for self-diagnostic mode (Level 1) ...............................154
6.3.2.2.2 Deactivation of self-diagnostic mode.........................................................154
6.3.2.3 Switch scan test..................................................................................................154
6.3.2.4 Motor clutch test..................................................................................................157
6.3.2.5 Test print.............................................................................................................159
6.3.2.6 Color registration adjustment test.......................................................................164
6.3.2.7 Print density adjustment test...............................................................................165
6.3.2.8 Indication of consumable part counters..............................................................167
6.3.2.9 Indication of printed page counters.....................................................................168
6.3.2.10 Factory/Shipping switching . ..............................................................................168
6.3.2.11 Setup of self-diagnostic function.........................................................................169
6.3.2.12 Indication of LED head serial number................................................................. 170
6.3.2.13 Details of panel indications................................................................................. 171
6.3.3 Various types of print on the individual printer equipped with controller....................182
6.3.4 Functions of keys when depressed at power-on........................................................182
6.4 Setup after replacement of parts........................................................................................183
6.4.1 Precautions on the replacement of engine control PCB............................................183
6.4.2 Setup of EEPROM after replacement of TBR/TB2-6 PCB........................................186
6.4.2.1 Replacement of EEPROM after replacement of TBR/TB2-6 PCB.....................186
6.4.2.2 Setup of CU Serial Number................................................................................186
6.4.3 Setup of destination...................................................................................................187
6.6 Updating Scanner Firmware..............................................................................................188
6.6.1 Updating with the OKI MFP Network Setup Tool.......................................................188
6.6.2 Updating by Running the Scanner in Loader Mode................................................... 191
6.7 Adjustment of scanner after replacement of scanner main board.....................................193
7. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE..........................................................................196
7.1 Recommended replacement parts.....................................................................................196
7.2 Cleaning.............................................................................................................................196
7.3 Cleaning of LED lens array................................................................................................196
7.4 Cleaning of pickup rollers...................................................................................................198
7.5 Internal cleaning of printer . ...............................................................................................199
7.6 Preventive Maintenance.....................................................................................................201
7.6.1 Cleaning the document glass.....................................................................................201
7.6.2 Cleaning the ADF.......................................................................................................202
7.6.3 Cleaning a Paper Jam . .............................................................................................202
7.6.4 Replacing the ADF pad..............................................................................................203
44158801TH Rev.3 /
8. TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES.............................................................204
8.1 Precautions prior to repair..................................................................................................204
8.2 Items to be checked prior to taking action on abnormal images........................................204
8.3 Precautions when taking action on abnormal images.......................................................204
8.4 Preparations for troubleshooting........................................................................................204
8.5 Troubleshooting method.....................................................................................................204
8.5.1 LCD Message List......................................................................................................205
8.5.2 Preparing for troubleshooting.....................................................................................221
8.5.3 Image Problem Troubleshooting................................................................................259
8.5.4 Actions after forced initialization of HDD/Flash.........................................................266
8.5.5 Network Troubleshooting...........................................................................................267
8.6 Check of fuses...................................................................................................................268
8.7 Troubleshooting..................................................................................................................269
8.7.1 Troubleshooting flowchart..........................................................................................269
8.7.1.1 Power ON to the MFP ready...............................................................................269
8.7.1.2 Copy operation ..................................................................................................270
8.7.1.3 Email operation...................................................................................................271
8.7.1.4 Control panel operation......................................................................................272
8.7.2 Tables.........................................................................................................................273
8.7.2.1 LCD does not display.......................................................................................... 274
8.7.2.2 Printer does not react.......................................................................................... 274
8.7.2.3 Scanning is not performed.................................................................................. 274
8.7.2.4 Printer does not print...........................................................................................275
8.7.2.5 Image unclear.....................................................................................................275
8.7.2.6 Noise generated..................................................................................................275
8.7.2.7 LCD does not show message after command....................................................275
8.7.2.8 MFP is not connected to the network.................................................................276
8.7.2.9 MFP cannot send email......................................................................................276
8.7.2.10 Error message (LCD of scanner)........................................................................277
8.7.2.10.1 Error message during initializing................................................................277
8.7.2.10.2 Error message during printing and copying...............................................278
8.7.2.10.3 Information codes during networking ........................................................283
8.7.2.10.4 Error message during E-mailing.................................................................285
8.7.2.10.5 Error message during filing........................................................................287
8.7.2.10.6 Error message on fax.................................................................................289
8.8 Scanner Shipment Setting List...........................................................................................290
8.8.1 The outline of Menu structure....................................................................................290
8.8.2 Scanner operation panel............................................................................................290
8.8.3 Menu Settings............................................................................................................294
8.8.4 Additional Settings.....................................................................................................297
8.8.5 Fax Service Mode......................................................................................................298
8.9 How to distinguish a Plus version unit...................................................................299
9. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS...............................................................................300
9.1 Check of resistance values................................................................................................300
9.2 Component layout..............................................................................................................304
44158801TH Rev.3 /
Cover Open SW
2
Fuser Fan Motor
1.1
Board-PRP 3
Environment Sensor
7 (Opepanel) Lift Up
2
Sensor
44158801TH Rev.3
High Voltage Thermistor
Board-POL Power Supply
Board-PRZ (RFID)
(Toner-low Sensor) K C 13
2 2 Density
Sensor Thermistor Thermistor Heater Lamp
11 C-13 C-13 Board-PRC (Upper) (x2)
F-6 Exit Sensor (Frame)
Y M 3
(Registration Sensor) 4 4 5
2 2 F-7 F-8 C-9
C-10
C-14 C-14 4 4 5 3
1. CONFIGURATION
Fuser Connentor
Board-LUM 2 2 2 2 F-4
20 Board-PRY C-11 4
8
System configuration
(RFID) 5
(Relay)
2
Hopping C-7 9
Motor ID Motor Fuser Motor
F-3 Fuse
F-2 4 4
F-5
Belt Motor
C-5
4 10 4 2
Lift Up Motor
C-4 C-6
F-9
Board-RSF 4 10 5 13 20 9 8 24 24 K-HEAD
11
(Front Sensor) F-10 Thermistor
7 24 24 Y-HEAD (Lower)
WR Sensor F-11
C-1
IN1 Sensor 5 5 24 24 M-HEAD
IN2 Sensor F-12
24 24 C-HEAD
Figure 1-1-1
3 C-2 Board-PRF Board-TBR/TB2-6 (USB)
3 5
Paper-end Sensor
(PU) (CU)
12 12 Centronics I/F
32 32 Board-TBI
2 (option)
Hopping Solenoid
22 3 CU Fan Motor
C-3
Figure 1-1-1 represents the system configuration of the printer.
8 3 14 10
11 10 (24V)
C-12
C-8
Duplex 11 10 2nd Tray Cable
MC560/CX2033MFP/ES5460MFP Printer Connection diagram
Connector Connector PSU Fan Motor 22 4

AC FFC
Power Supply Unit
20
Board-V7Y Scanner Connector
(2nd Tray Control) Scanner I/F
Board-V7Y-2
(Duplex Control)
/
MC560/CX2033MFP/ES5460MFP Scanner Connection Diagram

Figure 1-1-2 represents the system configuration of the scanner.
Printer I/F
Printer Connector
USB (5 Pin) Power (4 Pin) Motor
4 Pin
FAX
Board
Scanner Main board ADF Board
LINE
TEL 6 Pin
Paper
sensor
CCD (20 Pin) Motor (18 Pin)
Scanner CCD board
2 Pin 4 Pin 3 Pin Cable

FFC
Inverter Motor Home

Circuit sensor
Lamp
Figure 1-1-2
1
Scanner Pin num.
NonPlus 34 Pin
Plus 40 Pin
44158801TH Rev.3 /
1.2 MFP configuration

The internal part of the MC560/CX2033MFP/ES5460MFP is composed of the following sections:
• Electrophotographic processing section

• Paper paths
• Control sections (CU sect./PU sect.)
• Operator panel
• Power supply sections (High-voltage sect./low-voltage sect.)
Figure 1-2 represents the configuration of the printer.
Air flow
Figure 1-2
44158801TH Rev.3 10 /
1.3 Composition of optional items

The following optional items are available for the printer:
(1) Second tray
(2) Duplex Unit

DXU-C4D
(3) Expansion Memory 256 MB / 512 MB

MEM256E
MEM512C
For long printing, it is recommended to add an expansion memory.
(4) Hard disk

HDD-C1B
44158801TH Rev.3 11 /
1.4 Specifications
Category Item MC560/CX2033MFP/ES5460MFP

Exterior Width 500mm
Dimension
Depth 600mm
Height 575mm
Weight about 37kg
Width of print Width of print A4
Engine speed Monochrome 32ppm
(A4)
Color 20ppm
Fast print time Monochrome 8sec
(A4)
Color 11sec
Warm-up time 60sec
Low noise mode Unavailable
Resolution LED head 600dpi
Maximum input resolution 600 x 1200dpi
True 600 x 1200dpi
Output resolution True 600 x 600dpi
Step 4 step 600 x 600dpi
Economic mode toner saving by lowering light
CPU Core PowerPC750CXr
I-cash 32KB
D-cash 32KB (Internal L2:256KB)
Clock 500MHz
Bus width 64bit
RAM Resident 256MB
Option 256/512MB DIMM
ROM Program 64MB
Power 110-127VAC (Range 99-140VAC)/
Power input
Consumption 220-240VAC (Range 198-264VAC)
Power saving mode Below 27W
Idle 110W
Normal operation 490W
Peak 1200W
Operation 10 -32 , 17 -27
In operation (temperature at full color printing with quality guaranteed)
Environment
(temperature)
At stand-by 0 -43 , power off
In storage (1 year max.) -10 -43 , with drum and toner
At transport (1 month max.) -29 -50 , with drum and without toner
At transport (1 month max.) -29 -50 , with drum and toner
Operation 20%-80%, 50%-70%
Environment In operation (humidity at fullcolor printing with quality guaranteed)
(humidity) Max. wet bulb temperature : 25
10%-90%, Max. wet bulb temperature : 26.8 with power
At stand-by
off
In storage 10%-90%, Max. wet bulb temperature : 35
At transport 10%-90%, Max. wet bulb temperature : 40
44158801TH Rev.3 12 /

Service life Printer life 420,000 pages, 5 years
Max. 50,000 pages / mo.
Print duty (M=L/12, A=L/12/5)
Average 4,000 pages / mo.
MTBF (2.3% duty) Not applicable
MPBF 40,000 pages
MTTR 20 minutes
Toner life ODA Approx. 2,000 pages (black)
(5% duty) Starter toner OEL, AOS Approx. 1,500 pages (black)
(Appended) ODA Approx. 2,000 pages (color)
OEL, AOS Approx. 1,500 pages (color)
Approx. 8,000 pages (black)
Standard
Approx. 6,000 pages (color)
With 1st new Approx. 7,200 pages (black)
drum Approx. 5,200 pages (color)
Approx. 20,000 pages (With 3 pages / job)
Approx. 12,000 pages (With 1 pages / job)
Image drum life
Approx. 27,000 pages (When printed continuously)
Drum counter automatically reset
60,000 pages (size A4, with 3 pages/job), counter
Tranfer belt life
automatically reset
Fuser unit life 60,000 pages (size A4) counter automatically reset
Operation In operation (ISO 7779 front) Color mode : 57dB(A) or less (without option units)
noise Printing on one side Mono mode : 59.5dB(A) or less (without option units)
At stand-by 37dB(A)
Power-save mode Backgrand level
Paper handling Paper capacity (1st tray) Legal/universal cassette : 300 sheets (70kg)
Paper capacity (2nd tray) Legal/universal cassette(Optional) : 530 sheets (70kg)
Standard multi-purpose tray : 50 OHP sheets or 100 sheets
Paper capacity (Manual/auto)
of paper (70kg) or 10 envelopes
250 sheets (70kg)face-down/100 sheets (70kg)face-up in
Delivery
tray
Duplex Optional
Paper size 1st cassette:Legal13/13.5/14, letter, executive, A4, A5, B5, A6
Legal/universal or
2nd cassette:Legal13/13.5/14, letter, executive, A4, A5, B5
A4-size cassette/ Universal
Reply-paid postcard (Max. 176gsm) (Multi-purpose tray)
cassette
Legal 13/13.5/14, letter, executive, A4, A5, B5, A6, C5,

Automatic front feeder or DL, Com-9, com-10, Monarch, custom size, banners up to
manual feeder 1200mm (When paper length exceeds 356, its width shall
be from 210 to 215.9.)
Legal 13/13.5/14, letter, executive, A4, A5, Custom size
Two-sides
(Within permissible size and weight)
Min. paper size 105 x 148mm: A6
1st tray
(Models for Japan [100 x 148: Pstcard size]
2nd tray 148x 210mm: A5
Manual & auto (MPT) 100 x 148mm: Postcard size
Two-sides 148 x 210mm: A5
Paper 1st tray 64-120gsm
thickness
2nd tray 64-176gsm
Manual & auto (MPT) 64-203gsm OHP sheets available
Two-sides 64-105gsm
44158801TH Rev.3 13 /

Operator panel 16 characters in 2 line (Roman alphabet/Japanese kana)
LCD
No paper size indicated
Two
LED (Color)
(Green x1, dark amber x1)
Switch Six
Status Paper out Provided
switch/sensor
Paper low Not provided
Toner low Provided (Y.M.C.K)
Cover open Provided
Fuser unit temp. Provided
Paper size Not provided
Stacker full Not provided
Communication • Hi-Speed USB
Standard (On PCB)
interface • Ethernet
Additional Function Not available
Input/output switch Automatic
Emulation PCL (PCL5c, HP-GL) / PCL XL2.1 SIDM (IBM-PPR,
Standard EPSON-FX)
PostScript (Clone)
Emulation switch Automatic
Font Bit map Agfa
Type face 1(Line printer)
Scalable 1
Agfa micro-type 86
Type face
Scalable 2
Not available
Type face
Scalable 3
Agfa micro-type 136
Type face
Rasterizer Agfa UFST 4.0 (PCL)
Bar code USPS
OCR OCR-A, B
Japanese PCL font Not available
Japanese PS font Not available
Option RAM set 256MB/512MB
(Removable)
HDD 2.5” IDE HDD
Shipping set-
Japan GDI model
up
Others USB-IF logo Available
Windows logo Available
Operation by UPS (outage free power supply) is not
Operation by UPS
guaranteed. (Do not use UPS)
Flatbed 50,000 scans or 5 years
Life
More than 10,000 hours
MTBF More than 5,000 hours
MTTR Less than 30 min
44158801TH Rev.3 14 /

ADF Life 240,000 scans or more, or 5 years
Recommended daily scans Up to 1,000 pages a day
Recommended Pad
50,000 scans
Replacement
Recommended Roller
200,000 scans
Replacement
Copy Color: 600 x 600dpi
Copy Resolution
Mono: 600 x 600dpi
Color: 12cpm (A4)
Copy Speed
Mono: 20cpm (A4)
ADF Color: 23 sec.
Mono: 16 sec.
First Copy Out Time (FCOT)
FB Color: 27 sec.
Mono: 19 sec.
Duplex Copy No
Document Flatbed Letter, A4, A5

Size ADF Letter, A4, A5, Legal 14
Yes
Color Adjustment
(with Network Setup Utility)
Calibration for color copy No
Reductions/ 25-400%
Manual
Enlargement 1% Increment
Preset Scall- ODA: 25, 50, 78, 98 (Fit to page), 100, 127, 200%
ing OEL: 25, 50, 70, 98 (Fit to page), 100, 141, 200%
Copy Feature Copy Mode Speed, Text, Photo
Photo/ text
No
separation
Morie Remove No
Background
No
Remove
Density (Con-
-2, -1, 0, +1, +2
trast)
Number of
1-99
Copies
Collate Yes
ODA: 0-1in
Edge Erase
OEL: 0-25mm
Left/Bottom side
Margin shift ODA: 0-1in
OEL: 0-25mm
N-up 4-up
Banner Copy No
44158801TH Rev.3 15 /

Scan Scanner Type Flatbed
image sensor: Color CCD
Scanning Element
light source: CCFL
Auto Docu- Yes (face up)
Simplex
ment Feeder 50 sheets
(ADF) Duplex No
Warm-up Time 90s
Resolution 4800 x 4800dpi
(Selectable Optical: 600 x 1200dpi
on scanner
driver) Optical 1200 x 1200dpi
Input: 48bit
Color Depth
Output: 24bit
Color: 10ppm (A4)
Scanning Speed
Mono: 20ppm (A4)
Scanning Platen 21.59cm x 29.72cm

Area ADF 21.59cm x 35.56cm
Business Card (4 x 2.5in),
Document Platen
Photo (5 x 3.5, 3.5 x 5, 6 x 4, 4 x 6in), B5, A5, A4, Letter
Size (Select-
able on scan- Business Card (4 x 2.5in),
ner driver) ADF Photo (5 x 3.5, 3.5 x 5, 6 x 4, 4 x 6in), B5, A5, A4, Letter,
Legal
Document/ Platen 20mm

thickness ADF 16-28lb
File Format (Selectable image BMP, PDF, TIFF, JPEG
file format on Scanner utilities) (by ScanSoft PaperPort V9)
Driver Interface TWAIN, WIA
CIFS 1
Direct faxing
Features by addressing
1
<Fax number>
@fax
1
Scanner Yes/No
NonPlus No
Plus Yes
44158801TH Rev.3 16 /

FAX JP11 x 2 (Line/TEL)
Connentivity
PSTN, PBX Line
Compatibility ITU-T G3 (Super G3)
Modem Speed 33.6Kbps
3sec./Page
Transmission Time
Document: ITU-T#1/MMR/Std (200 x 100dpi)
ECM Yes
Std: 200 x 100dpi, Fine: 200 x 200dpi,
Fax Resolution
Photo: 200 x 200dpi, ExFine: 200 x 400dpi
Cording MH, MR, MMR (def)
Density (Contrast) -2, -1, 0, +1, +2/def0
Document Size Letter, Legal, A4
TX/RX Memory Size 4.0MB
Dialing Ten-key dial Yes (Stored Dial)
One-Touch
Yes (10)
dial
Speed dial 200 location (max. 32 digits each location)
Group max. 20 groups
Speed dial
seach by Yes
alphabet
Mixed Dial Yes
Features Feeder TX N/A
Memory TX Yes
Delayed TX
max. 5 TX time registration of Delayed TX and Delayed
Delayed Broadcast TX total.
Broadcast TX
Broadcast TX max. 100 station
Auto RX Yes
Manual RX Yes
Real-Time RX N/A
Memory RX Yes
Auto Redial Yes
Protocol Dump 2
Fax Forward-
2
ing
PC-Fax 2
DRD 2
2
Scanner Yes/No
NonPlus No
Plus Yes
44158801TH Rev.3 17 /
1.5 Interface specifications

1.5.1 Parallel interface specifications (N/A)
1.5.2 USB interface specifications
1.5.2.1 Outline of USB interface
(1) Basic specifications

USB (Hi-Speed USB supported)
(2) Transmission mode
Full speed (Max. 12Mbps ± 0.25%)
High speed (Max.480Mbps ± 0.05%)
(3) Power control
Self power device
1.5.2.2 USB interface connectors and cables
(1) Connector
• Printer side: B-receptacle (Female)
Upstream port
2 1
3 4
Connector pin assignment
• Cable side: B-plug (Male)
(2) Cables
Cable length: Specification: USB2.0 type cables five meters long or shorter. Cables two
meters long or shorter are recommended. (Shielded cable lines shall be used.)
1.5.2.3 USB interface signals
Signal name Function

1 Vbus Power supply (+5V)
2 D- For data transfer
3 D+ For data transfer
4 GND Signal ground
Shell Shield
44158801TH Rev.3 18 /
1.5.3 Network interface specifications
1.5.3.1 Outline of network interface
1.5.3.1.1 Basic specifications of network interface
Protocol family Network protocol Application

TCP/IP TCP, ARP, UDP LPR, RAW, FTP, Telenet
SNMPv1
DHCP/BOOTP
DNS
UPnP
SNTP
1.5.3.1.2 Basic specifications of network interface
Protocol family Network protocol Application

TCP/IP IPv4, TCP, UDP, ARP LPR, RAW, FTP
SMTP/POP3
HTTP
Telenet
SNMPv1
DHCP/BOOTP
DNS
SNTP
44158801TH Rev.3 19 /
1.5.3.2 Network interface connectors and cables
(1) Connectors
100 BASE-TX / 10 BASE-T (Automatically switched, not usable simultaneously)
1 8
Connector pin assignment

2) Cables
RJ-45 connectorized non-shielded twisted-pair cable (Category 5 recommended)
1.5.3.3 Network interface signals
Pin No. Signal name Direction Function

1 TXD+ FROM PRINTER Transmitting data +
2 TXD- FROM PRINTER Transmitting data -
3 RXD+ TO PRINTER Receiving data +
4 - - Not in use
5 - - Not in use
6 RXD- TO PRINTER Receiving data -
7 - - Not in use
8 - - Not in use
44158801TH Rev.3 20 /
1.5.4 Telephone Line Interface Specification
1.5.4.1 Outline of telephone Line Interface
The machine will reliably communicate with distant stations over voice-level telephone line.
1.5.4.2 Telephone Line Interface Connector and Cable
Printer side : RJ-11

Cable side : TEL Cable (Cable with plug)
Connector contact arrengement
A1 A6 B1 B6
LINE TEL
1.5.4.3 Telephone Line Interface signal
Contact No. Signal Name

LINE A1 N/A
A2 T2-EX
A3 L1
A4 L2
A5 T1-EX
A6 N/A
TEL B1 N/A
B2 N/A
B3 T2
B4 T1
B5 N/A
B6 EX
44158801TH Rev.3 21 /
2. EXPLANATION OF OPERATION
2.1 Electrophotographic processing mechanism
(1) Electrophotographic process

The electrophotographic process is explained briefly below:
1. Charging
A voltage is applied to the CH roller to electrically charge the surface of the OPC drum.
2. Exposure
The LED head radiates light onto the charged OPC drum in accordance with the image
signal. The electric charge of the radiated part of the OPC drum surface attenuates
depending on the intensity of the light, thus forming an electrostatic latent image on the
OPC drum surface.
3. Development
Charged toner adheres to the electrostatic latent image of the OPC drum by
electrostatic power, and forms a visible image on the OPC drum surface.
4. Transfer
Paper is placed over the OPC drum surface and an electric charge is applied to it from
the back side by the transfer roller, so that the toner image is transferred to the paper.
5. Drum cleaning
The drum cleaning blade removes toner remaining on the OPC drum after the transfer.
6. Removal of Electricity
7. Belt cleaning
The belt cleaning blade removes toner remaining on the belt.
8. Fuser
Heat and pressure are applied to the toner image on the paper to promote its fusion.
1. Charging
A voltage is applied to the charging roller, which is placed in contact with the OPC drum
surface, to charge the OPC drum surface.
Charging roller
Power
Supply
--
Unit --
--
OPC drum
44158801TH Rev.3 22 /
2. Exposure
The light emitted from the LED head is radiated onto the charged surface of the OPC
drum. The charge of the radiated part of the OPC drum attenuates according to the
intensity of the light, forming an electrostatic latent image on the OPC drum surface.
LED head
Charging roller
Power LED head

Supply -- - -
Unit - - - -
-
OPC drum
Paper OPC drum
3. Development
Toner adheres to the electrostatic latent image on the drum surface, thereby turning the
electrostatic latent image into a toner image.
1. The sponge roller allows the toner to stick to the development roller.
Charging roller
-- - -
-- -
--
-
-
- Sponge roller
OPC drum Development roller
2. The electrostatic latent image on the OPC drum surface is turned into a visible image by
the toner.
44158801TH Rev.3 23 /
4. Transfer
A sheet of paper is placed over the OPC drum surface, and an electric charge is given to
the paper from its back side by the transfer roller.
When a high voltage is applied to the transfer roller from the power source, the charge
induced on the transfer roller moves on to the surface of the paper through the contact
part between the transfer roller and the paper, the toner being attracted to the paper
surface from the OPC drum surface.
-- - -
-- -
--
OPC drum
-
-
-
- Paper
-
+
- -+-+ -+-+ -+ -+ -+ +
- -+-+ -+ -+
-+
+
-
+
- Transport belt
+
-
Transfer roller Power

Supply
Unit
5. Drum cleaning
Unfixed toner remaining on the OPC drum is removed by the drum cleaning blade and
collected into the waste toner area of the toner cartridge.
Waste toner
Toner cartridge
ID unit
-
-
Drum cleaning blade
-
-+ -+ -+ -+ -+ -+ -+ -+ -+ -+ -+
-+
44158801TH Rev.3 24 /
6. Removal of Electricity
Electrically charge on the OPC drum surface decveases by exppsing the OPC drum
surface after transfer to the light.
Charging roller
Board for the light
of the removal of electricity
Light for the

removal of electricity
OPC drum
7. Belt Cleaning
Toner remaining on the transfer belt is scraped off by the belt cleaning blade and collected
into the waste toner box of the transfer belt unit.
Transport belt
Belt waste toner box
Belt cleaning blade
44158801TH Rev.3 25 /
8. Fuser
The toner image which was transferred to the paper is applied heat and pressure as it
passes between the heat roller and the backup roller, and it is therefore fused onto the
paper.
For the sake of safety, a thermostat is provided; it comes on to cut off the voltage supplied
to the heater if the heat roller temperature rises above a certain preset temperature.
Thermostat
Thermistor
Halogen Lamp
Heat Roller
Backup Roller Paper
Pad
Beit
Thermistor
Fusing Temperature Settings
Paper thickness Paper Type Settings Temperature Settings
Thin Light Medium temp

Medium High temp
Heavy Medium temp
U.Heavy Low temp
Thick OHP Low temp
44158801TH Rev.3 26 /
2.2 Printing process

The paper fed from Tray 1 or Tray 2 is carried by the paper feed roller, register roller L and
transport roller. When the paper is fed from the MPT, it is carried by the MPT paper feed roller
and register roller U. Then, an unfixed toner image is created on the paper transported onto
the belt sequentially through the electrophotographic process of KYMC. Thereafter, the image
is fixed under heat and pressure as the paper goes through the fuser unit. After the image has
been fixed, the paper is unloaded to the stacker either face-up or face-down stacker, according
to the outputting method selected by opening or closing the face-up stacker.
While the above refers to the one-sided print operation of the printer, its operation in two-sided
print will be explained below.
When two-sided print is conducted, the paper that has passed through the fuser unit following
first one-sided print is sucked into the Duplex unit by the separator DUP. After entering the
paper reversal transport path, the paper is carried from there to the inside of the Duplex unit
by the inverting operation of the reversal roller. Then, after passed through the Duplex unit by
the transport roller that is located on the transport path inside the Duplex unit, the paper is fed
along the paper feed route of the Duplex unit to eventually merge the same route that comes
from the tray. From here on, the same operation as that of one-sided print of paper fed from the
tray takes place.
r
w n stacke
Face-do
Fac Heat roller

e-up MPT paper feed roller
sta Halogen lamp
cke
r
Backup roller
Transport belt
Separator DUP
MPT
Reversal roller
Register roller U
Transport roller
Belt
Register roller L
Paper reversal transport path

Paper feed roller
Subroller
Subroller
Transport roller
Paper feed roller
44158801TH Rev.3 27 /
(1) Paper fed from 1st Tray
1. As illustrated in Figure 2-1, when the solenoid is ON, the register motor rotates
(Counterclockwise turn), transporting the paper until the IN1 sensor comes ON. (When
the solenoid is ON, the paper feed roller is driven.)
2. After causing the IN1 sensor to come ON, the paper is further carried over a certain
distance to finally hit register roller L. (This corrects skew of the paper.)
3. As shown in Figure 2-2, the solenoid is turned OFF and the paper is transported by
register roller L. (When the solenoid is OFF, register roller L is driven.)
Register Roller U Register Roller U

IN2 Sensor IN2 Sensor
(Drive) (Drive)
WR Sensor Registration Roller L Registration Roller L

WR Sensor
(Stop) (Drive)

Hopping Gear Assy
Solenoid Lever
Solenoid Lever (Solenoid OFF)
(Solenoid ON)
Registration Motor Registration Motor
Sub Roller (CCW) Sub Roller (CCW)
(Drive) (Stop)
Paper Paper
Hopping Roller Hopping Roller
(Drive) (Stop)
Figure 2-1 Figure 2-2
(2) Paper fed from MPT
1. As illustrated in Figure 2-3, when the solenoid is OFF, the register motor rotates (Clockwise
turn), transporting the paper until the IN2 sensor comes ON. (As the register motor
rotates clockwise, the MPT paper feed roller is driven.)
2. After causing the IN2 sensor to come ON, the paper is further carried over a certain
distance to finally hit register roller U. (This corrects skew of the paper.)
3. As shown in Figure 2-4, the register motor rotates (Counterclockwise turn) to let
register roller U transport the paper. (As the register motor rotates counterclockwise,
register roller U is driven.)

Registration Roller U MPT Hopping Roller Registration Roller U
(Stop) (Drive)
WR Sensor Paper WR Sensor Paper
Hopping Gear Assy Hopping Gear Assy

Solenoid Lever Solenoid Lever
(Solenoid OFF) (Solenoid OFF)
Registration Motor Registration Motor
(CW) (CCW)
Figure 2-3 Figure 2-4
44158801TH Rev.3 28 /
(3) Transport belt
1. As the transport belt motor rotates in the direction of the arrow, the transport belt is
driven. The belt unit consists of one transport roller placed immediately underneath
each color drum, with a transport belt inserted in between them.
As the specified voltage is applied, the transport belt and the transport rollers send
the paper located on the transport belt to the fuser unit while transferring to it the toner
image present on each color drum.
Drum
Carrier belt
K Y M C
Carrier (transfer) roller

Carrier (transfer) belt motor
Figure 2-5
44158801TH Rev.3 29 /
(4) Up/down-motions of ID units
1. The up/down-motions of the ID units take place driven by the lift-up motor.
2. Figure 2-6 shows the motions of the different ID units when the printer is operated for
color print. As the lift-up motor rotates (Clockwise turn), the lift-up link slides to the left,
causing the ID units to come down, as can be seen in Figure 2-6. Namely, the printer
is readied for color print.
3. Figure 2-7 shows the motions of the different ID units when the printer is operated for
monochrome print. As the lift-up motor rotates (Counterclockwise turn), the lift-up link
slides to the right, causing the ID units to go up, except for the K-ID unit, as can be
seen in Figure 2-7. Namely, the printer is readied for monochrome print.
ID Unit Operations During Color Printing
C-ID Unit M-ID Unit Y-ID Unit K-ID Unit

C-ID Unit down
M-ID Unit down
Y-ID Unit down
K-ID Unit down
Lift uplink
C-ID Motor
(CCW)
Figure 2-6
ID Unit Operations During Monochrome Printing
C-ID Unit M-ID Unit Y-ID Unit K-ID Unit

C-ID Unit lift up
M-ID Unit lift up
Y-ID Unit lift up
K-ID Unit down
Lift uplink
C-ID Motor
(CW)
Figure 2-7
44158801TH Rev.3 30 /
(5) Fuser unit and paper output
1. As illustrated in Figure 2-8, the fuser unit and delivery roller are driven by the DC
motor. As the fuser motor rotates (Counterclockwise turn), the heat roller is turned.
This roller fixes a toner image by heat and pressure.
2. At the same time, the delivery roller rotates to output the paper.
Eject Roller
(Drive)
Fuser Unit
Heat Roller
(Drive)
Fuser Motor
(CCW)
Figure 2-8
(6) Cover-opening motion of color drift sensor and density sensor
1. As illustrated in Figure 2-9, when the fuser motor rotates (Clockwise turn), the cover-
opening gear rotates, causing the color drift sensor and density sensor cover to open.
2. As the fuser motor rotates in reverse (Counterclockwise turn), the engagement of the
cover-opening gear is freed, and the color drift sensor and density sensor cover now
closes.
Eject Roller
(Stop)
Heat Roller
(Stop)
Fuser Motor
(CW)
Cover Open Gear
Figure 2-9
44158801TH Rev.3 31 /
Outline of color drift correction
The color drift correction is implemented reading the correction pattern that is printed on the
belt with the sensor located inside the sensor shutter under the belt unit. This sensor is used to
detect and correct the pattern.
Automatic start timing of color drift correction:

• At power-on
• When the cover is closed after it is opened briefly
• When 400 pages or more have been printed since previous execution
A correction error may be issued due to an inadequate toner amount of the pattern
generated, a sensor stained with toner, deficient opening/closing of the shutter, or for
other reasons. However, even if an error is issued, it is not indicated on the operator panel.
Therefore, forcible color drift correction will have to be performed in the self-diagnostic
mode (Subsection 5.3.2.6) to check the error indication.
Transport belt
Sensor shutter
Color drift sensor Belt waste toner box
Belt motor Belt cleaning blade
Color drift sensor
Right color drift correction pattern
Left color drift correction pattern
Color drift sensor
44158801TH Rev.3 32 /
Error checking methods and remedial methods

The color drift correction test function among the other self-diagnostic functions is employed to
check errors. (Subsection 5.3.2.6)
Remedial methods against different errors

• CALIBRATION (L or R), DYNAMICRANGE (L or R)
Check 1: If the above indication appears, check the connected state of the sensor cable
(FFC).
If the connected state is found abnormal, restore it to the normal state.
Check 2: Check to see whether the sensor surface is stained with toner, paper dust or
any other foreign matter.
If it is found stained, wipe it clean.
Check 3: Check to see whether the sensor shutter opens and closes normally, by the
MOTOR & CLUTCH TEST of the self-diagnostic function. If the shutter oper-
ates imperfectly, replace the shutter unit.
• BELT REFLX ERR
Check 4: If this indication appears, check the cleaned state of the toner remaining on
the belt surface, in addition to making the above checks 1, 2 and 3. Take out
the belt unit, turn the drive gear located on the left rear side, and ensure that
the belt surface has been cleaned thoroughly.
If cleaning is not achieved perfectly and there still remains toner on the belt
surface after the drive gear has been turned, replace the belt unit.
• (Y or M or C) LEFT, (Y or M or C) RIGHT, (Y or M or C) HORIZONTAL
Check 5: If the above indication appears, check to see whether the toner is running
short, based on an NG-issuing color.
Replace the toner cartridge, as needed.
44158801TH Rev.3 33 /
Outline of density correction method
The density correction is implemented reading the correction pattern that is printed on the belt
with the sensor located inside the sensor shutter under the belt unit.
Automatic start timing of density correction:
• If the environment at power-on is greatly different from the one in which previous print was
executed.
• If at least one or more of the four ID count values are close to those of a new product at
power-on.
• When the ID count value exceeds 500 counts since previous execution.
A correction error may be issued due to an inadequate toner amount of the pattern gener-
ated, a sensor stained with toner, deficient opening/closing of the shutter, or for other reasons.
However, even if an error is issued, it is not indicated on the operator panel. Therefore, forcible
density correction will have to be performed in the self-diagnostic mode (Subsection 5.3.2.7) to
check the error indication.
Transport belt
Sensor shutter
Density sensor Belt waste toner box
Belt motor Belt cleaning blade
Density sensor
Density correction pattern
44158801TH Rev.3 34 /
Error checking methods and remedial methods

The density correction test function among the other self-diagnostic functions is employed to
check errors. (Subsection 5.3.2.7)
Remedial methods against different errors
• CALIBRATION ERR, DENS SENSOR ERR
Check 1: If the above indication appears, check the connected state of the sensor cable.
If the connected state is found abnormal, restore it to the normal state.
Check 2: Check to see whether the sensor surface is stained with toner, paper dust or
any other foreign matter.
If it is found stained, wipe it clean.
• DENS SHUTTER ERR
Check 3: Check to see whether the sensor shutter opens and closes normally, by the
MOTOR & CLUTCH TEST of the self-diagnostic function. If the shutter oper-
ates imperfectly, replace the shutter unit.
• DENS ID ERR
Check 4: Take out the ID unit and examine it to see if the drum surface has any abnor-
mal toner smudge.
Replace the LED head (Blurred focus), or replace the ID unit.
To test-operate a new ID unit, use the Fuse Keep Mode of the maintenance
menu.
44158801TH Rev.3 35 /
Principle of toner sensor detection
Toner LOW is detected by the toner sensor (Reflection sensor) installed inside the printer. The
shielding plate is mounted inside the ID and rotates in synchronization with toner agitation.
Moreover, the ID has a shutter fitted. The shutter is synchronized with the operation lever of
the toner cartridge, and the toner sensor can detect that the toner cartridge has been loaded
properly. Detection may not take place normally, and a toner sensor error may be issued, if
the shield plate or toner sensor is stained with toner, or if the ID unit and toner sensor do not
remain exactly opposite to each other in their positions.
Shutter
Shield plate
Toner Sensor
Principle of toner counter
After image data is developed to binary data which the printer can print, it is counted by an LSI
as a number of print dots. The amount of toner consumed is calculated from that count value,
and the remaining amount of toner is thus indicated. As opposed to this, the toner LOW detec-
tion by the toner sensor is implemented when the toner amount remaining inside the ID unit
physically decreases to below a certain level.
Principles of ID, belt and Fuser counters
ID counter: One count represents the value that results from dividing the amount of rota-
tion of the drum by three when three A4-size sheets are printed continuously.
Belt counter: One count represents the value that results from dividing the amount of rota-
tion of the belt by three when three A4-size sheets are printed continuously.
Fuser counter: One count is registered when paper is shorter than the length of Legal 13-inch
paper. When paper is longer than that, the count number is determined by the
number of times the Legal 13-inch paper length is exceeded. (Decimal frac-
tions rounded up)
44158801TH Rev.3 36 /
2.3 Theory of Operation of MFP
Cold
Fluorescent
Analog
Signal
Lens Main Digital Signal
Reflected CCD Board
Ray Image
Processor
CPU
MFP
Scanner
Control
Panel
Scan
USB Device Print PC
Controller
Print
Filing FTP/HTTP Server

RJ-45
CPU
Ethernet E-mail
SMTP Server
USB Host
Copy
Printer
Figure 2.1 Theory of Operation of MFP
The reflected rays of your original as shown in the above Figure 2.1 pass through the lens and
creates an image on the CCD (Charged Coupled Device). Then, according to the different light
intensity perceived by the CCD, the CCD will transfer these data into a series of analog signals
to the main board, where the signals are turned into digital signals. These digital signals
flow to the image processor and store into the CPU (Central Processing Unit). Through the
commands from the Control Panel, the digital signals may go to USB host (copy port) to send
copy command to printer, or to RJ-45 to send filing command to FTP/HTTP server or to send
email command to SMTP server, or to USB device (USB port) to PC for scan, or receive print
command from PC via USB device (USB port for print).
44158801TH Rev.3 37 /
3. INSTALLATION
3.1 Cautions, and do's and don'ts
• Do not install the MFP at high temperature or near fire.

• Do not install the MFP in a location where chemical reaction can take place (laboratory,
etc.).
• Do not install the MFP in the proximities of inflammable solvents, such as alcohol, paint thin-
ner, etc.
• Do not install the MFP within reach of small children.
• Do not install the MFP in an unstable location (e.g., on a rickety bench or grade).
• Do not install the MFP in a location laden with moisture or heavy dust, or in direct sun.
• Do not install the MFP in an environment with sea wind or corrosive gas.
• Do not install the MFP in a location with heavy vibration.
• In the event that the MFP is inadvertently dropped or its cover is damaged, remove the pow-
er plug from the power outlet and contact Customer Center.
Such mishap could lead to an electric shock, fire or injury.
• Do not connect the power cord, MFP cable or grounding wire in any other manner than the
way specified in the manual. Failure to observe the above could result in fire.
• Do not stick in an object into the vent hole.
Such action could lead to an electric shock, fire or injury.
• Do not place a glass filled with water or the like on the MFP.
Such action could lead to an electric shock or fire.
• When the MFP cover has been opened, do not touch the fuser unit.
Burns could be suffered.
• Do not throw the toner cartridge or the image drum cartridge into fire.
Dust explosion could cause burns.
• Do not use a highly combustible spray near the MFP.
Fire could be caused, since the MFP contains a part that gets extremely hot inside.
• In the event that the cover becomes unusually hot, emits smoke, ill odor, or abnormal noise,
remove the power plug from the power outlet and contact Customer Center.
Fire could break out.
• If water or any other liquid enters the inside of the MFP, remove the power plug from the
power outlet and contact Customer Center.
Fire could break out.
• If a pao not operate or disassemble the MFP in any other manner than the way specified in
the manual.
Failure to observe this warning could result in an electric shock, fire or injury.
44158801TH Rev.3 38 /
• Do not install the MFP in a location where its vent hole is blocked.
• Do not install the MFP directly on a shaggy carpet or rug.
• Do not install the MFP in a sealed room or other location with poor ventilation or permeabil-
ity.
• Install the MFP away from a heavy magnetic field or noise source.
• Install the MFP away from a video monitor or TV.
• To move the MFP, hold it by both sides of it.
• This MFP, which weighs Approx. 37kg, should be lifted up by two or more persons.
• When the MFP has the power switched on or is printing, do not come close to the paper de-
livery section. Such action could lead to injury.
When the precautionary notes concerning the installation and operation are explained, the
user should be referred to the precautionary notes given in the User's Manual. Especially, give
thorough explanation on the power cord and grounding wire.
44158801TH Rev.3 39 /
3.2 Unpacking method
Personal injuries may occur.
Make sure to lift up this MFP by two or more persons, since it weighs Approx. 37kg.
• Remove the four handles from the sides of the box, as illustrated below, and lift up the
corrugated fiberboard box.
44158801TH Rev.3 40 /
Moving MFP
Note! Do not hold the scanner unit to carry.
44158801TH Rev.3 41 /
3.3 MFP Installation Instructions

• Install the MFP in a location where the following temperature and humidity are met:
Ambient temperature: 10 - 32˚C
Ambient humidity: 20 - 80 %RH(Relative humidity)
Max. wet-bulb temperature: 25˚C
• Use caution to avoid dew condensation.
• If the MFP is installed in a location with ambient relative humidity below 30%, use a humidi-
fier or antistatic mat.
Installation space
• Place the MFP on a flat desk large enough to accommodate its footings.
• Provide ample spaces around the MFP.
Plan view
20cm
40cm
100cm
20cm
Side View
70cm
44158801TH Rev.3 42 /
3.4 Listing of component units and accessories

• Check to make sure that the component units are free from damage, dirt or other zirregulari-
ties in the appearance.
• Ensure that none of the accessories to the units is missing and that they are free from break-
age or other flaw.
• If any irregularity is discovered, contact User Management Section for instructions.
Make sure to lift up this MFP by two or more persons, since it weighs Approx. 37kg.
MFP (Main body)
Image drum cartridges (4 sets) fitted with starter toner cartridges (Installed in the MFP)
Inform the user that the toner cartridges and image drum cartridges can be separated
one from the other.
Paper tray Paper support Paper stopper
Core (4 pieces) Cable clamp
MFP software CD-ROM

Power cord
Warranty Card and User Registration Card
User's Manual (Setup)
User's Manual (CD-ROM)
TEL/LINE Cable
Note! No MFP cable is supplied with the MFP.
44158801TH Rev.3 43 /
3.5 Assembly Procedure

3.5.1 MFP main body
Remove Protective Equipment
1) Remove the protective tape (5 places) and the paper on the front of the printer.
Paper
Protective Tape
Note! Do not remove the transparent sheet on the ADF.

Transparent sheet
2) Remove the protective tape (2 places) on the back of the printer.
Protective Tape
3) Pull out the paper cassette.
4) Pull out the retainer.
5) Open the scanner.
6) Press the OPEN button and open the top cover.
Retainer
Paper cassette
OPEN Button
44158801TH Rev.3 44 /
7) Hold down the fuser unit lever (blue) in the direction of the arrow and remove the
stopper-release (orange).
Fuser unit lever (blue)
Stopper-release (orange)
Note! The stopper-release is necessary for printer transport. It should be kept.
44158801TH Rev.3 45 /
Install the image drum cartridges
1) Gently take out four image drum cartridges with starter toner cartridges installed.
Toner cartridge
Image drum cartridge
Note! • Do not move the blue levers of the starter toner cartridges.
• Handle the image drum cartridges (the green cylinder part of them) with enough
care because they are damaged very easily.
• Do not expose the image drum cartridges to direct sunlight or strong light (approx.
1500 lux or above). Even under room light, do not leave them exposed for five
minutes or longer.
2) Remove the tape that is fixing the protective sheet , and pull out the sheet in the
direction of the arrow.
Protective sheet
Protective sheet
Tape
Protective sheet
3) Pull out the protective sheet in the direction of the arrow.
Protective sheet
44158801TH Rev.3 46 /
4) Check the color of the label on each toner cartridge against the label on each image drum
cartridge.
5) Gently set four image drum cartridges back into the printer.
Label Image drum cartridge
Labels
6) Rotate the lever of each toner cartridge fully in the direction of the arrow.
Blue
Lever
Note! • The starter toner cartridges (the toner cartridges that come with the printer at the
time of purchase) can print approx. 1,500 A4 sheets in 5% print density.
• The starter toner cartridges can not be used again once replaced with ordinary
toner cartridges. Use up the starter toner cartridges first, and replace them with
ordinary toner cartridges respectively when [TONER EMPTY] is displayed.
44158801TH Rev.3 47 /
Install the parts of the scanner
1) Attach a paper tray, a paper support and a paper stopper.
Paper Tray
Paper Support Paper Stopper
2) Open the ADF unit to release the lock.
ADF unit
44158801TH Rev.3 48 /
Loading paper in the paper cassette
1) Pull out the paper cassette.

Note! Do not peel off the rubber attached to the plate.
2) Set the paper stopper securely, according to the paper size.
Paper guide
Paper stopper
Plate
3) Loosen the paper well and line up its vertical and lateral edges.
4) Load the paper with the print face down.

Note! • Place the paper aligned to the forward end of the paper cassette.
• Load the paper by avoiding to exceed the ( ) mark of the paper guide. (300
sheets of 70kg ream weight paper).
5) Fasten the paper with the paper guides.

6) Put the paper cassette back into the MFP.
Print face down
mark
Indication of remaining
Paper guide amount of paper
44158801TH Rev.3 49 /
Loading paper in the multi-purpose tray
1) Open the multi-purpose tray and also the paper supporter.
Multi-purpose tray
2) Set the manual feed guide to the paper size.

3) Line up the vertical and lateral edges of the paper.
Manual feed guide
Multi-purpose tray
Paper supporter
Manual feed guide
4) Insert the paper, print-face up, along the manual feed guide straight as far as it will go.
mark
5) Press the set button.
Set button
44158801TH Rev.3 50 /
Placing Your Document(s) in the ADF
1) Make sure your document is free of staples, paper clips and is not worn.
2) If you have multiple pages, fan your document(s) to avoid occasional paper jam. The ADF
can hold up to 50-page document at one time.
3) Place your document(s) with your text FACE UP in the ADF and assure top of the pages
feed in first.
4) Adjust the Paper Guides to center the document(s) in the ADF.
Setup orientation of papers
ABC
A4
R
LT
C B5
A6
A5
AB
Face Up
A6
A5
B5
A4
R
LT
Paper Guide
44158801TH Rev.3 51 /
Placing Your Document(s) on the Glass
1) Open document(s) cover to reveal the glass.

2) Place your document(s) with the text FACE DOWN on the glass and align the document(s)
in the upper-left corner of the glass as illustrated in the following figure.
Setup orientation of papers
Face Down
Align in the upper-left corner
3) Close the document cover.
44158801TH Rev.3 52 /
3.5.2 Connection of power cable
Power supply conditions
• Observe the following conditions:

AC: 110~127V±10%/220~240V±10%
Power frequency: 50Hz or 60Hz ± 2Hz Approx. 37kg
• If the available power is unstable, use a voltage regulator or the like.
• The maximum power consumption of this MFP is 1200W. Ensure that the power source of-
fers an ample margin in the power capacity.
It may expose you to electric shocks or cause a fire.
• Always before connecting or disconnecting the power cord and grounding wire, first turn off
the power switch.
• The grounding wire should be connected to a grounding terminal. Do Not in any event tie it
to a water service piping, gas piping, ground of telephone lines, lightning arrester or the like.
• When plugging in or unplugging the power cord, be sure to hold the power plug.
• Insert the power plug securely into the power outlet as far as it will go.
• Do not insert or remove the power plug with a wet hand.
• Lay the power cord in a location where it is not likely stepped on, and avoid placing anything
on the power cord.
• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.
• Do not use a damaged power cord.
• Avoid a starburst connection of cables.
• Do not connect the MFP to the same power outlet shared by other electric appliances. Es-
pecially, if the MFP is connected to the same power outlet in conjunction with an air-condi-
tioner, copy machine or shredder, electric noise may cause false operation of the MFP. If it is
inevitable to connect them to the same power outlet, use a commercial noise filter or noise-
cut transformer.
• Operate the MFP with the supplied power cord only.
• Do not use an extension cord. If it is inevitable to use an extension cord, use one with rating
of 15A or more.
• Use of an extension cord may hinder the MFP from operating normally because of voltage
drop.
• Do not turn off the power or pull out the power plug while the MFP is printing.
• If the MFP is going to be placed out of use for an extended period of time due to a long spell
of holidays or a trip out of town, unplug the power cord.
About the connections of the power cord and grounding wire, the user should be given thor-
ough explanation on the basis of the User's Manual.
44158801TH Rev.3 53 /
Connecting the power cord
Note! Ensure that the power switch is in OFF (O).
1) Insert the power cord into the MFP.

2) Connect the grounding wire to the ground terminal.
3) Insert the power plug into the power outlet.
Ground terminal
O I Grounding wire
Pressing ON (|) of the power switch
O I
44158801TH Rev.3 54 /
The following indication will be produced on the operator panel, and the display will be as
follows when the MFP has started up completely.
(Printer Operator Panel) (Scanner Operator Panel)
PLEASE WAIT Detecting Printer
RAM CHECK
INITIALIZING <<MC560>>
Initializing...
ONLINE A4 Auto
Quality=Speed Density=0
44158801TH Rev.3 55 /
Checking color copy movement
1) Fan sheets of paper and align edges.
2) Place color document(s) with the text face up in the paper tray of the ADF unit.
Paper tray
ABC C
AB
Text face up
3) Press the color copy button.
Color copy button
Confirm that the document(s) is/are color printed properly.
44158801TH Rev.3 56 /
Turning off the power
When a hard disk (optional) is not equipped, the power can be turned off as is.
O I
Note! Do not turn off the power while the MFP is printing.
On the MC560/CX2033MFP/ES5460MFP equipped with the built-in type hard disk (optional),
do not outright turn off the power, but follow the procedure described below.
Note! • Abrupt disconnection of the power could damage the built-in hard type disk, disabling
it.
• [SHUTDOWN MENU] is displayed only when the MFP is equipped with the optional
built-in type hard disk.
(1) Press the "Back" switch for four seconds or longer to cause [SHUTTING DOWN] to
appear.
(2) Press the "Set" switch.
[SHUTDWN] is displayed, and the shutdown processing begins
(3) When [PLEASE POW OFF/SHUTDOWN COMP] shows up, press OFF (O) of the power
switch.
O I
44158801TH Rev.3 57 /
3.5.3 Installation of optional items
(1) Installation of expansion memory set
Model name Memory volume

(Total memory volume)
None (Standard) 256MB(256MB)

MEM256E +256MB(512MB)
MEM512C +512MB(768MB)
Note! • Be sure to use genuine Oki Data parts. If any other parts are used, the MFP will
not function.
• To conduct long print on the MC560/CX2033MFP/ES5460MFP, it is recommended
to add a 256MB expansion memory.
• There is only one memory slot.
Turning OFF the MFP power and disconnecting the power cord
Note! If an expansion memory is installed with the power switched ON, the MFP may be
broken.
O I
Opening the cover-side-R(sub)
Cover-side-R(sub)
44158801TH Rev.3 58 /
(2) Installation of second tray unit
This tray is intended to increase the amount of paper that can be loaded in the MFP. It holds
530 sheets of 70kg ream weight paper, allowing to print 930 sheets continuously when com-
bined with the standard paper cassette and multi-purpose tray.
broken.
O I
Placing the MFP on the second tray unit.
Note! The MFP weighs Approx. 37kg. It should be lifted up by two or more persons.
1) Align the holes in the bottom of the MFP to the protrusions of the second tray unit.
2) Place the MFP gently on the second tray unit.
To detach the second tray unit, follow the same procedure inversely.
Holes in the printer bottom
Protrusions
2nd-piece
44158801TH Rev.3 59 /
(3) Installation of duplex unit
This unit is used for printing on two sides of paper.
Note! For two-sided printing, it is recommended to add an expansion memory. For details,
see "Expansion memories".
Type: DXU-C4D
broken.
O I
Peeling the protective tapes off the duplex unit
Protective tapes (2)
Install Duplex Unit
1) Insert the duplex unit into the lower part on the back of the MFP as far as it will go.
2) Ensure that the claw on either side of the duplex unit is securely accommodated in the
hole of the MFP.
Holes
Claws
Two-sided print unit
44158801TH Rev.3 60 /
(4) Installation of built-in type hard disk
This is a built-in type hard disk to be added to the MFP. It is used to conduct confirmation print,
authentication print, to store print jobs, or to make buffer print, and also when the [ COLLATE
FAIL] is indicated in a section-by-section print. Fonts cannot be downloaded to it.
Note! When the MFP has a built-in type hard disk installed, make certain to switch off the
MFP after executing the shutdown menu. If the power is turned off outright, the hard
disk may be damaged and broken.
Type: HDD-C1B
Memo The hard disk is segmented into the three partitions of "PCL", "Common" and "PSE".
When the MFP is shipped out of the factory or the hard disk is initialized, the following
sizes are assigned to the partitions:
PCL 20%
Common 50%
PSE 30%
Turning OFF the MFP power and disconnecting the power cord and MFP cable
Note! If an expansion memory is installed with the power switched on, the MFP may be
broken.
O I
44158801TH Rev.3 61 /
Installing the built-in type hard disk
1) Insert part "a" of the built-in type hard disk into hole "b" of the MFP main body, and align
the positions of the screw holes.
2) Install the two screws.
3) Push in the connector, until it snags in there with a click.
Connector
Hard disk
Connecting the power cord and MFP cable to the MFP, and turning on the power
Executing the Menu Map print, and ensuring that the built-in type hard disk has been installed prop-
erly.
1) Execute the Menu Map print.
Conduct the Menu Map print by referring to "3.6 Menu Map print".
2) Ensure that the capacity of the built-in type hard disk is indicated in "HDD".
Memo The capacity of the hard disk may be different from the example shown below.
Note! If no HDD capacity is indicated, redo the installation of the built-in type hard disk.
Then, setting needs to be made with the MFP driver to have the built-in type hard disk recognized.
If there is no MFP driver setup, see Sections 3 to 9 of the Setup Part of the User's Manual, and set up
the MFP driver. Then, make the setting.
44158801TH Rev.3 62 /
3.5.4 Confirmation of recognition of optional items
To check to see whether or not the optional items have been installed properly, execute the
Menu Map print by referring to "3.6 Menu Map print.
(1) Confirmation of recognition of expansion memory
Checking the contents of the Menu Map.

Check the total memory volume indicated in "Total Memory Size" of the header.
(2) Confirmation of recognition of second tray
<Confirmation of recognition of second tray>

Check the contents of the Menu Map.
Ensure that "Tray 2" is displayed in "Media Menu."
(3) Confirmation of recognition of duplex unit
<Confirmation of recognition of duplex unit>

Check the contents of the Menu Map.
Ensure that [DUPLEX: installed] is displayed in the header section.
44158801TH Rev.3 63 /
3.6 Menu Map print

This print is intended to ensure that the MFP operates normally.
1) Load A4 paper in the tray.

2) Press the "Menu +" switch several times to cause [Information Menu] to be
displayed.
3) Press the "Set" switch to cause [PRINT MENU MAP/EXECUTE] to appear.
4) Press the "Set" switch.
The Menu Map print will get under way.

When [Network] is displayed and the "Set" switch is pressed in (3) above, network
information will be printed.
Or, press and hold down for two seconds or longer the push switch above the network
connector on the back of the MFP main unit.
(Sample)
44158801TH Rev.3 64 /
3.7 Connection methods

<USB connection>
Preparing a USB cable
Note! • No MFP cable is supplied with the MFP. Provide one separately.
• Prepare a USB type cable separately.
• When connection is to be made in "Hi-Speed" mode of USB2.0, use a USB cable
conforming to the Hi-Speed specification.
Switching OFF the MFP and computer
Memo The USB cable can be plugged in or unplugged with the computer and MFP switched
ON. However, to be able to conduct the subsequent installation of the MFP driver and
USB driver securely, the power to the MFP should be turned OFF.
Interconnecting the computer and the MFP
1) Plug the USB cable into the USB interface connector of the MFP.
2) Plug the USB cable into the USB interface connector of the computer.
USB interface connector
Note! Be careful not to plug the USB cable into the network interface connector. Such wrong
connection could cause malfunction.
44158801TH Rev.3 65 /
<LAN cable connection>
Preparing a LAN cable
Switching off the MFP and computer
1) Plug the Ethernet cable into the Network interface connector of the MFP.
2) Insert the Ethernet cable into the hub.
Network interface connector
44158801TH Rev.3 66 /
3.8 Confirmation of paper used by the user

Load the media used by the user in the MFP, make Media Type/Weight settings, execute the
Menu Map/Demo print, and check to make sure that the printouts are free from toner flaking.

Setting values of the operation Setting *2 for [Media
Types Weight panel weight] of the printer
Media weight Media type *1 driver
Regular 55~64kg (64~74g/m2) Light Light

paper *3 2
65~89kg (75~104g/m ) Medium Medium
2
Plane
90~103kg (105~120g/m ) Heavy Heavy
104~172kg (121~200g/m2) Ultra heavy Ultra heavy
4
Post card * – – – –
Envelope *4 – – – –
Label paper Less than 0.1~0.17mm Thicker paper Label paper 1
Label paper
0.17~0.2mm Thickest paper Label paper 2
Transparency – – Transparency Transparency film
*5 film film
*1: The MFP comes with Media Type set to [Light] at the factory.
*2: The thickness and type of paper can be set on the operator panel and also via the MFP
driver. If those parametersare set via the MFP driver, the settings of the MFP driver will
have priority. If [Auto selectio] is selected in [Feed Trey] of the MFP driver, or [MFP set-
ting] is selected in [Media weight] , the print will take place with the settings made on the
operator panel.
*3: The paper thickness with which two-sided print can be conducted is from 65 to 90kg (75 to
105g/m2) of ream weight.
*4: For postcards and envelopes, there is no setting of Media Weight or Media Type.
*5: For OHP sheets, Media Type only is set. There is no need to make setting in Media Weight.
Memo If [Heavy] or [Ultra heavy] is selected in Media Weight, or [Label paper] or [OHP] in
Media Type, the print speed will be affected.
44158801TH Rev.3 67 /
4. REPLACEMENT OF PARTS
This section explains the field replacement procedures for parts, assemblies and component
units. While those replacement procedures refer to the disassembling of parts, follow the same
procedures inversely for reassembling them.
The part numbers (1, 2, etc.) employed in this manual are different from those assigned in the
corresponding configuration diagrams of Disassembly for Maintenance (44158801TL) and
RSPL (44158801TR).
4.1 Precautions on the replacement of parts

(1) Prior to replacing a part, be sure to disconnect the AC cord and interface cable.
(a) To disconnect the AC cord, always follow the procedure described below:
1 Turn off ("O") the power switch of the MFP.
2 Pull out the AC plug of the AC cord from the AC power outlet.
3 Unplug the AC cord and interface cable from the MFP.
Electric shock can occur.
When replacing the low voltage power supply, there is a danger of electric shock.
Be sure to wear an insulation gloves or do not touch the electrically conduction
areas or terminal directly by hand during the part replacement work.
It takes approx. 1 minute for capacitors to be completely discharged after the
AC power cord is disconnected. Be careful not to receive electric shock because
capacitors may not discharge in case if PCB is defective.
(b) To reconnect the MFP, always follow the procedure described below:
1 Plug the AC cord and interface cable into the MFP.
2 Insert the AC plug into the AC power outlet.
3 Turn on ("|") the power switch of the MFP.
Disconnect
Connect
(2) Do not disassemble the printer as long as it is operating normally.

(3) Limit disassembly to a necessary minimum. Do not remove other parts than those
specified in the part replacement procedure.
(4) Use the designated maintenance tools.
(5) Conduct disassembly by following the specified sequential order. Failure to observe this
order could damage the parts.
(6) Screws, collars and other small parts should be attached provisionally to their original
positions, since they are liable to be lost.
(7) When handling a microprocessor, ROM, RAM and other ICs and circuit boards, do not
wear gloves that tend to generate static electricity.
(8) Printed-circuit boards should not be placed directly on an equipment or floor.
44158801TH Rev.3 68 /
[Maintenance Tools]
Table 4-1-1 indicates the tools necessary to replace printed-circuit boards and component
units.
Table 4-1-1 Maintenance Tools

No. Service Tools Q' ty Place of use Remarks
No. 2-200 Philips

1 1 3~5 mm screws
screwdriver, Magnetized
2 No. 3-100 screwdriver 1
3 No. 5-200 screwdriver 1
4 Digital multimeter 1
5 Pliers 1
6 Handy cleaner 1 Warning
7 E-ring pliers 1
Warning: Use a vacuum cleaner dealing with toner. Using a common vacuum cleaner may
cause fire.
Table 4-1-2 indicates the tools necessary for using maintenance utilities.
Table 4-1-2 Maintenance Tools
No. Service Tools Q' ty Place of use Remarks
Laptop computer
1 Must have maintenance 1
utilities installed
2 USB cable 1
44158801TH Rev.3 69 /
4.2 Part replacement methods

This subsection explains the replacement methods for the parts and assemblies illustrated in
the disassembly system diagram below.
4.2.1 Left side cover
(1) Open the scanner.

(2) Open the top cover.
(3) Open the feeder unit.
(4) Remove screw (silver) , and detach left side cover . (Tool No.1)
Scanner
Top cover
Feeder unit
44158801TH Rev.3 70 /
4.2.2 Right side cover

(4) Remove screw , , and detach right side cover . (Tool No.1)
Scanner
Top cover
Feeder unit
44158801TH Rev.3 71 /
4.2.3 Detachment methods of the scanner and printer
(1) Detach left side cover and right side cover.(See Subsection 4.2.1,4.2.2)
(2) Remove the four screws , and detach the scanner . (Tool No.1)
Stand-unit-R Top-cover
Stand-unit-L
Stand-unit-L Stand-unit-R
Note! • Be careful when you detach the scanner. The stand-unit-R/L will rotate under the
restoring force of the spring when the scanner is detached from the printer.
44158801TH Rev.3 72 /
4.2.4 Scanner
4.2.4.1 ADF Unit
4.2.4.1.1 ASS'Y STOPPER
(1) Slide the ASS'Y STOPPER in the arrow direction and remove it.
4.2.4.1.2 ASS'Y PAPER SUPPORT
(1) Pull the ASS'Y PAPER SUPPORT in the arrow direction and remove it.
44158801TH Rev.3 73 /
4.2.4.1.3 ASS'Y PAPER TRAY
(1) Hold the both sides of the ASS'Y PAPER TRAY tightly. While keeping the both sides on
a level, lift up the ASS'Y PAPER TRAY in the arrow direction and remove it.
Hold here.
Hold here.
4.2.4.1.4 ADF ROLLER
(1) Raise the center of the ADF front cover in the arrow direction and open the ADF front
cover .
(2) Pinch the clicks on both sides of the ADF roller holder with your fingers. While bending
the clicks, pull down the ADF roller holder .
(3) Remove the ADF ROLLER with the shaft (Metal part).
Pinch a click on both sides

and bend it.
44158801TH Rev.3 74 /
4.2.4.1.5 ASS'Y PAD
(1) Raise the center of the ADF front cover in the arrow direction and open the ADF front
cover .
(2) Pinch the clicks on both sides of the ASS'Y PAD with your fingers. While bending the
clicks, pull up the pad.
Pinch a click on both

sides and bend it.
44158801TH Rev.3 75 /
4.2.4.1.6 ASS'Y HINGE LIGHT/HEAVY
(1) Remove the screw and remove cover-ADF-wire and detach the ADF-Cable in the ar-
row A direction.
(2) Open the ADF unit .
(3) While pulling up the ADF unit , release the lock of the ASS'Y HINGE LIGHT , insert-
ing a slot screwdriver into the notch as shown in the figure. Pull up the ADF unit fur-
ther.
(4) Release the ASS'Y HINGE HEAVY in the same way, pull up the ADF unit and re-
move it.
(5) Remove the six screws and remove the ASS'Y HINGE LIGHT and the ASS'Y
HINGE HEAVY .
ADF-cable
ASS'Y HINGE LIGHT
Lock
ASS'Y HINGE HEAVY
44158801TH Rev.3 76 /
4.2.4.1.7 ADF LEVER RELEASE
(1) Remove the two screws and remove the ADF LEVER RELEASE ASSY .
(2) Remove the screw of the ADF LEVER RELEASE ASSY .
44158801TH Rev.3 77 /
4.2.4.1.8 ASS'Y ADF DOCUMENT (with Hinge)
(1) While referring to sections 4.2.4.1.1 to 4.2.4.1.3, remove the ASS'Y STOPPER , the
ASS'Y PAPER SUPPORT , the ASS'Y PAPER TRAY .
ASS'Y ADF DOCUMENT (with Hinge)
44158801TH Rev.3 78 /
4.2.4.2 Flatbed unit
4.2.4.2.1 ASS'Y CONTROL PANEL
(1) Remove the three screws . (Figure 1)

(2) Pull the front of the ASS'Y CONTROL PANEL in the direction of arrow A and then slide
the ASS’Y in the direction of arrow B to remove it. (Figure 2)
(3) Disconnect the cable . (Figure 3)
Figure 1 Figure 2
Figure 3
44158801TH Rev.3 79 /
4.2.4.2.2 ASS'Y MAIN BOARD, ASS'Y STAND-L, R
(1) Detach the scanner. (See Subsection 4.2.3)

(2) Remove the screw and remove cover-ADF-wire and detach the ADF-cable in the ar-
row A direction.
(3) Open the ADF unit .
(4) While pulling up the ADF unit , release the lock of the ASS'Y HINGE LIGHT and the
ASS'Y HINGE HEAVY by inserting a slot screwdriver in the notch as shown in Figure 3.
Pull up the ADF unit and remove it.
ADF-cable
Figure 1
Figure 2 Figure 3
44158801TH Rev.3 80 /
(5) Turn over the flatbed unit.

(6) Remove the seven screws and open the ASS'Y MAIN BOARD . Disconnect all the
connectors and remove the ASS'Y MAIN BOARD . (See 4.4 Precautions for Main Board
Replacement)
(7) Remove the three screws and remove the cover-PCBA .
Connector
Connector
Connectors
Flatbed unit
Note! • Be careful when you detach the scanner. The stand-unit-R/L will rotate under the
restoring force of the spring when the scanner is detached from the printer.
44158801TH Rev.3 81 /
(8) Remove the two screws and detach Hinge-Cover-Upper-L/R .

(9) Remove the core .
(10) Remove the four screws and remove the ASS'Y STAND-L .
(11) Remove the four screws and remove the ASS’Y STAND-R with cable.
Cable
44158801TH Rev.3 82 /
4.2.4.2.3 ASS'Y FLATBED UNIT
(1) While referring to sections 4.2.4.2.1 to 4.2.4.2.2, remove the ASS'Y CONTROL PANEL
and the ASS'Y MAIN BOARD .
ASS'Y FLATBED UNIT
44158801TH Rev.3 83 /
4.2.5 Printer
4.2.5.1 Face-Up Tray
(1) Open face-up tray into the direction of the arrow, free the engagement on either side of
it while deflecting the tray, and remove the tray.
44158801TH Rev.3 84 /
4.2.5.2 Rear cover
(1) Open the face-up tray.

(2) Remove two screws (silver) . (Tool No. 1)
(3) Insert the flat-tipped screwdriver (Tool No. 3) into hole A, as illustrated in Figure (2), and
release two claws A.
(4) Now, release two claws B, and pull the upper part of rear cover in the direction of arrow A.
(5) Push the lower part of rear cover in the direction of arrow B, as shown in Figure (3),
and detach rear cover by freeing three claws C.
Claw A
Hall A
Figure (1)
Claw B
Claw A
Claw A Figure (2) Claw C

Claw B A
Hall A
Claw C
Figure (3)
44158801TH Rev.3 85 /
4.2.5.3 LED Assy/LED Assy springs

(2) After disconnecting the cable, first free hook part A by applying force in the direction of the ar-
row, as illustrated in Figure (2), and then, free hook part B, to finally remove LED Assy .
(In this operation, two springs will come out together with LED Assy .)
Hook part A
Top cover
Hook part A
Figure 2
Hook part B
Figure 1
44158801TH Rev.3 86 /
4.2.5.4 Control PCB
(1) Detach the scanner. (See Subsection 4.2.3.)

(2) Remove the two screws , and detach cover-stay(R) .
(3) Remove the two screws , and detach plate shield drawer .
(4) Remove the two screws , and detach cable-clamp . (2 places)
(5) Disconnect USB-cable , and power-cable , then remove the screw .
(6) Detach stay-Assy-R .
(7) Remove eight screws (silver) , and detach plate shield assembly by releasing con-
nector claws A. (Tool No. 1)
(8) Remove screw , and disconnect head cable . (Tool No. 1)
(9) Remove seven screws (silver) , disconnect all the cables, and disassemble control PCB
(TBR/TB2-6 PCB). (Tool No. 1)
Top cover
USB-cable
Power-cable
K
Y
M
C
Claws A
×7
Connector
×8
44158801TH Rev.3 87 /
4.2.5.5 Print engine controller PCB
(1) Remove the plate shield Assy. (See Subsection 5.2.5.4 (1) through (3).)
(2) Remove all the connectors and two screws (silver) , and disassemble the print engine
controller PCB . (Tool No. 1)
OPE
RFID
DCID
Print engine
controller PCB
SSNS
CUIF
PE
FSNS
HOP
SCANNER
HSOL DCHEAT
BELIDUP HVOLT
POW
FAN
RELAY
OPTION POWER
44158801TH Rev.3 88 /
Scanner Power
Toner sensor Control panel
ID motor RFID Controller PCB
Fuser motor
PE cable
SSNS cable
Paper feed motor
Low-voltage fan
Option (DUP & 2nd)
Junction PCB
Paper feed solenoid High-voltage power supply
Option (2ND) cable
Belt & IPUD motor
Low-voltage power cable
Figure 4-2-7-1 Cable route diagram of print engine controller PCB

OPE
RFID
DCID
SSNS
CUIF
PE
FSNS
HOP
DCHEAT
HSOL
SCANNER BELTIDUP
POWFAN
HVOLT
RELAY
OPTION POWER
Figure 4-2-7-2 Connection diagram of print engine controller PCB
44158801TH Rev.3 89 /
4.2.5.6 Top cover assembly
(1) Detach the scanner. (See Subsection 4.2.3)

(2) Detach the rear cover. (See Subsection 4.2.5.2)
(3) Remove the plate shield assembly, and then, the control PCB. (See Subsection 4.2.5.4)
(4) Remove the two screws and detach cover-stay(L), stay-guide-L-Assy.
(5) After unplugging the connector, disconnect hooked RFID cable .
(6) Remove two E-shaped retaining rings and two spring torsions , and detach top cover
Assy . (Tool No. 7)
Cover-stay(L)
Stay-Guide-L-Assy
44158801TH Rev.3 90 /
4.2.5.7 Top cover
(1) Detach the top cover assembly. (See Subsection 4.2.5.6.)

(2) Detach the Holder-post .
(3) Detach the Link-A and Link-B .
(4) Remove ten screws (black) , and detach cable cover and top cover . (Tool No. 1)
44158801TH Rev.3 91 /
4.2.5.8 Controller Panel Assy
1) Open the top cover.

(3) Detach the right side cover. (See Subsection 4.2.3.)
(4) Remove the plate shield assembly. [See Subsection 4.2.5.5 (2).]
(5) After unplugging the connector of the control panel assembly, free the hook.
(6) Remove four screws (silver) , and detach control panel Assy . (Tool No. 1)
Top cover
Feeder unit
44158801TH Rev.3 92 /
4.2.5.9 Board PRP/ Top Cover Handle
(1) Detach the control panel assembly. (See Subsection 4.2.5.8.)

(2) Release two claws A, as illustrated in Figure (2), and remove frame OP , lever lock
and spring compression .
(3) Release two claws B by forcing in the flat-tipped screwdriver (Tool No. 3), and remove the
cover assembly OP and spring torsion .
(4) Release two claws C of the cover assembly OP , as shown in Figure (3), and remove
Board PRP and cable .
Claws A
Claws B
Claws A
Figure (1)
Claws C
Figure (3)
Figure (2)
44158801TH Rev.3 93 /
4.2.5.10 Low-Voltage Power Supply / Low-Voltage Fan / Hopping Motor / Fuser Motor
Electric shock can occur.
When replacing the low voltage power supply, there is a danger of electric shock.
Be sure to wear an insulation gloves or do not touch the electrically conduction areas or
terminal directly by hand during the part replacement work.
It takes approx. 1 minute for capacitors to be completely discharged after the AC power cord is
disconnected. Be careful not to receive electric shock because capacitors may not discharge in
case if PCB is defective.
(1) Remove the cassette assembly.
(2) Disassemble the print engine controller PCB. (See Subsection 4.2.5.5.)
(3) Disassemble the control PCB. (See Subsection 4.2.5.4.)
(4) Disconnect all the cables from the Guide Cable PowerLow.
(5) Unplug the fuser I/F connector from the low-voltage power supply, and remove Guide
Cable PowerLow by releasing the two claws.
(6) Remove two screws (silver) and four connectors (CN1, CN2, CN3), and disassemble
low-voltage power supply . (Tool No. 1) At the same time, remove screw to disas-
semble AC inlet Assy .
(7) Release claw C, and remove low-voltage fan .
(8) Detach motor cover by releasing two claws D and claw E.
(9) Remove two screws (black) , unplug the connector, and disassemble hopping motor . (Tool
No. 1)
(10) Remove two screws (silver) , unplug the connector, and disassembleFuser Motor . (Tool
No. 1)
(11) Remove three screws (silver) , unplug the connector, and disassemble ID motor . (Tool
No. 1)
Note! • When reassembling low-voltage fan , confirm the direction.

• When reassembling low-voltage power supply , check the setting of the AC input
voltage.
120-V system: Install a short-circuit plug to connector CN6.
230-V system: Do not install a short-circuit plug to connector CN6.
• Replace low-voltage power supply and AC inlet assembly together in a pair.
(Parts approved in a pair under Safety Standard) (they were in a pair qualified to
applicable safety standards).
44158801TH Rev.3 94 /
Air
Claws C Claws D
Claws E
PRN PCB Short-circuit plug for CN6 Low-voltage power supply

POWER connector
Fuser unit I/F connector
CN6 CN2
CN3 CN1
AC switch
Notes!
CN6: Switching connector for AC input voltage setting
Short-circuit plug to be equipped for 100-V system/Short-circuit plug not to be equipped for
230-V system
44158801TH Rev.3 95 /
4.2.5.11 Guide Eject Assy / Color Register Assy / Board-PRY
(1) Detach the left side cover, right side cover, rear cover, and top cover assembly. (See Sub-
sections 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.5.2, and 4.2.5.6.)
(2) Remove the print engine controller PCB, control PCB, and low-voltage power supply. (See
Subsections 4.2.5.4, 4.2.5.5, and 4.2.5.10 (3).)
(3) Unplug the connector of the belt thermistor, remove two spring torsions , and disas-
semble cover driver by freeing the four claws with the flat-tipped screwdriver (Tool No. 3).
(4) Remove screws (silver) , and unplug the six connectors to disassemble Board-PRY . (Tool
No. 1)
(5) Remove two screws (silver) , and disassemble color register Assy . (Tool No. 1)
(6) Remove three screws (silver) , and free cable of the fuser I/F connector from the clamp.
Then, release the claw of guide cable by sliding it, and remove guide eject Assy . (Tool No. 1)
Claws
Claws
PUIF
EXIT
FUSER
DENS LCR
RCR
44158801TH Rev.3 96 /
Heater thermistor & F cut

(Black & white)
Exit sensor
Heater AC
(Black & white)
Belt motor Belt thermistor
Belt thermistor
Color registration sensor
Color registration sensor
Density sensor
REPLAY Board-PRY Belt motor
(To print engine controller PCB)
Figure 4-2-5-11-1 Board-PRY Cable Route Diagram
Left color registration sensor PCB Right color registration sensor PCB
(PRC PCB) (PRC PCB)
SNS SNS
CN CN
Fuser unit I/F connector Density sensor
LCR DENS RCR
FUSER
Exit sensor
EXIT
Driver junction PCB

(PRY PCB)
PU I/F connector
Figure 4-2-5-11-2 Board-PRY Connection Diagram
44158801TH Rev.3 97 /
4.2.5.12 Fan (Fuser)/ Belt Motor / High-Voltage Power Supply Board / Cover-Open Switch
(1) Detach the left side cover. (See Subsection 4.2.1.)

(2) Remove screw (silver) , unplug the connector, and disassemble belt motor . (Tool No. 1)
(3) Detach rear cover . (See Subsection 4.2.5.2.)
(4) Unplug the connector, and remove Fan (Fuser) by turning it clockwise.
(5) Free the connector and two claws A, and remove cover-open switch .
(6) Remove screws (silver) and seven claws B, unplug the two connectors, and disassem-
ble high-voltage power supply .
Air
Claws B
Claws B
Claws A
High-voltage power supply

CN4
Cover-open switch
CN2
FAN(Fuser)
CN3
TR-C TR-M TR-Y TR-K

Belt thermistor
CN1
44158801TH Rev.3 98 /
4.2.5.13 MPT Assy
(1) Open MPT Assy .

(2) Release the two stoppers by opening the two arms of MPT Assy toward the outside,
pull the assembly in the direction of the arrow to free the two fulcrums, and detach MPT
Assy .
Stoppers (2)
Arms
Fulcrums (2)
44158801TH Rev.3 99 /
4.2.5.14 Feeder Unit / Board-RSF/ MPT Hopping Roller / Frame Assy Separator / Cover Front

(2) Remove the plate shield, and unplug the connector. (See Subsection 4.2.5.4.)
(3) Free the claws of Stay L and Stay R , and remove feeder unit by sliding it to the
right.
(4) Detach the motor cover. (See Subsection 4.2.5.10.)
(5) Disassemble cover sensor by freeing the claw A.
(6) Unplug the connector, and disassemble Board-RSF .
(7) Remove MPT Assy. (See Subsection 4.2.5.13.)
(8) Detach lever by turning it until its claw is freed. (Tool No. 3)
(9) Remove two screws (black) , and detach stay L . (Tool No. 1)
(10) Remove four screws (black) , free two claws B on the front side, and disassemble feed
Assy . (Tool No. 1)
(11) Detach two lock shafts and two springs , and disassemble guide Assy by freeing
the four claws.
(12) Remove hopping roller shaft .
(13) Free the two fulcrums, and remove frame assembly separator and spring .
Claw A
Claws B
44158801TH Rev.3 100 /

4.2.5.15 Board-PRZ Lift-Up Motor/Solenoid/Paper-End Sensor
(1) Detach the left side cover, right side cover, rear cover, top cover unit, and feeder unit. (See
Subsections 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.5.2, 4.2.5.6 and 4.2.5.14.)
(2) Disassemble the print engine controller PCB and control PCB. (See Subsection 4.2.5.4,
4.2.5.5 and 4.2.5.10 (3).)
(3) Remove the guide cable Power Low, low-voltage power supply, and low-voltage fan. (See
Subsection 4.2.5.10.)
(4) Remove the cover driver, Board-PRY, color register Assy, and eject assembly. (See
Subsection 4.2.5.11.)
(5) Remove two screws (silver) and plate driver . (Tool No. 1)
(6) Release the latch, and disassemble cover hopping after unplugging the connector of
the 2nd tray.
(7) Detach the Fan (Fuser). (See Subsection 4.2.5.13.)
(8) Remove gear by releasing the two latches, and remove gear by releasing the latch.
Then, remove shaft by releasing the latch of gear .
(9) Remove two screws (silver) , and disassemble side plate R Assy . (Tool No. 1)
(10) Remove ten screws (silver) and plate outer , and detach four gears idle ID , gear
, three color , gear , , , , , and spring of the solenoid.
(11) Release the two latches, and remove guide Assy side R by sliding it upward.
(12) Remove screw (silver) , remove plate lockout ID and four screws , and detach plate
inner .
(13) Remove two screws (silver) , unplug the connector, and disassemble lift-up motor. (Tool
No. 1)
(14) Remove screw (silver) , and detach solenoid . (Tool No. 1)
(15) Remove the screw (silver) and three screws (black) , and detach gear Assy HP . (Tool
No. 1)
(16) Remove spring , free the claw, and remove bush , hopping roller shaft and frame
hopping .
(17) Disassemble paper-end sensor and paper-end lever .
44158801TH Rev.3 101 /

View A
Install aligninig the two position

cut as mark figure.
Lift-up motor
Install aligninig the two position

cut as mark figure.
Align the motor and connector in position to the arrow.
View A
Lever-Solenoid
( )
4-( )
44158801TH Rev.3 102 /

4.2.5.16 Feed Roller
(1) Remove the cassette.

(2) Release the latch, and remove feed roller .
Latch
44158801TH Rev.3 103 /

4.2.5.17 Shaft Eject Assy(FU) / Shaft Eject Assy(FD) / Eject Sensor
(1) Remove the eject Assy. (See Subsection 4.2.5.11.)

(2) Free the two claws, and divide the Assy between guide into lower and guide eject up-
per .
(3) Remove gear idle eject , and disassemble shaft Assy eject (FU) Gear-Eject, and
shaft Assy eject (FD) .
(4) Remove lever eject sensor and eject sensor .
Claws
44158801TH Rev.3 104 /

4.2.5.18 Fuser Unit

(3) Lift up the lock levers (2, blue) of the fuser unit in the direction of the arrow, and remove
fuser unit .
Scanner
(Blue)
Top cover
44158801TH Rev.3 105 /

4.2.5.19 Belt Unit

(3) Remove ID unit .
(4) Turn the lock levers (2, blue) of belt unit in the direction of the arrow , and hold belt
unit by the levers (Blue) to remove it.
Lock lever
Scanner
(Blue)
Top cover
Lever (Blue)
Lock lever
(Blue)
44158801TH Rev.3 106 /

4.3 Lubricating points

This subsection indicates the lubricating points of the printer. Conversely, it means that any
other parts than the specified lubricating points must not be lubricated.
There is no need to lubricate in the midst of a disassembling job. However, if lubricating oil has
been wiped off, supply the specified oil.
Lubricating work
(1) Symbols and names of oils
EM-30L : MOLYKOTE EM-30L
HP-300 : MOLYKOTE HP-300
PM : Pan Motor Oil 10W-40 or ZOA 10W-30
(2) Boundary samples of grease
Class S A B C D E F
Amount of grease(cc) 0.0005 0.003 0.005 0.01 0.03 0.05 0.1
W(mm) 1.24 2.25 2.67 3.37 4.86 5.76 7.26
Sample
44158801TH Rev.3 107 /

43070301 Plate-Assy.-Base
Gear-Z24-50-HP
Post EM-30L Class A
EM-30L Class A
Both sides EM-30L Class A
EM-30L Class A
Gear-Planet-HP
Bearing Cross-Section EM-30L Class C

EM-30L Class A EM-30L Class C
Stopper-HP
Post EM-30L Class A
EM-30L Class A
Holder-Planet
Bearing
EM-30L Class A
Shaft-Hopping
Stopper-Z45-48-HP
Side faces of shaft

groove section
Gear washers EM-30L Class C
EM-30L Class C
Tooth flanks and end faces

EM-30L Class C
Latch claws (Hatched parts) EM-30L Class C

EM-30L Class C
44158801TH Rev.3 108 /

42049701 Guide-Assy.-Cassette-L
Apply a normal amount of Molycoat(EM-30L)

to the hatched portions
Guide-Casette-L EM-30L Class C
43294901 Guide-Assy.-Cassette-R

Guide-Casette-R to the hatched areas
EM-30L Class C
44158801TH Rev.3 109 /

43073201 Gear-Assy.-HP
Holder-Gear-A

to the hatched areas
EM-30L Class C
-1 43070501 Plate-Ass.-Side-R
Apply a normal amount of Molycoat(EM-30L) to the hatched areas

EM-30L Class C
Bracket-Inner(Caulking)
44158801TH Rev.3 110 /

Gear-LiftUp-Z21Z34
Do not apply grease here to the hatched areas
EM-30L Class C
Gear-LiftUp-Z21Z34
Apply a normal amount

of Molycoat(EM-30L)
to the hatched areas
EM-30L Class C
Apply MOLYKOTE (EM-30L)

Gear-Idle-Z44 in a large quantity to the gear
tooth flanks at over 120 deg.
Gear-Idle-DrumZ24-102
EM-30L Class F
Enlarged view
Grease prohibition to post Gear-Idle-Exit-Z32
Grease prohibition to gear.
Gear-Idle-Heat_Z14-Z32
Gear-Planet-Assy
Apply a large around of

MOLYKOTE (EM-30L) to all gear teeth.
EM-30L Class F
Motor-DC-FC-45M
44158801TH Rev.3 111 /

Apply MOLYKOTE (EM-30L) in a small quantity to the hatched parts.

EM-30L ClassA
Apply MOLYKOTE (EM-30L) in a normal quantity
to the gear tooth tip.
EM-30L ClassC
Gear-LiftupR-Z56
Apply a normal amount MOLYKOTE (EM-30L)
to gear teeth of hatched area.
Link-Liftup-R EM-30L ClassC
(5)
Gear-LiftupR-Z32
Motor-Pulse-Liftup Gear-IdleLiftup-Z28
Gear-Liftup-Z121Z32
Apply MOLYKOTE (EM-30L) in a small
quantity to the hatched parts.
EM-30L ClassA Gear-Liftup-Z58Z25
Apply a normal amount MOLYKOTE (EM-30L) Apply MOLYKOTE (EM-30L) in a normal
to all gear teeth. quantity to the hatched parts.
EM-30L ClassC EM-30L ClassC
Gear-LiftupR-Z32
Apply a small amount MOLYKOTE (EM-30L)

to the hatched areas.
EM-30L ClassB

to the rotation shafts.
EM-30L ClassC
Plate-Side-R-Caulking
44158801TH Rev.3 112 /

43074901 Plate-Ass.-Side-L

quantity to the hatched part.
EM-30L Class A
Apply MOLYKOTE (EM-30L) in a normal

quantity to the gear tooth tips.
EM-30L Class C
Gear-Liftup-Z56
Link-Liftup-L
(5)
Post-Gearldle-L
Gear-Liftup-Z32 Apply MOLYKOTE (EM-30L) in a small

quantity to the hatched part.
quantity to the hatched parts EM-30L Class A
EM-30L Class C
Gear-Liftup-Z32
Apply a small amount MOLYKOTE (EM-30L)

to the hatched areas.
EM-30L ClassB
44158801TH Rev.3 113 /

42071401 Holder Assy.-Regist-L

Holder-Regist-L quantity to the hatched parts (parts having
the rotation shafts inserted).
EM-30L Class C
42071901 Holder Assy.-Regist-R
Holder-Regist-R

quantity to the hatched parts (parts having
the rotation shafts inserted).
EM-30L Class C
44158801TH Rev.3 114 /

43122601 Fuser-Assy
Cam-Release
Lever-Release
Plate-Side-R-Caulking(Fuser)
Class C
Apply HP-300(normal amount)
to hatched area
Gear-Fuser-(Z35)
Do not apply grease to the boss.
Gear-Idle-(Z21)
Do not apply grease to the gears.
43070401 Cassette-Assy
Assemble after applying MOLYKOTE (EM-30L) to the hatched

parts in the illustration below (both right and left).
Frame-Separation-Assy
Fulcrums of rotation and side

parts Class C
Grease must not seep out to the paper paths.
44158801TH Rev.3 115 /

43301501 Guide-Assy.-Eject-U
43560401~ Guide-Assy.-Eject-U
Guide-Eject-Upper
Apply MOLYKOTE (EM-30L) in a normal quantity to the gear

tooth flanks, shaft surfaces and flanges (6 points).
Grease must not stick to the paper paths.
EM-30L Class C
Shaft-Assy.-Eject(FD)

quantity to the bearings (2 points).
EM-30L Class D

quantity to the shaft surfaces (6 points).
Grease must not stick to the paper paths.
Shaft-Assy.-Eject(FU) part Y part X EM-30L Class A

quantity to the tooth flanks of each gear (3 points).
EM-30L Class C
quantity to the post surfaces
(parts having the shaft inserted).
EM-30L Class C
Grease must not stick to the hatched parts,

which compose the paper path.
Detail of part X Detail of part Y
44158801TH Rev.3 116 /

43070201 Frame-Assy.-Base
Apply PM in a small quantity to the hatched part.

(1) Applying method: Wipe the part with a cloth slightly impregnated with PM.
(2) After applying PM, insert and pull out the cassette several times to ensure that no noise is emitted.
PM Class C
Cassette-Assy.
44158801TH Rev.3 117 /

-1 43070101 Printer-Unit

to the tips of the terminals (4 points).
Plate-Ass.-Side-L
EM-30L Class C
Applied range of grease (4 points)
Plate-Driver-PU(Caulking)
Apply MOLYKOTE (EM-30L) in a normal quantity to the post.

EM-30L Class C

Gear-Idle-Belt to the gear tooth flanks.
EM-30L Class C

in a normal quantity to
the end face.
EM-30L Class C
44158801TH Rev.3 118 /

-2 43070101 Printer-Unit
Apply MOLYKOTE (EM-30L) in a normal quantity to the hatched parts.

EM-30L Class C
Plate-Ass.-Side-R
Spring-Torsion-L
Apply PM to the slot parts of the solid coiling of this

torsion spring using a brush.
(2 places)(At both Sides) Spring-Torsion-R
44158801TH Rev.3 119 /

43079601PA Belt-Unit

Apply MOLYKOTE (EM-30L) in a small in a normal quantity to the bearings
quantity to the inside of Bearing-TR (both sides).
(Belt) (4 points).
EM-30L Class C
EM-30L Class A
Enlarged view

in a normal quantity to the bearings
(both sides).
Enlarged view Apply MOLYKOTE (EM-30L) EM-30L Class A
in a small quantity to the inside of
Bearing-TR (Belt) (4 points). Apply MOLYKOTE (EM-30L) in a normal quantity
EM-30L Class C to the sliding face (clearance) between Gear-Drive-Z36
and Gearing-GSB (both sides).
EM-30L ClassA
44158801TH Rev.3 120 /

42626501 Sensor-Assy-Color-Regist
Plate-Sensor-C.Regist
Shaft-Cover-Sensor
Apply MOLYKOTE (EM-30L) in a small quantity to the hatched parts (At both Sides)(8 points).
EM-30L Class A
MOLYKOTE must not stick to the surfaces of Cover Sensor-C. Regist.
Cover-Sensor-C.Regist
44158801TH Rev.3 121 /

43081301 Roller-Assy.-Idle(FD)
2
Disassembled view
Range in which grease must not stick
44158801TH Rev.3 122 /

43301601 Roller-Assy.-BIAS(FU)C
Grease applying method:
Range in which grease must not stick
44158801TH Rev.3 123 /

43585301PA Cover-Assy-Top
Grease prohibition to post
Holder-Post
Apply a normal amount of MOLYKOTE (EM-30L)

to post (hatching portions)
ClassA
44158801TH Rev.3 124 /

43613901PA Stay-Guide R Assy (735MFP)
Apply a normal amount Apply a normal amount

of MOLYKOTE (EM-30L) of MOLYKOTE (EM-30L)
to post to hatching portions
Class B Class B

of MOLYKOTE (EM-30L)
to post
Class A
43613801PA Stay-Guide L Assy (735MFP)

of MOLYKOTE (EM-30L)to post
Class A

to post
Class B

to hatching portions
Class B
44158801TH Rev.3 125 /

4.4 Precautions for Main Board Replacement

User’s information, such as e-mail addresses in the address book and server profiles, is
recorded on a main board. If a problem occurs in a part of a main board and it prevents the
scanner unit from fulfilling its capabilities, the main board needs to be replaced with a new one.
In such a case, there is a potential risk that the use’s information, which is recorded on the
main board that is removed for replacement, may leak outsiders.
For this reason, to prevent the use’s information from leaking, be sure to delete all the e-mail
addresses and server profiles by using the OKI MFP network setup tool before removing a
used main board each time.
In addition, the OKI MFP network setup tool is capable of exporting/importing the data stored
in a main board to/from a PC. Export and import of data before and after a main board replace
ment,respectively, with this function allow easy transfer of the data between main boards.
The followings are the steps to transfer.
4.4.1 Deleting e-mail addresses
4.4.1.1 Steps of exporting and deleting data
Run the OKI MFP network setup tool.
Select the relevant device icon and click the “Address Book Edit” icon in the toolbar.
44158801TH Rev.3 126 /

Enter the password and click [Login].
Select all e-mail addresses in the list and then select [Tools] and [Export].
Specify the location to save, type the file name and click [Save].
44158801TH Rev.3 127 /

Select [Address Book] and [Delete].
Select [Yes].
Look in the operation panel of MC560 to make sure that the address book has become
empty.
44158801TH Rev.3 128 /

4.4.1.2 Steps of importing the exported data
Run the OKI MFP network setup tool.
Select the relevant device icon and click the “Address Book Edit” icon in the toolbar.
44158801TH Rev.3 129 /

Select [Tool], [Import] and [File...].
Select the data file saved by step of 4.4.1.1 and click [Open].
Select all e-mail addresses that you want them imported to the new main board, and click [OK].
Look in the operation panel of MC560 to make sure that the data has been imported to
theaddress book.
44158801TH Rev.3 130 /

4.4.2 Deleting Server Profiles
4.4.2.1 Steps of exporting and deleting data
Run the OKIMFP network setup tool.
Select the relevant device icon and click the “Scan To Profile Edit” icon in the toolbar.
44158801TH Rev.3 131 /

Select all profiles in the list and then select [Tool] and [Export...].
Specify the location to save, type the file name and click [Save].
44158801TH Rev.3 132 /

Select [Profiles] and [Delete].
Select [Yes].
Look in the operation panel of MC560 to make sure that the FTP address book has been
empty.
44158801TH Rev.3 133 /

4.4.2.2 Steps of importing the exported data
Run the OKIMFP network setup tool.
Select the relevant device icon and click the “Scan To Profile Edit” icon in the toolbar.
44158801TH Rev.3 134 /

Select [Tool], [Import] and [File...].
Select the data file saved by step of 4.4.2.1 and click [Open].
Select all e-mail addresses that you want them imported to the new main board, and
click [OK].
Look in the operation panel of MC560 to make sure that the data has been imported to
the FTP address book.
44158801TH Rev.3 135 /

5. PANEL SWITCH FUNCTIONS
5.1 Scanner Operator Panel

5.1.1 Layout
“Menu” button
“Numeric” button
“One-touch” buttons “Address book” button “Reset” button
“FTP Address” button
“Zoom” button “Power save” button
Zoom display Display
“Power” lamp
“Alarm” lamp
“Sleep” lamp
“Stop” button
“Color” button
“Copy Scaling selection” button “OK” button “Mono” button
“Send Mode” button “Additional settings” button
“Cursor” button
“Fax mode” button
“Copy mode” button “Buck” button
5.1.1.1 Buttons
(1) Copy Scaling selection button

This is to select scaling from the preset percentages (50%, 70%, 86%, 115%, 141%, 200%,
93%, Fit To Page, or Variable). (This function is only available in copy mode.)
(2) Zoom button
This is to make enlargements or reductions. Scaling can be made in 1% increments. (This
function is only available in copy mode and also when Variable is selected.) The scaling is
selectable from 25% up to 400%.
(3) One-touch buttons
This button makes it possible to send a facsimile with a touch of a button.
(4) Density button
This is to select the density level.
(5) Numeric buttons
These are used to enter the number of copies or E-mail addresses.
(6) Copy mode button
This button is used to switch the mode of the scanner to copy mode, lights up when pressed
and stays blue. After pressing this button, some settings related to the copy function become
available.
(7) Send Mode button
This button is used to switch the mode of the scanner to Send mode, lights up when pressed
and stays blue. After pressing this button, some settings related to Send functions become
available. If the device is not operated in the selected period of time (20 sec. to 180 sec.) to
switch to standby mode, Send mode is switched to standby mode that is set as the default
mode. The default setting of standby mode is Copy mode.
44158801TH Rev.3 136 /

(8) Fax Mode button

This button is used to switch the mode of the scanner to Fax mode, lights up when pressed
and stays blue. After pressing this button, some settings related to fax functions become
available. If the device is not operated in the selected period of time (20 sec. to 180 sec.)
to switch to standby mode, Fax mode is switched to standby mode that is set as the default
mode. The default setting of the standby mode is Copy mode.
(9) Cursor keys
These are to move the cursor up/down/left/right in the LCD. Also they offer the operator to
switch the indication of the function (up/down key).
(10) Return/Cancel button
This button offers two functions depending on mode.
1. To cancel a setting and to return to the next upper menu.
2. To clear whole line of the address entered during operation of a Send function.
(11) Select/OK button
This is to select an option and determine it. Also it is used to go to the next lower setting.
(12) Address book button
This is a button to display the existing E-mail addresses for the Send functions (in Scan To
mode).
This is a button to display the existing phone numbers for the fax functions (in Fax mode).
(13) FTP Address button
This is to display the existing FTP addresses for the Send functions. This button is only
available in Send mode. A user can choose destination from FTP addresses displayed and
execute the Send functions.
(14) Additional settings button
This button is used to change settings of copy mode, Send mode and Fax mode. The settings
can be changed in 20 to 180 seconds (from the Management menu). It is impossible to
change the user default settings with this button.
(15) Menu button
This is to set up the printer and the scanner.
(16) Reset button
This button offers two functions:
1. To reset each setting of copy and Send functions to the user default settings respectively if
held down for less than five seconds.
2. To reset each setting of copy and Send functions to the factory default settings respectively
if held down for five and more seconds.
(17) Power save button
This is to immediately switch to power save mode. (A continuous press is invalid.)
(18) Mono button
This is to send or copy documents in black and white.
(19) Color button
This is to send or copy documents in color.
(20) Stop button
This is to stop operation (the LCD display changes to the stand-by screen of each function)
but doesn’t affect the settings.
44158801TH Rev.3 137 /

5.1.2 LED/LCD
The front panel is equipped with 19 LEDs, two LED buttons, a 2-digit digital display, a 3-digit digital
display, and a 24-character × 2-line backlit LCD.
(1) LEDs
1. 100%: Lights up when 100% is selected to copy.
3. 70% (A4 > A5): Lights up when 70% (A4 > A5) is selected to copy.
4. 86% (A4 > B5): Lights up when 86% (A4 > B5) is selected to copy.
5. 115% (B5 > A4): Lights up when 115% (B5 > A4) is selected to copy.
6. 141% (A5 > A4): Lights up when 141% (A5 > A4) is selected to copy.
8. Fit To Page: Lights up when Fit To Page is selected to copy.
9. Variable: Lights up when Variable is selected to copy.
10. Speed: Lights up when Speed is selected to copy.
11. Fine: Lights up when Fine is selected to copy.
12. Density: The center LED of five LED lamps provided lights up usually. Another
LED lights up corresponding to the setting selected by pressing the
Density button.
13. Power: Lights up when the power is turned on and is ready for operation.
14. Alarm: Lights up when an error has occurred.
15. Power Save: Lights up in power save mode.
(2) Buttons with LEDs

A button with an LED is adopted for Copy mode and Send mode respectively. Pressing either
button lights up the corresponding LED.
(3) 2-digit digital display

This is to display the copy count.
(4) 3-digit digital display

This is to display the copy scaling.
(5) LCD specifications:

STN Gray Positive Transflective, normal temperature, 24-character × 2-line with backlighting,
at 6-o’clock visual position, yellow-green LED backlighting
Active area: 88.3mm × 11.5mm
Dot size: 0.6mm × 0.65mm
Dot pitch: 0.65mm × 0.70mm
44158801TH Rev.3 138 /

5.1.3 Control Panel
Part A Part B Part C
Part A: Copy Area

Scaling Area: Used to reduce document down to 25% or enlarge it up to 400%.
1
2
3
1. Increase scaling in 1% increment up to 400%

2. Decrease scaling in 1% Decrement down to 25%
44158801TH Rev.3 139 /

Part B: LCD-display & Function Keys:

Used to display current operation and select working mode.
Function Keys and others: (Shown in Europe style)
Used to indicate the number of copies.
Used to choose the copy mode. (also the default working mode)
Used to choose the Send e-mail, or Send Server mode.
Used to execute the additional settings of “copy” and “Send”

mode. (The settings are available only for three minutes. After
three minutes, the settings will return to default value.)
Used to move the cursor up/down/left/right in the LCD. The up/

down keys can be used to switch the indication of the function.
The left key can be used to return to the upper level of the
setting. The right key can be used to go to the lower level of
the setting.
Used to select and confirm current selections for the settings.
Used to cancel selections and go back to upper level of the

setting. The key is also used to cancel previous input.
Used to indicate the existing FTP address for “Send” function.

This key is only available in “Send” mode.
Used to indicate the existing E-mail address for “Send” function.

This key is only available in “Send” mode.
44158801TH Rev.3 140 /

Part C: Start & Other Keys: (Shown in Europe style)

Used to select special requirement or the start key to send or copy your document(s).
Used to set up the printer and the scanner.
Used to change scanner setting to factory default value.
Used to go to sleep mode immediately.

( A continuous press is invalid )
Power LED indicates power on and ready status.

Alarm LED indicates error status.
Sleep LED indicates power saving status.
Used to send or copy the document(s) in black and white.
Used to send or copy the document(s) in colors.
Used to stop every operation (LCD indication shifts to stand-by

screen of each function) but not effect all settings.
44158801TH Rev.3 141 /

6. MAINTENANCE MENUS
The adjustment of this printer can be implemented using the maintenance utility and also by
key input through the operator panel.
This printer provides maintenance menus, apart from the normal menus. Select the menu that
best suits the purpose of your intended adjustment.
6.1 System maintenance menu (For maintenance personnel)

This menu is activated when the power is turned with the MENU+ and MENU- keys held down.
The menu indications are given in English only, irrespective of the destination of the printer.
Note! Since this menu is likely to be changed depending on the destination or for other
reason, it is not disclosed to the end users.
Table 6-1 Maintenance menu indication table (1/3)
Category Item(1st Line) Value(2nd Line) DF Function
OKIUSER OKIUSER ODA Used to set the destination.

OEL * JPOEM1: Japan OEM
APS OEMA: Overseas OEM for A4 default
JP1 OEML: Overseas OEM for Letter default
JPOEM1 When the menu is dismissed, the
OEMA printer is automatically rebooted.
OEML Default is OEL.
MAINTENANCE HDD FORMAT EXECUTE - Initializes the HDD.

MENU When this item is executed, the menu
is dismissed, and initialization of the
HDD begins. [Display conditions]
* HDD mounted ("ADMIN MENU",
"BLOCK DEV MENU" and "INITIAL
LOCK" are YES, and "ADMIN
MENU," "FILE SYS MAINTE", and
"HDD" are "ENABLE".)
FLASH FORMAT EXECUTE - Initializes the Flash ROM.

When this item is executed, the menu
is dismissed, and formatting of the
flash device mounted in the Resident
(Onboard) begins. (CAUTION! NIC
F/W will be erased. See section 8.5.4)
MENU RESET EXECUTE - Resets the EEPROM contents to the

factory defaults. After the settings
have been changed, the printer is
automatically rebooted.
* Certain special items are not initialized.
44158801TH Rev.3 142 /

CONFIG MENU CODESET TYPE1 *J This menu is displayed on the printers

TYPE2 *E for all destinations.
TYPE1: Does not indicate Russian/
Greek.
TYPE2: Indicates Russian/Greek.
If TYPE2 is selected, "RUSSIAN"
and "GREEK" appear in the choices
of "USER MENU" - "SYS CONFIG
MENU" - "LANGUAGE". (Changed
values take effect after the printer is
rebooted.)
When the menu is dismissed, the
printer is automatically rebooted.
For destinations of OEL/APS/OEMA,
TYPE2 is the default value, and for
the rest of destinations, TYPE1 is the
default value.
TEST PRINT MENU TEST PRINT ENABLE Setting is made here to select either to
MENU DISABLE * display or not to display "PRT ID CHK
PATN" and "ENG STATUS IPRINT"
under "USER MENU" - "PRINT
INFORMATION" category. If this item is
set to "DISABLE," "PRT ID CHK PATN"
and "ENG STATUS PRINT" will not
be displayed at all. When the menu is
dismissed after changing the setting,
the printer is restarted.
PAGE CNT PRINT PAGE CNT PRINT ENABLE Setting is made here to select either to
DISABLE * display or not to display "USER MENU"
- "USAGE MENU" - "TOTAL PAGE
COUNT".
FUSE KEEP MODE FUSE KEEP MODE EXECUTE - Pressing the ENTER key issues a
command from CU to PU, making the
printer ONLINE.
A consumable part is replaced with a
new one with the power switched on
and the operation is checked (in this
condition, the new consumable fuse
is not cut, and the operation count
is not added to the value of the old
consumable part).
Turning off the power terminates the
check mode, and the mode becomes
invalid next time the power is turned on.
44158801TH Rev.3 143 /

PERSONALITY IBM PPR III XL ENABLE *E Changes the default of support PDL
DISABLE *J language for each destination.
The PDL language disabled in this
EPSON FX ENABLE *E menu will no longer be displayed
DISABLE *J in "USER MENU" - "SYS CONFIG
MENU" - "PERSONALITY". If print
HP-GL/2 ENABLE
data in the PDL language set to
DISABLE *
"DISABLE" is received, the printer
displays INVALID DATA and discards
the received data.
(HP-GL/2 is an item now under
development.)
If IBM PPR III XL and EPSON FX
are set to ENABLE on a printer for
domestic market, its operation is not
guaranteed. If ESC/P is set to ENABLE
on a printer for overseas, its operation
is not guaranteed.
ENGINE DIAG Activates the self-diagnostic mode of

MODE the engine.
Operations of the switches and LCD indications produced during the self-diagnostic mode are
different from the specifications for operation of the printer.
See 6.3.2 Self-diagnostic mode.
44158801TH Rev.3 144 /

6.2 Maintenance utility

The maintenance utility is used to perform the adjustments of Table 5-2.
Details of the maintenance utility are described below.
(1) Maintenance Utility Operation Manual:

42678801FU01 Rev5 or later (Japanese)
42678801FU02 Rev5 or later (English)
(2) The maintenance utility programs are indicated below.

* The programs can be downloaded from the FTP server for manuals.
(Window Person in charge of manuals can be accessed.)
Applicable Operating System File Name Part Number

Win9xMe (Japanese/English version) MuWin_Win9x.zip 42678801FW01 Rev.5 or later
WinNT/2000/XP (Japanese/English version) MuWin_WinNT.zip 42678801FW02 Rev.5 or later
44158801TH Rev.3 145 /

Table 6-2 Maintenance Utility Adjustment Items (1/3)
Section No. of Operation on

Item Adjustment the Maintenance Operator Panel
(Section No. corresponds to
Utility Operation the Maintenance manual)
1 PU (PRF) Board Copying of the EEPROM of PU PCB. Subsect. 2.4.1.1.1 Invalid operation
Replacement Adjustment purpose: The above data is copied Subsect. 2.4.2.1.1,
to another PU PCB in the event that the if copying of
current PU PCB needs to be replaced due to corrected data
maintenance replacement. of LED head is
involved.
2 PU Serial Number Reprogramming printer serial number recorded Section 2.4.1.1.2.1 Invalid operation
Setting on PU.
Adjustment Purpose: Set for a board replaced
for maintenance when it is impossible to copy
EEPROM of the PU board (I/F error etc.)
3 Factory/Shipping Switching between Factory mode and Shipping Section 2.4.1.1.2.2 Subsect. 6.3.2.10
Mode mode. Section 2.4.1.1.6.4
Adjustment purpose: If the EEPROM of the PU
PCB cannot be copied (I/F error, etc.), setting
is made on a maintenance replacement PCB.
Since the maintenance replacement PCB
usually comes set to the Factory mode, it needs
to be set to the Shipping mode by this function.
4 Replacement of Rewrite of the EEPROM set values of the CU Subsect. 2.4.1.1.3 Invalid operation
CU(TBR/TB2-6) PCB. Adjustment purpose: The EEPROM data
PCB is rewritten to another CU PCB in the event that
the current CU PCB needs to be replaced due
to maintenance replacement.
5 Serial Number Selection of the printer serial number recorded Subsect.2.4.1.1.4.3 Invalid operation
information setup on the CU, and rewrite of the output mode and
device serial numbers.
6 Set information of Verification of the serial No. information and Subsect. 2.4.1.1.7 Invalid operation
PCB items Factory/Shipping mode.
7 USB software Update of USB software Section 2.4.2.2.1 Invalid operation
update
8 NIC software Update of NIC software Section 2.4.2.2.2 Invalid operation
update
9 NIC Web Page Update of NIC Web Page Section 2.4.2.2.3 Invalid operation
update
10 Mac address setup Setup of Mac address Section 2.4.2.2.4 Invalid operation
11 Consumable Copying of consumable part counters Section 2.4.2.2.4 Invalid operation
part counter Drum counter (Y, M, C, K)
maintenance Fuser counter
function Belt counter
Toner counter (Y, M, C, K)
Adjustment purpose: When half-used
consumable parts are diverted to another
printer, the value of each consumable part is
copied.
44158801TH Rev.3 146 /


12 Setup of sensitivity Setup of the sensitivity correction value of color Prohibited to use Prohibited to use
correction value density sensor
of color density
sensor
[Prohibited to use]
16 Indication of LED Verification of LED head serial number Subsect.2.4.2.2.7.3 Subsect. 6.3.2.12
head serial number
*1
17 Setup of Setup/verification of the printer (CU) destination, Section 2.4.1.2.6 Subsect. 6.4.3
destination/PnP device ID and USB ID.
information
18 Indication of Verification of the current values of consumable Section 2.4.1.3.1 Subsect. 6.1
consumable part part counters.
counters
19 Check of menu set Indication of the set values of each menu set on Section 2.4.1.3.2 Menu Map print
values the printer (CU) . (See User's Manual.)
20 Destination/PnP Check/setting of destination of the printer (CU), Section 2.4.1.2.6 Subsect. 6.5.3
data Setting device ID, USB ID
18 Display of the Confirmation of the current value of the Section 2.4.1.3.1 Subsect. 6.1
Consumable consumable counter ENG STATUS PRINT
Counter
19 Check of Menu Displaying each menu setting value specified in Section 2.4.1.3.2 Menu Map Printing
Settings the printer (CU) (See User’s manual)
20 Check of printer Verification of the Mac address and versions of Section 2.4.1.3.3 Menu Map Printing
information various F/Ws of the printer. (See User’s manual)
21 Check of mounted Verification of the information of CPU and Section 2.4.1.3.4 Menu Map Printing
CPU/memory memory installed on the printer (CPU). (See User’s manual)
values
22 Test print Execution of local print function and Section 2.4.1.4.1 Each local print
transmission of specified files. (See System
Adjustment purpose: Verification of individual Specification.)
operation of the printer and transmission of
downloaded files.
23 Switch scan test Execution of switch scan test. Subsect. 2.4.1.5.1 Subsect. 6.3.2.3
Adjustment purpose: Operation check of each
sensor.
24 Motor clutch test Execution of motor clutch test. Subsect. 2.4.1.5.2 Subsect. 6.3.2.4
Adjustment purpose: Operation check of each
motor, clutch, etc.
25 Color registration Execution of color registration test. Subsect. 2.4.1.5.3 Subsect. 6.3.2.6
test
26 Density correction Execution of density correction test. Subsect. 2.4.1.5.4 Subsect. 6.3.2.7
test
27 Automatic density Setup of automatic density setting control Prohibited to use Prohibited to use
correction control parameters.
parameter setup
[Prohibited to use]
44158801TH Rev.3 147 /


28 Counter indication Verification of the counters for consumable Subsect. 2.4.1.5.7 Subsect. 6.3.2.8
parts, continuance of consumable parts and Subsect. 6.3.2.9
waste toner.
29 Local parameter Verification of the switching between Factory Subsect. 2.4.1.5.8 Subsect. 6.3.2.10
setup mode and Shipping mode, and the state of
Fuse.
30 Engine parameter Verification of the switching between Factory Subsect. 2.4.1.5.9 Subsect. 6.3.2.11
setting mode and Shipping mode, and the state of
Fuse.
*1: With functional limitation
Note! Items [Prohibited to use] must not be operated/set. There is a risk of abnormal
operation of the printer.
44158801TH Rev.3 148 /

6.3 Functions of user's maintenance menu

6.3.1 Maintenance menu (For end users)
There is a maintenance menu category among the normal menu categories. (Different from the
system maintenance menus)
The items that can be set under this menu are indicated below.
Maintenance Menu
Values in shaded areas are initial settings.
Operator Panel Display
Category Function
Item (Upper Display) Value (Lower Display)
Maintenance MENU RESET EXECUTE Initializes menu settings.

Menu
SAVE MENU EXECUTE Stores current menu settings.
RESTORE EXECUTE Changes menu settings to stored ones. Displayed only
MENU when menu settings have been stored.
POWER SAVE ENABLE Sets Power Save mode enabled/disabled. Shift time
DISABLE to enable Power Save mode can be changed using
“POWER SAVE SHIFT TIME” on “SYSTEM CONFIG.
MENU”.
PAPER BLACK 0 Corrects print nonuniformity due to temperature
SET +1 variation. With faded images, change the value.
+2 With scattering or snowing images in print output of
-2 high print density, decrement the value. With faded
-1 images in print output of high print density, increment
the value.
PAPER COLOR 0 Corrects print nonuniformity due to temperature
SET +1 variation. With faded images, change the value.
+2 With scattering or snowing images in print output of
-2 high print density, decrement the value. With faded
-1 images in print output of high print density, increment
the value.
OHP BLACK 0 Used to correct dispersion of printing due to
SET +1 temperature difference. Change the value if a printed
+2 OHP sheet is blurred.
-2 If an output shows a scattered- or snowing-like
-1 phenomenon in a high-density print part, decrement
the value. If an output is blurred, increment the value.
OHP COLOR 0 Used to correct dispersion of printing due to
SET +1 temperature difference. Change the value if a printed
+2 OHP sheet is blurred. If an output shows a scattered-
-2 or snowing-like phenomenon in a high-density print
-1 part, decrement the value. If an output is blurred,
increment the value.
44158801TH Rev.3 149 /

6.3.2 Self-diagnostic mode
Individual explanation of LEVEL0 and LEVEL1.
6.3.2.1 Operator panel
The explanation of the operations relating to the self-diagnosis presupposes the following
operator panel layout.
(1) Transition of menu items

Self-diagnostic
xxxxx Level transition is possible only when a part is displayed.
mode layout (Overall) xxxxx Transition of is activated with [MENU-] or [MENU+].
POWER ON
Hold down [MENU+] and [MENU-], until the system

maintenance menu is displayed.
Then, select ENGINE DIAG MODE and press [ENTER].
Not pressed
Normal operation mode LEVEL1-ENGINE DIAG MODE XX.XX

SWITCH SCAN
LEVEL0-engine status indication MOTOR & CLUTCH TEST
Engine status indication Press [MENU+] and [ONLINE] TEST PRINT
(Heater temperature) simultaneously.(3seconds)
REG ADJUST TEST
(Environmental temperature DENS ADJ TEST
& humidity indication)
CONSUMABLE STATUS
Indication of each voltage PRINTER STATUS
(TR, CH, DB, SB) during printing FACTORY MODE SET
Toner sensor SENSOR SETTING
Press [MENU-], [MENU+], [ENTER]
RFID internal noise monitoring LED HEAD DATA
and [BACK] simultaneously.(6seconds)
Error detail
44158801TH Rev.3 150 /

(1) Switchover of menu items

LEVEL0 The transition of xxxxx is activated when [BACK] or [ONLINE] is pressed and held down,
or [MENU+] or [MENU-] is pressed briefly.
The transition of xxxxx is activated with [MENU+] or [MENU-].
The item selection screen is restored when [BACK] is pressed and held down.
[BACK](2seconds)
Engine status indication
Heater temperature
Environmental temperature & humidity
Setup table
Transfer voltage [ONLINE](2seconds)
Transfer-OFF voltage *Belt temperature
Side thermistor Error detail
Error code indication, etc.
[MENU-] [MENU-]
Indication of each voltage Toner sensor
during printing RFID internal noise monitoring
[MENU+] [MENU+]
Transfer (TR) voltage(1)*1 Toner sensor status Noise detection count indication . Toner K error
Transfer (TR) voltage(2)*1 monitoring indication Noise detection count indication . Toner Y error
Charge (CH) voltage Noise detection count indication . Toner M error
Supply (SB) voltage Noise detection count indication . Toner C error
Development (DB) voltage
Environmental level
*1: A color is changed pressing the [CANCEL] key while it is indicated.
44158801TH Rev.3 151 /

(1) Transition of menu items
LEVEL1
Transition of xxxxx is selected with [MENU+] or [MENU-] and executed pressing [ENTER].
Transition to xxxxx is executed with [ENTER] or [BACK].
Select an item with [MENU+] or [MENU-] following the transition.
Pressing [ENTER] executes the test, and pressing [BACK] terminates it.
[MENU+] [MENU+] [MENU+] [MENU+] [MENU+] [MENU+] [MENU+]
44158801TH Rev.3
SWITCH SCAN MOTOR & CLUTCH TEST TEST PRINT REG ADJUST TEST DENS ADJ TEST CONSUMABLE STATUS
ENGINE DIAG LEVEL1 [MENU-] [MENU-] [MENU-] [MENU-] [MENU-] B
PAPER ROUTE : PU ID MOTOR [MENU-] PRINT EXECUTE [MENU-] REG ADJ EXECUTE DENS ADJ EXECUTE
A TONER SENS BELT MOTOR TEST PATTERN REG ADJ RESULT *2 DENS ADJ RAR-SET
K-ID UNIT
Y-ID UNIT
CVO UP_LU_FU FUSER MOTOR TEST CASSETTE *1 BLT REFLECT TEST DENS ADJ RESULT *4 M-ID UNIT
REG L/R_OHP_WG REGIST MOTOR PAGE BLT REFLECT RSLT *3 AUTO CALIBRATION C-ID UNIT
HT THERMISTER T1 HOPPING MOTOR COLOR <Indication items of color drift correction test result> <Indication items of density correction test result> FUSER UNIT
HUM_TEMP_DEN FRONT MOTOR DUPLEX *1 Items of *2. Items of *4. TR BELT UNIT
BELT_T REGIST SHUTTER MONO SPEED REG ADJ RSLT DENS ADJ RESULT K-TONER (FULL)
ID UP/DOWN EXIT SOLENOID COLOR SPEED SNS CARIBRAT (L) LEV0 V/D OUT YMC Y-TONER (FULL)
RFID COLOR DUPLEX MOTOR *1: TRAY2 and DUPLEX are displayed only SNS CARIBRAT (R) LEV0 V/D OUT K M-TONER (FULL)
F-RL SL BL DT-DC DUPLEX CLUTCH when these are mounted. D-RANGE (L) Y,M,C LEV0 V/D OUT RD C-TONER (FULL)
T1 PE_PNE_CVO T2 HOPPING MOTOR D-RANGE (R) Y,M,C H_DUTY DENS-K M-WASTE TNR CNT
T1 CASETTE SIZE T2 FEED CLUTCH CRSE ADJ Y L,R,X H_DUTY DENS-Y C-WASTE TNR CNT
T2 PE_PNE_CVO_CA ID UP/DOWN CRSE ADJ M L,R,X H_DUTY DENS-M K-STC MODE CNT
T2 HOP_LF_FED LV FAN TEST CRSE ADJ C L,R,X H_DUTY DENS-C Y-STC MODE CNT
T2 CASETTE SIZE FUSER FAN TEST FINE ADJ Y L,R,X L_DUTY DENS-K M-STC MODE CNT
DUP IN_RA_FNT DUPLEX FAN TEST FINE ADJ M L,R,X L_DUTY DENS-Y C-STC MODE CNT
DUP SK_CVO FINE ADJ C L,R,X L_DUTY DENS-M K REFILL CNT
Note: The motor keeps rotating if holding
REG ADJ Y L,R,X L_DUTY DENS-C Y REFILL CNT
down the [ENTER] key for two
seco when determining the choice REG ADJ M L,R,X FINAL DENS-K M REFILL CNT
of the motor. (The motor stops when REG ADJ C L,R,X FINAL DENS-Y C REFILL CNT
the [CANCEL] key is pressed.) CRSE ADJ Y [Y-L] FINAL DENS-M K OVER RIDE CNT
CRSE ADJ Y [Y-R] FINAL DENS-C Y OVER RIDE CNT
CRSE ADJ Y [X] DB DENS VALUE M OVER RIDE CNT
CRSE ADJ M [Y-L] DELTA-K 01=#*** C OVER RIDE CNT
CRSE ADJ M [Y-R] DELTA-K 04=#***
CRSE ADJ M [X] DELTA-K 07=#***
CRSE ADJ C [Y-L] DELTA-Y 01=#***
CRSE ADJ C [Y-R] DELTA-Y 04=#***
CRSE ADJ C [X] DELTA-Y 07=#***
FINE ADJ Y [Y-L] DELTA-M 01=#***
FINE ADJ Y [Y-L] DELTA-M 04=#***
FINE ADJ Y [Y-R] DELTA-M 07=#***
FINE ADJ Y [Y-R] DELTA-C 01=#***
FINE ADJ Y [X-L] DELTA-C 04=#***
FINE ADJ Y [X-R] DELTA-C 07=#***
FINE ADJ M [Y-L] DENS-K
FINE ADJ M [Y-L] DENS-Y
FINE ADJ M [Y-R] DENS-M
FINE ADJ M [Y-R] DENS-C
FINE ADJ M [X-L] BEFORE STD=***H
FINE ADJ M [X-R] AFTER STD=***H
FINE ADJ C [Y-L]
FINE ADJ C [Y-L]
FINE ADJ C [Y-R]
FINE ADJ C [Y-R]
FINE ADJ C [X-L]
FINE ADJ C [X-R]
<Indication items of color drift correction belt reflectivity test result> Items of *3.
L-SIDE
R-SIDE
[MENU+] [MENU+] [MENU+]

[MENU+]
PRINTER STATUS FACTORY MODE SET SENSOR SETTING LED HEAD DATA
B [MENU-] [MENU-] [MENU-] [MENU-] A
K-IMPRESSIONS FACTORY MODE *5 TONER SENSOR K
Y-IMPRESSIONS FUSE INTACT *6 BELT UNIT CHECK Y
M-IMPRESSIONS ID UNIT CHECK M
C-IMPRESSIONS <FACTORY MODE setting items. Items of *5 UP/DOWN SENSOR C
TOTAL SHEETS CNT FACTORY MODE REG ADJUST ERROR
FACTORY MODE Factory work mode DRUM OVER LIFE <Indication of LED header serial number>
SHIPPING MODE Factory work mode Note: Press and hold down (3 sec) the [ENTER] n 01 23 45 6789
cleared key to define a parameter. 1234567890123
Note: Press and hold down (3 sec) the [ENTER] key to n:K,Y,M,C
define a parameter.
<FUSE INTACT items> Item of *6
FUSE INTACT
BELT UNIT INTACT: Not cut yet/BLOWN:Cut already
FUSE UNIT INTACT: Not cut yet/BLOWN:Cut already
K-ID UNIT INTACT: Not cut yet/BLOWN:Cut already
Y-ID UNIT INTACT: Not cut yet/BLOWN:Cut already
M-ID UNIT INTACT: Not cut yet/BLOWN:Cut already
C-ID UNIT INTACT: Not cut yet/BLOWN:Cut already
152 /
6.3.2.2 Normal self-diagnostic mode (Level 1)
The menus of the normal self-diagnostic mode are indicated below.
Table 6-3 Maintenance Utility Adjustment Items
Maintenance Utility
Item Self-diagnosis Menu Adjustment ML3100/C3100 ML5200/ML5400
(Without a Panel) (With a Panel)
1 Switch scan test SWITCH SCAN Checking of inlet sensor and switch No.23 Not operable
2 Motor clutch MOTOR&CLTCH Operation test of motor and clutch No.24 Not operable
test TEST
3 Execution of TEST PRINT Print of test patterns built in PU Not operable Not operable
test print
4 Color drift REG ADJUST TEST Judgment of good/bad color drift No.25 Not operable
correction test correction mechanism.
5 Density DENS ADJ TEST Judgment of good/bad density No.26 Not operable
correction test correction mechanism.
6 Indication of CONSUMABLE Indication of consumed state of No.29 Not operable
consumable STATUS consumables
part counter
7 Indication of PRINTER STATUS Indication of lifetime consumed state No.29 Not operable
consumable of consumables
part
continuance
counter
8 Factory/ FACTORY MODE Switching between Factory mode No.3 No.3
Shipping mode and Shipping mode No.30 No.30
switching
9 Check of Fuse SET Indication of the status of each fuse No.30 Not operable
status
10 Engine SENSOR SETTING Setup of Enable/Disable of error No.31 Not operable
parameter setup detection by various sensors
11 Indication of LED HEAD DATA Indication of the serial number of No.16 Not operable
LED head serial LED head data
number
44158801TH Rev.3 153 /

6.3.2.2.1 Activation method for self-diagnostic mode (Level 1)
1. The system maintenance menu mode is activated when the power is turned on with the
MENU+ and MENU- keys held down simultaneously
2. Press the MENU+ or MENU- key several times, until "ENGINE DIAG MODE" is displayed.
Pressing the ENTER key causes "DIAGNOSTIC MODE" to appear.
3. XX.XX.XX of "DIAGNOSTIC MODE XX.XX.XX" which is displayed in the LCD section is the
version of the PU firmware. The set value of FACTORY WORKING MODE is indicated in the
lower line to the right. Normally, S-MODE for "SHIPPING" is displayed.
4. Pressing the MENU+ or MENU- key takes you to each self-diagnostic step. (The menu items
rotate as the MENU+ or MENU- key is pressed.)
6.3.2.2.2 Deactivation of self-diagnostic mode
1. Turn the power off, and on again after ten seconds.
6.3.2.3 Switch scan test
This self-diagnosis is practiced to check the inlet sensors and switches.
1. Activate the self-diagnostic mode (Level 1), press and hold down the MENU+ or MENU- key,
until "SWITCH SCAN" appears in the upper line of the display section, and then, press the
ENTER key. (The MENU+ key increments a test item, and the MENU- key decrements a test
item.)
2. Press and hold down the MENU+ or MENU- key, until the item corresponding to the unit of
Table 5-3 now to be tested appears in the lower line of the display section. (The MENU+ key
increments a test item, and the MENU- key decrements a test item.)
3. Pressing the ENTER key initiates the test, and the name and current status of the
corresponding unit are displayed.
Note) Pressing and holding down (2 sec) the [ENTER] key when a motor is decided causes
the motor to keep running.
Conduct this operation on each unit (Figure 6-1). The indications are produced in the
corresponding LCD display. (The indications vary from one sensor to another. See Table 6-3
for details).
4. Pressing the CANCEL key restores the status of Item 2 above.
5. Repeat Items 2 to 4, as needed.
6. To end the test, press the BACK key. (The status of Item 1 will be restored).
44158801TH Rev.3 154 /

RFID antenna M
RFID antenna C RFID antenna K
Toner sensor Y
Toner sensor M Toner sensor K
Toner sensor C
RFID antenna Y
Fuser unit thermistor Cover-open SW
Upper
Write sensor
Fuser unit thermistor
Upper, compensation
Inlet sensor 2
Exit sensor
Duplex print
inlet sensor
Inlet sensor 1
Temperature &
humidity sensor
Duplex print
Tray 1 paper-end
cover-open sensor
sensor
Tray 2 inlet
sensor
Tray 2 paper-end
Duplex print
sensor
bottom sensor
Duplex Belt thermistor 1st tray sensor Duplex print front sensor
print rear sensor
ID Up/Down sensor
Fuser unit thermistor
Lower Color registration sensor L
Color registration sensor R
Density sensor
Figure 6-1 Switch Sensor Positions
44158801TH Rev.3 155 /

Table 6-3 SWITCH SCAN Display Detail No functionality
*1: Indication only, without functionality
*2: L is indicated when a cover is open.
*3: Status of 1st cassette is indicated.
This function is effective only when a 2nd tray is installed.
44158801TH Rev.3
1 2 3 4
NO Upper line of Detail Display Detail Display Detail Display Detail Display
display section
1 PAPER ROUTE : PU Entrance Cassette Sns(IN1) H:Paper out Entrance-FF Sns(IN2) H:Paper out H:Paper out Exit Sns(OUT) H:Paper out
Entrance Belt Sns(WR)
L:Paper present L:Paper present L:Paper present L:Paper present
TONER SENS H:Blocked Toner-Y Sns H:Blocked H:Blocked Toner-C Sns H:Blocked
2 Toner-K Sns Toner-M Sns
L:Reflected L:Reflected L:Reflected L:Reflected
H:Close
3 CVO UP_LU_FU Cover-Upper L:Open
4 REG L/R_OHP_WG Aligment-Left-Sns AD value: Aligment-Right-Sns AD value:

***H ***H
Upper-Center-Thermister AD value: Lower-Center-Thermister AD value: Ambient Temp -Thermister AD value:

5 HT THERMISTER
***H ***H (Frame Temp) ***H
Hum Sns AD value: Temperture-Sns AD value: AD value: DensityYMC-Sns AD value:

6 HUM_TEMP_DEN DensityK-Sns
***H ***H ***H ***H
AD value:
7 BELT_T Belt-Thermister
***H
H:Down
8 ID UP/DOWN ID UpDown Sns
L:Up
Toner cartridge-K UID: Toner cartridge-Y UID: Toner cartridge-M UID: Toner cartridge-C UID:
9 RFID COLOR L*2
present/absent ***H present/absent ***H present/absent ***H present/absent ***H
10 F-RL SL BL DT-DC*1
H:Paper out
11 T1 PE_PNE_CVO 1st-Paper-End Sns L:Paper present
12 T1 CASETTE SIZE*1
H:Paper out H:Cassette present

13 T2 PE_PNE_CVO_CA 2nd-Paper-End Sns 1st-Cassette-Sns*3
L:Paper present L:Cassette absent
H:Paper out
14 T2 HOP_LF_FED 2nd-Feed Sns
L:Paper present
15 T2 CASETTE SIZE*1
H:Paper out H:Paper out Dup-Front Sns H:Paper out

16 DUP IN_RA_FNT Dup-In Sns Dup-Rear Sns
L:Paper present L:Paper present L:Paper present
156 /
Dup-Stack Sns(In2) H:Paper out Dup-Cover Open Sns H:Close
17 DUP SK_CVO
L:Paper present L:Open
6.3.2.4 Motor clutch test
This self-diagnosis is practiced to test motors and clutches.
1. Activate the self-diagnostic mode (Level 1), press and hold down the MENU+ or MENU-
key, until "MOTOR & CLUTCH TEST" appears in the upper line of the display section, and
then, press the ENTER key. (The MENU+ key increments a test item, and the MENU- key
decrements a test item.)
2. Press and hold down the MENU+ or MENU- key, until the item corresponding to the unit of
Table 6-4 now to be tested appears in the lower line of the display section. (The MENU+ key
increments a test item, and the MENU- key decrements a test item.)
3. Pressing the ENTER key initiates the test, causing the unit name to start blinking, and the
corresponding unit is driven for ten seconds (See Figure 6-2).
Note! After the unit has been driven for ten seconds, the status of Item 2. above is restored.
The unit is driven again when the corresponding switch is pressed again.
The clutch solenoid repeats ON/OFF operations in a normal printing drive. (Clutches
that cannot be driven individually due to their structural reason are driven along with
their motors.) * "ID UP/DOWN" continues being driven, until the "CANCEL" key is
depressed.
The motor keeps rotating if holding down the [ENTER] key for two seconds when
determining the choice of the motor. (The motor stops when the [CANCEL] key is
pressed.)
4. Pressing the CANCEL key stops the drive of the corresponding unit. (The indication of the
corresponding unit will be maintained.)
6. To end the test, press the BACK key. (The status of Item 1 will be restored).
44158801TH Rev.3 157 /

Fuser motor (Registration shutter)

ID motor
Duplex
print solenoid ID Up/Down motor
Duplex
print clutch
Tray 1
Hopping motor
(Registration motor,
front motor)
Duplex
print motor Hopping
solenoid
Tray 2 clutch
Belt motor
Tray 2 motor
Figure 6-2
Table 6-4
Unit Name Description of Control for Unit Driving

ID motor To be driven with all the IDs (Black/yellow/magenta/cyan) removed.
Belt motor To be driven with all the IDs (Black/yellow/magenta/cyan) removed.
Fuser motor -
Registration motor (Tray 1 hopping motor only is driven.)
Tray 1 hopping motor To be driven with Cassette 1 removed.
(Hopping solenoid driven simultaneously)
Front motor (Tray 1 hopping motor rotates in reverse.)
Color registration (Registration) (Fuser unit motor rotates in reverse.)
shutter
Duplex print solenoid (EXIT) -
Duplex print motor -
Duplex print clutch -
Tray 2 motor To be driven with Cassette 2 removed.
Tray 2 clutch -
ID UP/DOWN In closed state of TOP/FRONT cover
LV FAN TEST -
FUSER FAN TEST -
44158801TH Rev.3 158 /

6.3.2.5 Test print
This self-diagnosis is practiced to print test patterns built in PU. Other test patterns are stored
in the controller.
This print cannot be used to check the print quality.
To diagnose abnormal images, follow Section 7.
1. Activate the self-diagnostic mode (Level 1), press and hold down the MENU+ or MENU-
key, until "TEST PRINT" appears in the upper line of the display section, and then, press the
item.)
2. The lower line of the display section shows the set items that are applicable to the test print
only. Press and hold down the MENU+ or MENU- key, until the corresponding item appears,
and press the ENTER key. (The MENU+ key increments a test item, while the MENU- key
decrements a test item.)(If the set values of the items are not necessary (Default settings),
go on to Item 5.)
3. When the ENTER key is depressed after holding down the MENU+ or MENU- key in Item 2
above, a set item is displayed in the upper line of the display section, and a set value, in the
lower line. Pressing the MENU+ key increments the set value, and pressing the MENU- key
decrements it (the set value finally displayed will be applied). Pressing the BACK key defines
the value and restores Item 2. Repeat Item 3, as needed.
Indication Set value Function

PRINT EXECUTE – Pressing the ENTER key initiates print and pressing the CANCEL
key ends the print (Page by page).
TEST PATTERN 0 0: Blank sheet print
1 - 7: See the following page (Pattern print).
8 - 15: Blank sheet print
CASSETTE TRAY1 Select the paper feed source.
If TRAY 2 is not mounted, indication of TRAY2 will not be
TRAY2
produced.
MFP
PAGE 0000 Setup of the number of test-print pages
COLOR ON Select between Color print or Monochrome print.
* If ON is specified, ON/OFF needs to be specified for each color.
OFF
DUPLEX 2 PAGES STACK Two-sided print is conducted with two-page stack.
(Indicated only OFF is selected for two-sided print.
OFF
when Duplex is Two-sided print is conducted with one-page stack.
mounted) 1 PAGE STACK
MONO SPEED DEFAULT The monochrome print speed is set.

LOW:28ppm
LOW
HIGH:32ppm
HIGH DEFAULT:24ppm
COLOR SPEED DEFAULT The color print speed is set.
LOW:24ppm
LOW
HIGH:26ppm
HIGH DEFAULT:20ppm
* denotes a default value. Items set here are valid only in this test mode (Not written to the EEPROM).
44158801TH Rev.3 159 /

Notes!
PAGE setup----------------------- After shifting the digit of the set value with the MENU+ key
or MENU- key, press the ONLINE key. The set value will be
incremented. Pressing the CANCEL key decrements it.
COLOR setup-------------------- Pressing the ENTER key after selecting ON causes the data
indicated below to appear on the panel.
Print setup for each color----- Pressing the MENU+ key or MENU- key activates shifting.
Pressing the ONLINE key or CANCEL key switches between
ON and OFF. Pressing the BACK key restores the original panel
indications.
4. When the ENTER key is depressed while "PRINT EXECUTE" remains displayed in the lower
line of the display section in the operation of Item 2., the test print takes place with the set
values specified in Items 2 and 3.
Pressing the CANCEL key stops the test print.
If any of the alarms indicated in the Detail column of the table below is detected when test
print is started or during execution, it will be indicated on the panel, and the test print will be
interrupted. (For details on the errors, see Subsection 6.3.2.14 Details of panel indications.
In the case of a PU test print, the comments displayed will be different.)
Panel Display Detail

PAPER END The tray is out of paper.
SELECTED TRAY
DUPLEX UNIT IS A duplex unit is not installed.
NOT INSTALLED
ELECTED TRAY IS
S The selected tray is not
NOT INSTALLED installed.
REMOVE PAPER An internal error of the duplex
OUT OF DUPLEX unit occurred.
Print Patterns (Cannot be used for checking print quality.)

Patterns 0 and 8 to 15 ... Blank sheet print
Pattern 1 Pattern 2
44158801TH Rev.3 160 /

Pattern 3 Pattern 4
Pattern 5 Pattern 6
Note! If the solid print (Pattern 7) available

among the local print functions is
conducted with 100% of each color,
offset will take place. To prevent this
offset, it will be necessary to make
the print setup of each color as
specified in 3 of Subsection 6.3.2.5
and to limit the colors to be printed
simultaneously to two or less when
conducting the solid print No. 7.
Pattern 7
44158801TH Rev.3 161 /

• When print is executed, the following message is displayed:
P: Number of test-print pages (Unit: sheets)

W: Print wait time (Unit: seconds)
• Pressing the MENU+ key switches over the indication.
U: *** = Measured value of upper heater temperature [Unit: ˚C]

[###] = Target temperature for print execution [Unit: ˚C]
L : *** = Measured value of lower thermistor [Unit: ˚C]
[###] = AD value of lower thermistor reading [Unit: HEX]
T: Measured value of environmental temperature [Unit: ˚C]
H: Measured value of environmental humidity [Unit: %]
YTR, MTR, CTR and KTR denote the transfer voltage set values of the respective colors (Unit:
KV).
KR: BLACK transfer roller resistance value [Unit: uA]

YR: YELLOW transfer roller resistance value [Unit: uA]
MR: MAGENTA transfer roller resistance value [Unit: uA]
CR: CYAN transfer roller resistance value [Unit: uA]
ETMP: Hopping motor constant-speed correction parameter (Environmental

temperature)[Unit: DEC]
UTMP: Fuser motor constant-speed correction parameter (Target fuser temperature)[Unit:
DEC]
REG: Hopping motor constant-speed timer value (I/O set value)[Unit: HEX]
EXT: Fuser motor constant-speed timer value (I/O set value)[Unit: HEX]
44158801TH Rev.3 162 /

KID, YID, MID and CID denote the constant-speed timer values of the respective ID motors (I/
O set values) [Unit: HEX].
BELT: Constant speed timer value of belt motor (I/O set value) [Unit: HEX]
FRM : [***] = AD value of frame thermistor reading [Unit: HEX]
(xxx) = Frame temperature [Unit: ˚C]
HT: Fuser temperature setup table ID No. [Unit: HEX]

DB: Development voltage setup table ID No. [Unit: HEX]
TR1: Transfer voltage parameter VTR1 table ID No. [Unit: HEX]

TR2: Transfer voltage parameter VTR2 table ID No. [Unit: HEX]
TROFF: Transfer OFF voltage setup table ID No. [Unit: HEX]

BELT: *** = Belt temperature [Unit: ˚C]
xxx = AD value of belt thermistor reading [Unit: HEX]
6. Press the CANCEL key to terminate the test. (Status of Item 1 restored)
44158801TH Rev.3 163 /

6.3.2.6 Color registration adjustment test
This self-diagnosis is practiced to conduct testing on the color registration function of the print-
er and to locate the cause of color drift.
Restore the normal operation of the printer by following the troubleshooting procedure if any
error is issued during the color registration test.
1. Activate the self-diagnostic (Level 1) mode, and press and hold down the [MENU+] key or
[MENU-] key, until the following message appears:
2. Pressing the [ENTER] key causes the following message to appear. Press and hold down the
[MENU+] key or [MENU-] key, until the intended item is displayed.
3. Pressing the [ENTER] key executes the test of the item currently displayed on the panel.
<<REG ADJ RESULT is executed>>

Color registration adjustment test is conducted. ([READY] light blinking)
When the test ends, the test result (OK or error name) appears in the upper line of the
display section, and **** RESULT, in the lower line.
Pressing the [MENU+] key increments the test result sequentially in the display.
Pressing the [MENU-] key decrements the test result sequentially in the display.
Pressing the [BACK] key restores the status of Item 2.
Pressing the [CANCEL] key while the test is under way aborts the test ([READY] light
comes on) and restores the status of Item 2.
<<REG ADJ RESULT is executed>>

The same as the key operation in the execution of REG ADJ EXECUTE .
<< BLT REFLECT TESTis executed>>

A color drift belt reflection test is conducted. ([READY] light blinking)
44158801TH Rev.3 164 /

<<BLT REFLECT RSLT is executed>>

The same as the key operation of Item . in the execution of BLT REFLECT TEST.
4. Repeat Items 2 and 3, as needed.

5. Press the [BACK] key to terminate the test. (Status of Item 1 restored)
Color registration adjustment test items
Display Function
REG ADJ EXECUTE Execution of Color registration adjustment
REG ADJ RESULT Viewing of the Color registration adjustment result
BLT REFLECT TEST Execution of the judgment of good or bad Color registration
adjustment belt reflectivity
BLT REFLECT RSLT Viewing of the result of judgment of good or bad Color registration
adjustmentbelt reflectivity
6.3.2.7 Print density adjustment test
This self-diagnosis is practiced to conduct testing on the Print density adjustment function of
the printer and to view the execution result. This test is executed also to judge whether the Print
density adjustment mechanism is normal or abnormal.
[MENU-] key, until the following message appears:
[MENU+] key or [MENU-] key, until the intended item is displayed.
3. Pressing the [ENTER] key executes the test of the item currently displayed on the panel.
<< DENS ADJ EXECUTE is executed>>
A density correction test is conducted. ([READY] light blinking)
44158801TH Rev.3 165 /

<<DENS ADJ RESULT is executed>>

The same as the key operation of Item in the execution of DENS ADJ EXECUTE.
<<DENS ADJ PAR-SET is executed>>

Indication only, without functionality.
<<AUTO CALIBRATION is executed>>

Automatic setting of a density sensor sensitivity correction value is made. ([READY] light
blinking)
4. Repeat Item 3, as needed.
Density correction test items
Display Function
DENS ADJ EXECUTE Execution of Print density adjustment
DENS ADJ PAR-SET Indication is given, without functionality.
DENS ADJ RESULT Viewing of Print density adjustment result

AUTO CALIBRATION Automatic setting of Print density adjustment value
44158801TH Rev.3 166 /

6.3.2.8 Indication of consumable part counters
This self-diagnosis is practiced to indicate the consumed states of consumable parts.
1. Activate the normal self-diagnostic mode, and press and hold down the [MENU+] key or
[MENU-] key, until "CONSUMABLE STATUS" appears in the display section, and then, press
the ENTER key. (The MENU+ key increments a test item, and the MENU- key decrements a
test item.)
2. Pressing the [MENU+] key or [MENU-] key causes the consumed states of consumable parts
to be displayed sequentially. (ONLINE and CANCEL keys inactive to pressing)
Display Upper Display Lower Format Unit Function

K-ID UNIT ********IMAGES DEC Images The number of rotation after a new
TONER ID of each color was attached.
Y-ID UNIT ********IMAGES DEC Images
The number is converted into A4 3Page/
M-ID UNIT ********IMAGES DEC Images Job.
C-ID UNIT ********IMAGES DEC Images
FUSER UNIT ********PRINTS DEC Prints The number of sheets after a new FUSER
unit was attached.
TR BELT UNIT ********IMAGES DEC Images The number of sheets after a new BELT
unit was attached.
K-TONER (FULL) ********% DEC % The number of use of each color TONER.
Y-TONER (FULL) ********% DEC %
M-TONER (FULL) ********% DEC %
C-TONER (FULL) ********% DEC %
M-WASTE TNR CNT ********TIMES DEC Times The number of disposal TONER count.
*Disposal TONER becomes full in more
C-WASTE TNR CNT ********TIMES DEC Times
than 32times.
K-STC MODE CNT ********TIMES DEC Times The printing dot counts of each color
TONER cartridge.
Y-STC MODE CNT ********TIMES DEC Times
(The count is NOT reset by replacing
M-STC MODE CNT ********TIMES DEC Times cartridge.)
C-STC MODE CNT ********TIMES DEC Times
K REFILL CNT ********TIMES DEC Times The printing dot counts of each color
TONER cartridge.
Y REFILL CNT ********TIMES DEC Times
(The count is reset by replacing
M REFILL CNT ********TIMES DEC Times cartridge.)
C REFILL CNT ********TIMES DEC Times
K OVER RIDE CNT ********TIMES DEC Times The number of times that each color
TONER cartridge life was extended.
Y OVER RIDE CNT ********TIMES DEC Times
M OVER RIDE CNT ********TIMES DEC Times
C OVER RIDE CNT ********TIMES DEC Times
44158801TH Rev.3 167 /

6.3.2.9 Indication of printed page counters
This self-diagnosis is practiced to indicate the current number of printed pages of the printer.
1. Activate the normal self-diagnostic mode, and press and hold down the [MENU+] key or
[MENU-] key, until "PRINTER STATUS" appears in the display section, and then, press the
item.)
2. Pressing the [MENU+] key or [MENU-] key causes the current number of printed pages to be
displayed sequentially. (ONLINE and CANCEL keys inactive to pressing)
Display Upper Display Lower Format Unit Function

K-IMPRESSIONS ********IMAGES DEC Images The printing number of sheets of each
color.
Y-IMPRESSIONS ********IMAGES DEC Images
M-IMPRESSIONS ********IMAGES DEC Images
C-IMPRESSIONS ********IMAGES DEC Images
TOTAL SHEET CNT ********COUNTS DEC Prints The indication of the total printing number
of sheets
6.3.2.10 Factory/Shipping switching
This self-diagnosis is practiced to switch the PU(PRF) PCB between the Factory mode and the
Shipping mode.
[MENU-] key, until the following message appears.
[MENU+] key or [MENU-], until the intended item (See the table below) is displayed.
3. Pressing the [ENTER] key while the desired set item remains displayed selects the set value.
4. Pressing and holding down (3 sec) the [ENTER] key while the value you want to set remains
displayed registers the currently displayed value on the EEPROM. Then, the status of Item 2
will be restored.
44158801TH Rev.3 168 /

6. Press the [BACK] key to terminate the test. (The status of Item 1 is restored.)
Indication Set Value Function

FACTORY FACTORY MODE For setting the Factory Work mode (Fuse-cut disabled mode).
MODE
SHIPPING MODE For canceling the Factory Work mode and enabling the fuse-cut
function.
FUSE INTACT BELT UNIT ****** For checking the FUSE status of the transfer belt unit.
FUSE UNIT ****** For checking the FUSE status of the fuser unit.
Note: ****** is
either K-ID UNIT ****** For checking the FUSE status of the K-ID unit.
INTACT or
BLOWN. Y-ID UNIT ****** For checking the FUSE status of the Y-ID unit.
M-ID UNIT ****** For checking the FUSE status of the M-ID unit.
C-ID UNIT ****** For checking the FUSE status of the C-ID unit.
6.3.2.11 Setup of self-diagnostic function
This self-diagnosis is practiced to Enable/Disable the error detections of the different types of
sensors.
The error detections can be disabled or enabled temporarily for troubleshooting purposes.
However, this function should be exercised with utmost care, since it is able to set some items
that require specialized knowledge in the field of operation of the engine.
After the function has been used, the set values must always be reset to the defaults.
[MENU-] key, until the following message appears.
[MENU+] key or [MENU-], until the intended item (See the table below) is displayed.
3. Pressing the [ENTER] key allows to select the set value in the lower line of the display
section.
Pressing the [MENU+] key increments the set value.
Pressing the [MENU-] key decrements the set value.
4. Pressing and holding down (3 sec) the [ENTER] key while the value you want to set remains
displayed registers that value on the EEPROM. Then, the status of Item 2 will be restored.
44158801TH Rev.3 169 /

6. Press the [BACK] key (except for the status of Item 4.) to terminate the setup. (Status of Item
1 restored)
Indication Set Value Operation of set value Function

TONER ENABLE Detects. For enabling/disabling toner sensor operation.
SENSOR
DISABLE Does not detect.
BELT UNIT ENABLE Checks For enabling/disabling checking operation for
CHECK mounted belt unit.
DISABLE Does not check.
ID UNIT ENABLE Checks For enabling/disabling checking operation for
CHECK mounted ID unit.
DISABLE Does not check.
P/DOWN
U ENABLE Detects. For enabling/disabling ID UP/DOWN sensor
SENSOR operation.
DISABLE Does not Detect.
REG ADJUST ENABLE Stops. For enabling/disabling the stop of error issuance,
ERROR based on color drift detection value.
DISABLE Does not stop.
DRUM OVER STOP Does not extend life. For enabling/disabling extending the drum life.
LIFE
CONTINUANCE Extends life.
Hatched part: Denotes the default.
6.3.2.12 Indication of LED head serial number
This self-diagnosis is practiced to check whether a downloaded LED head data matches the
serial number of the actual LED head.
1. Activate the self-diagnostic mode, and press and hold down the [MENU+] key or [MENU-]
key, until "LED HEAD DATA" appears in the upper line of the display section, and then, press
the ENTER key. (The MENU+ key increments a test item, and the MENU- key decrements a
test item.)
2. Pressing the [MENU+] key or [MENU-] key causes the serial numbers of the K/Y/M/C LED
head data to be displayed sequentially.
** ** ** **** : Rev No.

xxxxxxxxxxxxx : Serial No.
44158801TH Rev.3 170 /

6.3.2.13 Details of panel indications
Display
LCD (English) Ready Attention

Description Level
( means no display in upper line) LED LED
INITIALIZING Off Off It displays, while not having determined the system Initializing
display language immediately after turning on a
power supply.
If a display language is determined, it will change to
the display of Priority 2.
INITIALIZING Off Off The controller side is initializing. Initializing
MENU RESETTING Off Off Indicates that EEPROM of the controller side is being Initializing
reset.
The condition that EEPROM is reset includes the
followings.
• Changes of CU ROM (when disagreement of CU
F/W version is detected)
• Changes of destination channel
• Compulsive initialization of EEPROM (System
maintenance menu)
• OEM set of PJL command
RAM CHECK Off Off RAM checking. The rate of checked capacity to the Initializing
**************** total capacity is displayed on the 2nd line.
WAIT A MOMENT Off Off The network is in initializing. Initializing
NETWORK INITIAL
FLASH ERASE Off Off Displays that the content of Flash memory is being Initializing
deleted.
Deletion is not conducted unless an explicit
specification is implemented in PJL command.
The PJL command which eliminates a flash memory
is secret to users. Therefore, this status does not
occur in a user environment.
FLASH CHECK Off Off Displays that the content of Flash memory is being Initializing
checked.
It is displayed it when Resident/Option Flash memory
not fomented are detected, or "Format Flash ROM" of
a system maintenance menu is performed.
The function mentioned above is secret to users.
Therefore, this status does not occur in a user
environment.
FLASH FORMAT Off Off Displays that Flash memory is being formatted. Initializing
It is displayed it when Resident/Option Flash memory
not fomented are detected, or "Format Flash ROM" of
a system maintenance menu is performed.
The function mentioned above is secret to users.
Therefore, this status does not occur in a user
environment.
CHECKING FILE SYSTEM Off Off Displays that HDD file system is being checked. Initializing
Process Check of File System is valid to start from
"FILE SYS MAINTE2"-"CHECK FILE SYS" of Admin
Menu.
ERASING DISK Off Off Indicates that the hard disk is being erased. Initializing
nnn% Erase process of the hard disk is valid to start from
"FILE SYS MAINTE2"-"HDD ERASE" of ADMIN
MENU.
nnn
Percentage of erased capacity
44158801TH Rev.3 171 /


Description Level
CHECKING SECTORS Off Off Displays that a sector of HDD is being checked. Initializing
nnn% Check process of the sector is valid to start from "FILE
SYS MAINTE2"-"CHK ALL SECTORS" of Admin
Menu.
nnn
Percentage of checked capacity
PROGRAM UPDATE MODE Off Off Displays that a printer is a special mode to conduct Initializing
the update of the program (Controller firmware)
This mode starts by turning on power with pressing
Online switch.
WAIT A MOMENT Off Blink Displays that a program data to update is being Initializing
DATA RECEIVE received.
WAIT A MOMENT Off Off Displays that a program data to update has been Initializing
DATA RECEIVED OK received.
CHECK DATA Off On Displays that an error takes place while a program Initializing
REC DATA ERROR <%DLCODE%> data to update is being received.
%DLCODE%
1: Size Error
2: Check SUM Error
3: Printer Model No. Error
4: Module I/F Version Error
5: FAT Version Error
WAIT A MOMENT Off Blink Displays that a program data to update is being Initializing
DATA WRITING written.
POWER OFF/ON Off Off Displays that a program data to update has been Initializing
DATA WRITTEN OK written.
CHECK DATA Off On Displays that an error takes place while a program Initializing
DATA WRITE ERROR <%DL- data to update is being written.
CODE%> %DLCODE%
1: Memory alloc Error
2: Download File Error
3: Device Free space acquirement Error
4: Device Free area Shortage Error
5: File Write Error
6: CU-F/W Mismatch Error
PU FLASH ERROR Off Off It is shown that PU firmware has booted in Loader Initializing
mode.
It displays, when PU firmware returns "00.00.00" as
a response of Leisus command"VERSIONR 01 H"
(version of PU firmware main part program) which CU
firmware transmits at the time of initialization.
If initialization is completed, it will change to the status
of Priority 251.
This status may occur also in a user environment.
When it occurs, the maintenance by a maintenance
member is required (equivalent to S/C).
COMMUNICATION ERROR Off Off Displays that communication to PU firmware failed. Initializing
This status may occur also in a user environment.
When it occurs, the maintenance by a maintenance
member is required (equivalent to S/C).
44158801TH Rev.3 172 /


Description Level
STATUS MODE Off Off Displays that normal Online mode starts. Initializing
Data (Job) from an external portion is processed even
though an error takes place after Online (ready) state
once this mode starts.
Displays Error or Warning on a panel.
If a power supply is turned on pressing a
<Enter>+<Back>+<Down> switch, it will enter into this
mode.
This function is secret to users. Therefore, this status
does not occur in a user environment.
ONLINE On Off Shows on-line status. Normal
OFFLINE Off Off Shows off-line status. Normal
* Ready LED in off-line is always assumed to be Off.
FILE ACCESSING Varies Varies The status showing FILE SYSTEM (HDD/FLASH) is Normal
being accessed.
DATA ARRIVE Varies Varies Data receiving, process not started yet. Normal
Displayed mainly during PJL process without text print
data or during job spooling.
PROCESSING Blink Varies Data receiving or output processing. Normal
DATA Varies Varies Un-printed data remains in Buffer. Waiting for data to Normal
follow.
PRINTING Varies Varies A printer is printing. Normal
PRINT DEMO PAGE Varies Varies Printing Demo Pages Normal
PRINT FONT Varies Varies Printing Font Lists Normal
PRINT MENU MAP Varies Varies Printing Menu Maps Normal
PRINT FILE LIST Varies Varies Printing File Lists Normal
PRINT ERROR LOG Varies Varies Printing Error Logs Normal
PRINT NETWORK CONFIG Varies Varies It is shown that a network setup is printing. Normal
If "Print Summary", "Print Information" of each slot
are chosen by menu "Print Information"-"Network",
printing of a network setup will be started.
Varies Varies Collate printing. iii: The number of copy in printing. jjj: Normal
COLLATE COPY iii/jjj the total number of printing. When the total number of
printing is 1, it is a normal printing display.
In status of Priority=121 ~ 125, Display Priority is 39.
Varies Varies Copy printing. kkk: The number of pages in printing. Normal
COPY kkk/lll lll: The total number of printing. When the number of
copy is 1, it is a normal printing display.
In status of Priority=121 ~ 125, Display Priority is 39.
VERIFYING JOB Blink Varies Indicates that the integrity of print data for encrypted Normal
authentication is being verified (for corruption and
tampering).
CANCELING JOB Blink Varies Indicates that job cancellation has been instructed Normal
and data is being ignored until the job completion.
CANCELING JOB Blink Varies Indicates if JAM occurs when Jam Recover is OFF, Normal
(JAM) that job cancellation has been instructed and data is
being ignored until the job completion.
44158801TH Rev.3 173 /


Description Level
CANCELING JOB Blink Varies Indicates a job being cancelled due to no print permit. Normal
(USER DENIED) (Related to JobAccount)
1. A job received from a user who is denied printing.
2. A color job received from a user who is denied color
printing.
CANCELING JOB Blink Varies Indicates that a job is being cancelled because the Normal
(BUFFER FULL) printer area where the logs are stored has been used
up and also "Cancel job" is specified as an operation
at the time of Log Full. (Related to JobAccount)
Varies Varies Warming up. Normal
ADJUSTING TEMP In this case, Leisus I/F : STSENG bit #0 should be '0'.
Varies Varies Indicates that printing has been suspended for a while Normal
OPTIMIZING TEMP due to high temperature of the drum, or the printer
is in a wait state to cope with heat at the time of
switching narrow paper to wide paper.
Varies Varies A printer is in power save mode. Displayed in a Normal
POWER SAVE combination of other message in the first line.
LCD back light extincts in the energy saving mode
and blinks after that mode. If the power is on during
the energy saving mode, it lights up and extincts
after 30 seconds. However, the energy saming mode
remains.
Also, it lights up in the priority 365 in shut down
process.
Varies Varies Executing Auto Color Adjusting Normal
ADJUSTING COLOR
Varies Varies Executing Auto Density Adjustment. Normal
ADJUSTING DENSITY Status code 10988 corresponds to density reading
(Leisus - STSDEN #1), thereto 10994 corresponds to
density adjusting (Leisus - STSDEN #0).
PU DOWNLOADING Varies Varies Downloading PU F/W (This is not user-level error) Normal
This function is secret to users. Therefore, this status
does not occur in a user environment.
44158801TH Rev.3 174 /


Description Level
Varies On Toner amount is low. Displayed in a combination of Warning

ORDER %COLOR% TONER (Blink) other message in the first line.
(Off) In case of MENU "LOW TONER=STOP", ATTENTION
LED blinks and the printer shifts to OFF Line.
When an ONLINE switch is pushed, or when arbitrary
errors occur and the error is canceled, an off-line
state is canceled, and printing is continued until it
is set to Toner Empty. Arbitrary errors are errors of
Priority 301-361.
"TONER LOW" status occurs when the power is
on, the LED of ATTENTION in a case of "LOWER
TONER=STOP is blinked and go back to the off line
after the initializing process.
It is possible to operate untill "TONER EMPTY" by
pressing "ONLINE switch".
Moreover, when set as "NearLifeLED = Disable",
Attention LED is switched off.
%COLOR%
Y
M
C
K
Varies On This warning is displayed at Cover Open/Close or Warning
%COLOR% WASTE TONER FULL. Power OFF/ON after a waste-toner full error (Priority:
REPLACE TONER 321.8) occurs. (Not occur for Black.) Displayed in a
combination of other message in the first line. As long
as this warning is being displayed, a waste toner full
error occurs , the printer shifts to Offline and stops
each time it has printed about 50 copies.
%COLOR%
Y
M
C
Varies On Indicates the toner cartridge is not for use in the Warning
NON OEM %COLOR% TONER printer.
DETECTED %COLOR%
Y
M
C
K
%COLOR% TONER REGIONAL printer.
MISMATCH %COLOR%
Y
M
C
K
NON GENUINE %COLOR% printer.
TONER %COLOR%
Y
M
C
K
44158801TH Rev.3 175 /


Description Level
Blink Varies Interpreter detects an error due to the following Warning

PS3 EMUL ERROR reason. Receive data after this is ignored until the job
completion. When the job is completely received, this
is automatically cleared.
- The job has a grammatical error.
- The page is complicated, and VM was used up.
Varies On The life of the drum (warning). Displayed in a Warning
ORDER %COLOR% IMAGE DRUM (Off) combination of other message in the first line. The
printer stops at the point when it reaches the drum life
(Shifts to error, OFF-LINE.)
Y
M
C
K
Varies On Notifies the fuser unit is near its life. Warning
ORDER FUSER (Off) Moreover, when set as "NearLifeLED = Disable",
Varies On Notifies the belt unit is near its life. This is a warning; Warning
ORDER BELT (Off) thus, printing will not stop.
Varies On Notifies the life of the fuser unit (warning). Displayed Warning
FUSER LIFE in a combination of other message in the first line.
Warning only (No Life error).
This appears when the cover was opened and closed
just after the fuser life error occurred.
Also this occurred instead of the fuser life error, if the
"FUSER LIFE PRINT CONTINUE" setting was 'ON'.
Varies On Notifies the life of the belt unit (warning). Displayed Warning
BELT LIFE in a combination of other message in the first line.
Warning only (No Life error).
This appears when the cover was opened and closed
just after the belt life error occurred.
Also this occurred instead of the belt life error, if the
"BELT LIFE PRINT CONTINUE" setting was 'ON'.
Varies On Notifies the toner is empty. This is a warning only. Warning
%COLOR% TONER EMPTY This appears when the cover was opened and closed
just after the toner empty error occurred.
Also this occurred instead of the toner empty error, if
the "TONER EMPTY PRINT CONTINUE" setting was
'ON'.
Y
M
C
K
Varies On Notifies the toner cartridge is not installed. This is a Warning
%COLOR% TONER NOT IN- warning only.
STALLED Y
M
C
K
44158801TH Rev.3 176 /


Description Level
Varies On Notifies the life of the drum. This is a warning only. Warning
%COLOR% DRUM LIFE This appears when the cover was opened and closed
just after the drum life error occurred.
Also this occurred instead of the drum life error, if the
"DRUM LIFE PRINT CONTINUE" setting was 'ON'.
Y
M
C
K
Varies On Belt Reflex Check Error. Warning
BELT REFLEX ERROR PU firmware does not notify this warning to CU
firmware at the time of Shipping Mode. Therefore, this
status does not occur in a user environment.
Varies Varies Density Adjustment Shutter Error 2.Error that does not Warning
DENSITY SHUTTER ERROR2 occur at user level. Displayed only in Factory Mode.
PU firmware does not notify this warning to CU
Varies Varies Density Adjustment Shutter Error 1.Error that does not Warning
DENSITY SHUTTER ERROR1 occur at user level. Displayed only in Factory Mode.
Varies Varies Density Adjustment Color Calibration Error.Error that Warning
DENSITY COLOR CALIBRATION does not occur at user level. Displayed only in Factory
ERROR Mode.
Varies Varies Density Adjustment Color Sensor Error.Error that Warning
DENSITY COLOR SENSOR ER- does not occur at user level. Displayed only in Factory
ROR Mode.
Varies Varies Density Adjustment Black Calibration Error.Error that Warning
DENSITY BLACK CALIBRATION does not occur at user level. Displayed only in Factory
ERROR Mode.
Varies Varies Density Adjustment Black Sensor Error.Error that Warning
DENSITY BLACK SENSOR ER- does not occur at user level. Displayed only in Factory
ROR Mode.
SENSOR CALIBRATION ERROR Varies On Sensor calibration error Warning
This error does not occur in the user’s environment
because the PU firmware does not notify the CU
firmware of this status detected in Shipping Mode.
44158801TH Rev.3 177 /


Description Level
Varies Varies Density Adjustment ID ERROR 2; smear due to ID Warning

%COLOR% IMAGE DRUM SMEAR failure.
ERROR PU firmware does not notify this warning to CU
Y
M
C
K
Varies Varies Density Adjustment ID ERROR; LED out of focus is Warning
%COLOR% LOW DENSITY ER- assumed.
ROR PU firmware does not notify this warning to CU
Y
M
C
K
Varies On When output of color registration sensor is below Warning
SENSOR CALIBRATION ERROR reference value.
Varies On When a color registration error is detected with coarse Warning
REGISTRATION ERROR n adjustment, or with the main-scan line adjustment.
n
2 = Yellow
3 = Magenta
4 = Cyan
5=
Varies On When a color registration error is detected with the Warning
REGISTRATION SENSOR ERROR fine control of registration adjustment, or with the sub-
n scan line adjustment.
n
2 = Yellow
3 = Magenta
4 = Cyan
5=
Varies On The LED head calibration data is missing or invalid. Warning
%COLOR% HEAD DATA ERROR Printing can be proceeded without calibrating light
radiation.
Y
M
C
K
44158801TH Rev.3 178 /


Description Level
Varies On %TRAY%: The tray is empty. Treated as Warning until Warning

%TRAY% EMPTY printing to the empty tray is designated.
In this case, Leisus I/F : corresponding bits of both
LFTERR and LFTERR2 should be '0'.
Tray1
Tray2
Varies On Disk-full is occurring. Because this is a temporary Warning
HARD DISK FULL warning, it remains until the end of the job and
disappears.
Varies On An attempt to write in a read-only file was done. Warning
DISK WRITE DISABLED Because this is a temporary warning, it remains until
the end of the job and disappears.
Varies Varies Memory overflow was occurred in the collate copy. Warning
COLLATE FAIL Stays displayed until the ONLINE key is pressed.
Varies On Indicates that the storage device (HDD) for executing Warning
JOB LOG NOT AVAILABLE PRINT STATISTICS SYSTEM does not exist.
(Appears when JobAccounting is in operation without
HDD.)
Varies On Indicates that the free space of the storage device is Warning
JOB LOG. DISK FULL too small to execute PRINT STATISTICS SYSTEM.
Varies On Notifies users that jobs have been cancelled because Warning
INVALID ID. JOB REJECTED they are not permitted for printing. (Related to
JobAccount). Stays displayed until the ON LINE key
is pressed.
Varies On Notifies users that jobs have been cancelled because Warning
LOG BUFFER FULL. JOB RE- the buffer is full. (Related to JobAccount.)Stays
JECTED displayed until the ON LINE key is pressed.
Varies On Indicates that a secret file is being erased. Warning
FILE ERASING
Varies On It indicares the deletion of encrypted authentication Warning
DELETING ENCRYPTED JOB print job and saving of deletion request of file.
Varies On Indicates that a secret file waiting to be erased is full. Warning
ERASED DATA FULL
Varies On Indicates that an applicable job has been Warning
EXPIRED SECURE JOB automatically deleted as the retention period for
authentication printing has expired.
44158801TH Rev.3 179 /


Description Level
Varies On A disk error is occurred, which is other than the file Warning
DISK USE FAILED nnn system fill or the disk write protected. Operation that
does not involve a disk is available. nnn: An identifier
to Error type (For details, see the overview chapter.)
%FS_ERR%
=0…GENERAL ERROR
=1…VOLUME NOT AVAILABLE
=3…FILE NOT FOUND
=4…NO FREE FILE DESCRIPTORS
=5…INVALID NUMBER OF BYTES
=6…FILE ALREADY EXISTS
=7…ILLEGAL NAME
=8…CANT DEL ROOT
=9…NOT FILE
=10…NOT DIRECTORY
=11…NOT SAME VOLUME
=12…READ ONLY
=13…ROOT DIR FULL
=14…DIR NOT EMPTY
=15…BAD DISK
=16…NO LABEL
=17…INVALID PARAMETER
=18…NO CONTIG SPACE
=19…CANT CHANGE ROOT
=20…FD OBSOLETE
=21…DELETED
=22…NO BLOCK DEVICE
=23…BAD SEEK
=24…NTERNAL ERROR
=25…WRITE ONLY
Varies Varies PU flush error (Error occurs during the alteration of Warning
PU FLASH ERROR PU farm or it failed in the alteration in PU flush of such
as LED Head information.)
*** is below;
PU
PU SUB-CPU
TRAY2
DUPLEX
PRESS ONLINE SW Varies Varies Indicates that a job has been deleted because Warning
INVALID SECURE DATA corruption of data has been detected by the integrity
verification in authentication printing.
PRESS ONLINE SW Varies Varies Invalid data was received. Press the On-line Warning
INVALID DATA switch and eliminate the warning. Displayed when
unsupported PDL command is received or a spool
command is received without HDD.
PRESS ONLINE SW Varies Varies Invalid data was received. Press the On-line Warning
INVALID DATA OR TIMEOUT switch and eliminate the warning. Displayed when
unsupported PDL command is received or a spool
command is received without HDD.
44158801TH Rev.3 180 /


Description Level
LOAD %MEDIA_SIZE% IN MP On Off Manual paper feed is required. Manually insert the Warning
TRAY paper shown by %MEDIA_SIZE%.
AND PRESS ONLINE SWITCH The unit of paper size in Custom: The unit specified
for MPTray (menu setting) is used if no unit is
specified by the driver. When the driver specifies a
unit, the unit is used for display.
Paper size displays in Custom mode:
"<width>x<length><unit>"
ex.) 210x297mm
8.5x11.0inch
The unit of paper size in Custom: The unit specified
for MPTray (menu setting) is used if no unit is
specified by the driver. When the driver specifies a
unit, the unit is used for display.
44158801TH Rev.3 181 /

6.3.3 Various types of print on the individual printer equipped with controller
Menu Map Printing

Information on the program versions, controller configuration, network settings, etc., is printed.
Operation:
1 Press the MENU+ key several times to cause “INFORMATION MENU” to be displayed.
2 Press the ENTER key to cause “PRINT MENUMAP/EXECUTE” to be displayed.
3 Press the ENTER key.
Or, press and hold down for two seconds or longer the push switch above the network connec-
tor on the back of the printer main unit.
Demonstration print
The demonstration patterns for different destinations that are built in the ROM are printed.
Operation:
1 Press the MENU+ key several times to cause “INFORMATION MENU” to be displayed.
3 Press the MENU+ key several times to cause “DEMO1/EXECUTE” to be displayed.
6.3.4 Functions of keys when depressed at power-on
The different keys provide the following functions when the power is turned on to the printer.
The following keys turn effective when pressed and held down, until "RAM CHECK" is dis-
played in the upper line of the LCD, and three to four asterisks "*" in the lower line.
(1) MENU+ key & MENU- key & ENTER key

These keys start the printer in the CU program update mode. When the printer is started in
this mode, the network does not work, since the DLM function turns ineffective.
(2) BACK key & ONLINE key & CANCEL key
These keys launch the CU program without activating the objects which were added in the
download mode, etc.
(3) MENU+ key & MENU- key
These keys launch the system maintenance menu.
(4) BACK key & MENU key & ENTER key
These keys start the printer in the mode in which it remains permanently ONLINE, in
disregard of warnings/errors (Factory-support function).
(5) ONLINE key
This key starts the printer in the dedicated mode in which objects, such as network, USB,
etc., are downloaded.
(6) ENTER key
This key launches the Admin menu.
44158801TH Rev.3 182 /

6.4 Setup after replacement of parts

This subsection describes the necessary adjustments to be made when parts have been re-
placed.
Replaced Part Adjustment

LED Head Not necessary
Image Drum Cartridge Not necessary
(Y, M, C, K)
Fuser Unit Not necessary
Belt Unit Not necessary
PU (PRF PCB) Necessary to copy EEPROM information. Utility required.
CU (TBR/TB2-6 PCB) Necessary to copy EEPROM information. Utility required.
6.4.1 Precautions on the replacement of engine control PCB
1. When EEPROM of the PCB to be removed is accessible

(When SERVICE CALL 105 [Engine EEPROM Error] is not displayed)
(1) Read the EEPROM information from the PCB to be removed by using the PU PCB
replacement function (Subsection 2.4.1.1.1 PU PCB replacement function in the
Maintenance Utility Operation Manual), and save it provisionally on the HDD of the PC.
(2) Copy the EEPROM information saved on the HDD to the EEPROM of the PCB to be
newly installed, by using the PU PCB replacement function (Subsection 2.4.1.1.1 PU PCB
replacement function in the Maintenance Utility Operation Manual).
Note! To download and write the EEPROM information by the maintenance utility, access
the EEPROM after placing the printer in the "Forced ONLINE mode" by the procedure
described below. Notice that, if the printer has an error currently issued, the error is
also displayed in the Forced ONLINE mode.
1. When turning on the printer, press and hold down the [BACK]+[MENU]+[ENTER]
keys, until "STATUS MODE" is displayed on the operator panel.
2. Thereafter, the "ONLINE" indication will appear if the printer is in normal condition.
If the printer has an error, it will be displayed. However, the printer is in ONLINE
status internally and, therefore, ready to hold communication.
2. When EEPROM of the PCB to be removed is inaccessible

If the PCB to be removed causes SERVICE CALL 105 (Engine EEPROM Error) to be
displayed on the operator panel, or the EEPROM data cannot be downloaded, first replace it
with a new PCB, and then, work by the following procedure using the maintenance utility:
(1) Setup of PU Serial Number
(Subsection 2.4.1.2 Setup of PU PCB of the Maintenance Utility Operation Manual)
The printer has a SAP Serial Number applied. The 12-digit SAP Serial Number is marked
in the top line of the serial number label, and is made up of two digits for production base,
two digits for manufacturing year and month, six digits for serial No. (Sequence No.), and
two digits for Revision.
• The PU Serial Number is a 10-digit number excluding the two digits for Revision from
the 12-digit SAP Serial Number.
• The number should be set on the "Subsection 2.4.1.1.2.1 PU Serial Number setup"
screen in "Subsection 2.4.1.1.2 PU PCB setup function" of the maintenance utility.
• Set in the “2.4.1.1.2 PU serial number setting” screen of “2.4.1.1.2.1 PU board setting”
of the maintenance utility.
44158801TH Rev.3 183 /

• To specify a PU Serial Number, enter a 11-digit number prefixed with "0" (single-byte
zero). (Notice that, when the PU Serial Number is read, it is a 10-digit number.)
On the "PU Serial Number setup" screen, enter the 11-digit number resulting from
prefixing a single-byte zero to the 10-digit number which is obtained by excluding the
two digits for Revision, shown in the image diagram below, from the serial number on
the "PU Serial Number setup" screen.
[Other than for OEL]

Enter the 11-digit number resulting from prefixing "0" (single-byte zero) to the 10-digit number.
(Enter "0AE1234567.")
Revision
AE0123456789
A B Made in C
Figure of Serial No. label image
[For OEL]
Ser.NO. 4AEL4011702K
Lot.NO. AE47027880 A0
Made in Thailand
Configured in UK
Revision
Enter the 11-digit number resulting from appending "0" (sing-byte zero) to the left of the 10 digits of Lot Number
(Enter "0AE47027880.")
Figure of Serial No. label image (labeled in UK Factory)
• The PU Serial Number is not output in the Printer Serial Number field of the Menu Map
header section. The CU Serial No. is output in this field. Therefore, after the PU Serial
Number has been rewritten, check it by reading the PU Serial Number again from the
maintenance utility.
• In the case of the OEL destination, the PU Serial Number is output, as a Lot Number,
in the Lot Number field in the bottom line of the Menu Map header section after the
configuration at the UK Plant. [See 1. (2) of Subsection 6.4.2.]
(2) Switching to Shipping mode

When the engine control PCB has been replaced with a new one, the printer still is in the
Factory Work mode. Switch it to the Shipping mode.
• Make the switching on the "Subsection 2.4.1.1.2.2 Factory/Shipping mode" screen in
"Subsection 2.4.1.1.2 PU PCB setup function" of the maintenance utility.
44158801TH Rev.3 184 /

Note! When the EEPROM (engine control PCB) has been replaced, the service life
information of the belt, toner, IDs, etc., is necessarily cleared. Therefore, be aware
that the service life management is likely to suffer errors until the next time units
are replaced. The counts that are cleared when the EEPROM is replaced are those
indicated below. Since the counts, except for Total Sheets Fed, are cleared when the
respective units are replaced, the errors will be resolved at that point in time.
Item Description Count Description

Fuser unit Fuser unit life count Number of printed pages since the installation of a
new fuser unit, converted into a number of A4-size
sheets.
Belt unit Belt unit life count Number of printed pages since the installation of a
new belt unit, converted into a number of A4-size
sheets.
ID unit - Black Respective life counts Number of revolutions since the installation of a
ID unit - Yellow of image drum units new ID unit, converted into a number of A4-size
ID unit - Magenta sheets.
ID unit - Cyan
Toner - Black Respective counts of Print dot number count
Toner - Yellow toner amounts used
Toner - Magenta
Toner - Cyan
Total number of Printer life count Total number of sheets fed
sheets fed
Pages - Black Respective numbers Numbers of pages impressed (images) from
Pages - Yellow of pages impressed installation of new image drum units.
Pages - Magenta (images) with image
Pages - Cyan
44158801TH Rev.3 185 /

6.4.2 Setup of EEPROM after replacement of TBR/TB2-6 PCB
When the TBR/TB2-6 PCB is replaced, it is necessary for the new replacement PCB to take
over the user-settings that the user has been using to that point, as well as the font install in-
formation. For this, copy the EEPROM by the Maintenance Utility, and set up the CU Serial No.
However, if SERVICE CALL 40 is issued and the old EEPROM cannot be used, use the new
PCB, and set the CU Serial No.(See Subsection 6.4.2.2) and check the setup of destination (See
Subsection 6.4.3).
Meanwhile, in the case of the TBR/TB2-6 PCB, the EEPROM can be swapped directly between
a new PCB and an old one. In this case, the CU Serial No. setup and destination setup are not
required.
6.4.2.1 Replacement of EEPROM after replacement of TBR/TB2-6 PCB
The EEPROM of the TBR/TB2-6 PCB is installed in the IC socket. Replace the EEPROM in the
following manner:
1. Remove the EEPROM and MAC address sticker label attached to the new PCB.
2. Insert a flat-tipped screwdriver in between the EEPROM of the old PCB and the IC socket,
and take out the EEPROM, seeing to it that the leads of the EEPROM are not bent.
3. Install the EEPROM in the new PCB. In this operation, make sure that the silk print of the
EEPROM and that of the PCB match in the same direction.
4. Remove the MAC address sticker label of the old PCB, and paste it to the new PCB.
EEPROM
MAC address label
6.4.2.2 Setup of CU Serial Number
The printer has a SAP Serial Number applied. The 12-digit SAP Serial Number is marked in
the top line of the serial number label, and is made up of two digits for production base, two
digits for manufacturing year and month, six digits for serial No. (Sequence No.), and two digits
for Revision.
(1) For destinations other than OEL

CU serial number setting is unnecessary.
(2) For OEL destination

• For CU Serial Number, a unique Serial Number within 12 digits is assigned at the UK
Plant.
• Notice that, when the CU Serial Number is set, the menu settings inside the CU are reset
(restored to the default settings). (See the Maintenance Utility Operation Manual.)
• On "Subsection 2.4.1.1.4.3 Serial Number information setup screen" of "Subsection
2.4.1.1.4 CU PCB setup function" of the maintenance utility, set"Select Printer Serial
Number" to "CU Serial Number" and [Display Mode], to "Show Both".
44158801TH Rev.3 186 /

• To specify the CU Serial Number, enter a number within 12 digits (Notice that, when the
CU Serial Number is read, it is also a number within 12 digits.)
Enter 12-digit Serial Number. Enter "4AEL4011702K."
Ser.NO. 4AEL4011702K
Lot.NO. AE47027880 A0
Made in Thailand
Configured in UK
Figure of Serial No. label image (labeled in UK Factory)
• The CU Serial Number is output in the Printer Serial Number field of the Menu Map header
section. Therefore, after the CU Serial Number has been rewritten, it can be checked by
conducting the Menu Map print.
• The PU Serial Number is output in the Lot Number field in the bottom line of the Menu
Map header section.
6.4.3 Setup of destination
[Checking method: Menu Map Print (MFP)]
Always set the destination prior to shipping out a printer or maintenance PCB, since the default
setting is OEL.
Note! This setting is stored on the EEPROM of the TBR/TB2-6 PCB.
1. Setup on the operation panel: Start the printer in the maintenance mode, and set the
destination.
• Turn on the power with the MENU+ and MENU- key held down.
• "Maintenance Menu" will be displayed briefly, which will change to "OKIUSER".
• Press the MENU+ key to select the destination setting "OKIUSER" and press the ENTER
key.
• "OEL" will appear in the lower line of the LCD.
• Press the ENTER key, select the destination by operating the MENU+ or MENU- key, and
press the ENTER key.
• Press the BACK key to define the setting. "JP1"
• Press the BACK key twice, or the ONLINE key once. This will cause the printer to restart
with the destination modified.
2. Explanation
MFP are ROMs used in common for domestic and overseas markets.
This setting is stored on the EEPROM of the TBR/TB2-6 PCB.
When the version number of the program ROM is changed, the setting will be reset to the
default value.
Make this setup when there is no destination set up or the version number of the program
has been changed.
44158801TH Rev.3 187 /

6.6 Updating Scanner Firmware

There are two ways to update scanner firmware: one is by using an OKI network setup tool
and the other is by running a scanner in loader mode.
The followings are the steps to update.
6.6.1 Updating with the OKI MFP Network Setup Tool
Directly connect a PC and the scanner with a network crossing cable.

* It is unnecessary to connect them with a network crossing cable if they are already
connected to the network in the LAN environment.
Enter the same subnet address of the IP address for the PC and the scanner.
<Example>
IP address of the scanner: 192.168.0.150
IP address of the PC: 192.168.0.1
Install an OKI network setup tool on a PC.
Run the OKI network setup tool.
Double-click the “New Device” icon.
Enter the IP address of the scanner and click the OK button.

(Example: when the IP address is 192.168.0.150)
44158801TH Rev.3 188 /

An icon of MC560 is added.
Choose the icon of MC560 and then select “Update Firmware” from the “Tools” menu.
After the [Firmware File Selection] window appears, proceed to the folder where firmware
files (*.spf) are stored, and select the relevant firmware file (*.spf).
Click “Open” to start updating.
Note! Do not turn off the power during update.
44158801TH Rev.3 189 /

When the display of the scanner changes to the standby screen, hold down the “Reset”
button for five seconds to reset the scanner to the factory default settings.
With this operation, update completes.
When all the above is done, print a menu map of the scanner or go to Menu, Information,
Firmware Version in the scanner operation panel, and make sure that the version of the
irmware has been updated.
44158801TH Rev.3 190 /

6.6.2 Updating by Running the Scanner in Loader Mode
This update method is used in the following circumstances.

- The scanner does not start normally after its power is turned off during firmware update.
- Update with an OKI network setup tool fails.
- After the scanner power is turned on, the display does not changes to the standby screen.
The flow of update is as follows: start the scanner in Loader mode first and then update only
he system firmware with an “upload” tool. After that, update every firmware with an OKI network
setup tool described in section 6.6.1 above.
The followings are the steps to update.
Directly connect a PC and the scanner with a network crossing cable.

* It is unnecessary to connect them with a network crossing cable if they are already
connected to the network in the LAN environment.
Turn off the scanner power, hold down the numeric key “1” and turn on the scanner
power.
The scanner is started in Loader mode.
The scanner LCD displays the version of the loader and the IP address of the scanner.
Enter the same subnet address of the IP address for the PC and the scanner.
<Example>
IP address of the scanner: 192.168.1.1
IP address of the PC: 192.168.1.2
Make sure that “upload.exe” and “upld.dll” files are in the same folder.
Run “upload.exe”.
Enter the IP address of the scanner and click the “OK” button.
(Example: when the IP address is 192.168.1.1)
44158801TH Rev.3 191 /

Click the “Browse...” button, proceed to the folder where the system firmware files (*.bin) are
stored, and choose the relevant system firmware file (*.bin).
Click the “upload ” button to start updating.
Note! Do not turn off the power during update.
The scanner reboots.

When the display of the scanner changes to the standby screen, continue operation to
update the firmware as described in section 7.5.1 Updating with the OKI MFP Network
Setup Tool.
44158801TH Rev.3 192 /

6.7 Adjustment of scanner after replacement of scanner main board

When scanner main board, FLATBED unit or ADF unit should be replaced, adjustment of
scanner needs to be done by using “Learning Tool”.
Scanner main board

Part No. Part Name Avision’s parts No. Destination Remarks
44186401 ASS’Y, MAIN BOARD-ODA 003-6465-0-SP ODA NBC1
44186402 ASS’Y, MAIN BOARD-SKU1 003-6466-0-SP OEL SKU1 NBC1
44186403 ASS’Y, MAIN BOARD-AOS 003-6468-0-SP AOS NBC1
44186405 ASS’Y, MAIN BOARD-AOS2 003-6486-0-SP AOS2 NBC1
44186407 ASS’Y, MAIN BOARD-TWN 003-6644-0-SP TWN NBC1
44186408 ASS’Y, MAIN BOARD-Plus-ODA 003-6649-0-SP ODA NBC2
44186409 ASS’Y, MAIN BOARD-NBC2-OEL-A_AOS 003-6648-0-SP OEL SKU1 NBC2
44186410 ASS’Y, MAIN BOARD-NBC2-OEL-B 003-6647-0-SP OEL SKU2/4 NBC2
FLATBED unit
Part No. Part Name Avision’s parts No.
43733301 ASS’Y, FLATBED UNIT_735Scanner 003-6096-0-SP
ADF unit
Part No. Part Name Avision’s parts No.
43732501 ADF-DOCUMENT(without Hinge)_735Scanner 003-6095-0-SP
(Install)
The following tools are needed to adjust scanner.
No.1 Parts No. Name Q’ty Avision’s Parts No.
1 44616601 CHART FOR ADF & FB_MC560Scanner 1 255-1261A-0-SP
2 44622601FY01 Learning Tool 1 -
No.1
44158801TH Rev.3 193 /

(Procedure)
Before starting, just execute the following.
• Just connect PC and machine with a USB cable.
• Just install scanner driver (TWAIN Driver) in PC, or use PC that scanner driver was
installed.
① Just get “Learning Tool”. Put holder “0.0.1.30” in “C:¥” in PC.
② Just double click “OKI 5550MFP Tool.exe”.

③ Just set the No.1 document on the Flatbed.
④ If the following dialog box appears, click “Start” button (Scanning will be done twice).
※ The model name is “C5550MFP”, it is no problem.
⑤ Just set the No.1 document on the ADF.

⑥ If the following dialog box appears, click “OK” button (Scanning will be done).
44158801TH Rev.3 194 /

⑦ Just set the No.1 document on the ADF again.

⑧ If the following dialog box appears, click “OK” button (Scanning will be done).
⑨ Just set the No.1 document on the Flatbed.

⑩ If the following dialog box appears, click “OK” button (Scanning will be done).
⑪ Just execute from ⑤ to ⑧ until the following dialog box appear.

If the following dialog appears, just click “OK” button (finish).
※ It is no need to reboot after completed.
(Attention)
If it is made a mistake in progress, for example execute scan without setting a document in
progress, just click “Cancel” to stop proceeding in progress and execute procedure from the
beginning.
44158801TH Rev.3 195 /

7. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE
7.1 Recommended replacement parts
Oki Data recommends that heavy users only replace the following parts. (If those parts are not
replaced, the print quality is not guaranteed, and malfunctions may even result.)
Parts Name
Friction Pad Assy 42088801
Roller Assy. Hopping 43334901
Note! 1. Consumable parts (Image drums, toner cartridge, fuser unit, belt unit) are not
included.
2. Power supply, PU PCB, CU PCB and other PCBs are not included.
Parts are replaced periodically by users.
7.2 Cleaning
Clean the interior and outside of the printer, as needed, using a waste cloth and small vacuum
cleaner.
Note! Be careful not to touch the image drum terminals, LED lens array and LED head
connectors.
7.3 Cleaning of LED lens array

If a vertical white band or white stripe (partial print, light print) is observed in the print face,
clean the LED lens array.
Note! To clean the LED lens array, be sure to use a soft cloth.
White band, white stripe

(Void or light printing)
44158801TH Rev.3 196 /

Cleaning the LED head
Execute this cleaning if an output shows a light fuzzy print or white stripes, or characters are
blurred.
(1) Turn OFF the power of the printer.
O I
(2) Open the top cover by pressing the OPEN button.
The fuser unit is extremely hot. Do not touch it.
OPEN button
(3) Wipe lightly the four lens surfaces of the LED head with a soft cloth.
Note! Do not use methyl alcohol, paint thinner or any other solvent, since they damage
the LED head.
LED head
(4) Close the top cover.
44158801TH Rev.3 197 /

7.4 Cleaning of pickup rollers

If vertical stripes are observed in the print face, clean the pickup rollers.
Note! For cleaning, use a soft piece of cloth to avoid scratching the roller surface.
Cleaning the feed rollers and pad
Execute this cleaning if [391 Paper Jam] is issued frequently.

(1) Draw out the paper cassette.
(2) Wipe the feed rollers (large) and feed rollers (small) using a piece of cloth impregnated
with water and squeezed hard, or the LED lens cleaner.
Note! An LED lens cleaner is enclosed in an optional replacement toner cartridge.
Feed roller (large)
Feed roller (small)
(3) Wipe the pad of the paper cassette using a piece of cloth impregnated with water and
squeezed hard.
Pad
Note! • Clean the Second Tray (optional) in the same manner, if [392 Paper Jam] recurs
frequently.
• Clean the feed rollers of the multi-purpose tray in the same manner, if [390: Check
MP Tray] is issued frequently.
44158801TH Rev.3 198 /

7.5 Internal cleaning of printer
Cleaning the interior of the printer.
Depending on the print pattern, toner may adhere to the metal shaft located between the fuser
unit and the cyan image drum cartridge. Execute this cleaning if the metal shaft has an adher-
ence of toner.
(1) Turn OFF the power of the printer.
O I
(2) Open the top cover by pressing the OPEN button.
The fuser unit is extremely hot. Do not touch it.
OPEN button
(3) Take out the image drum cartridges

1. Take out the four image drum cartridges and place them on a flat-top table.
2. After taking out the image drum cartridges, cover them with a black sheet of paper.
Note! • The image drums (green tubular parts) are extremely vulnerable. Use good
caution in handling them.
• Do not expose the image drum cartridges to direct sun or intense light (over
approximately 1500 luxes). Even under the inside lighting, do not leave them
exposed for five minutes or longer.
44158801TH Rev.3 199 /

(4) Take out the fuser unit.
The fuser unit is extremely hot. Be careful not to touch it. If the fuser unit is hot,
do not try yourself to clear paper but wait until the fuser unit becomes cool.
1. Raise the fuser unit lock levers (2, blue) in the direction of the arrow.
2. Take out the fuser unit holding it by the handle.
Handle
Fuser unit
locking lever
(blue)
Fuser unit
locking lever
(blue)
(5) Wipe the metal shaft using a soft cloth or tissue paper.
Shaft
(6) Install the fuser unit back in place.

For details, see "Replacing the fuser unit" in Setup Part of the User's Manual.
(7) Put the four image drum cartridges gently back in the printer.
(8) Close the top cover.
44158801TH Rev.3 200 /

7.6 Preventive Maintenance

This MFP is designed to be free of maintenance. However, it is suggested to perform preventa-
tive maintenance in the shorter term either every 6 months or every 60,000 sheets scanning to
ensure a consistently optimum performance.
7.6.1 Cleaning the document glass
There are times when the document cover and document glass is contaminated with ink, toner
particles or paper coatings. In this case, the MFP will have to be cleaned frequently to ensure
the best performance.
Follow the cleaning procedure as below:
(1) Open the document cover.
(2) Dip a clean cloth with non-corrosion solvent like alcohol (purity above 99.5%).
(3) Wipe the document cover and the document glass gently as shown the following figure.
Continue until the entire document cover and document glass are cleaned and observe
that no cleanser remains on the surface.
(4) Close the document cover. Your MFP is now ready for use.
Document Cover
Document Glass
44158801TH Rev.3 201 /

7.6.2 Cleaning the ADF
From time to time the pad assembly and feeding rollers may become contaminated with ink,
toner particles or paper dust. In this case, the machine may not feed documents smoothly. If
this occurs please follow the cleaning procedures to return your machine to its original state.
1. Moisten a cotton swab with isoprophyl alcohol (95%).
2. Gently open the ADF front cover. Wipe the feeding rollers by moving the swab from side to
side. Rotate the rollers forward with your finger and repeat the above cleaning procedures
until the rollers are clean. Be careful not to snag or damage the pick springs.
3. Wipe the pad in the direction from top to bottom. Be careful not to hook the pick springs.
4. Close the ADF unit. Your machine is now ready to use.
Feeding Roller Pick Spring
ADF Pad
7.6.3 Cleaning a Paper Jam
In the event of a paper jam, follow the procedures below to remove the paper:
1. Gently open the ADF front cover to the left.
2. Carefully pull the paper out of the ADF unit.
3. Close the ADF front cover. Your MFP is now ready to use.
44158801TH Rev.3 202 /

7.6.4 Replacing the ADF pad
After scanning approximately 100,000 pages through the ADF, the pad module may be
worn out and you may experience problems with document feeding. In this case, it is highly
recommended to replace the pad module with a new one. For ordering the pad module, please
consult your nearest dealer and follow the procedure below to replace it.
Disassembling Procedure
1. Pull the Paper Jam Release button.
2. Open the ADF front cover to the left.
3. Press both sides of the ADF snap-in pad module inwardly with your fingers to pull out the
ADF snap-in pad module.
Assembling Procedure
1. Open the Pad-cover and remove the spare ADF-Pad. Be careful not to touch the
rubbearea when removing the pad.
Spare Pad
2. Press both arms of the ADF pad module inwardly with your two fingers.
3. Place it into the holes until it snaps into place.
44158801TH Rev.3 203 /

8. TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
8.1 Precautions prior to repair

(1) Confirm the basic check items indicated in the User's Manual.
(2) Through hearing from the user, obtain information, as far in detail as possible, on the
situation concerning the fault.
(3) Inspect the printer in a condition close to the actual situation in which the fault occurred.
8.2 Items to be checked prior to taking action on abnormal images

(1) Check to see if the printer is operated in an adequate environment.
(2) Check to see if the consumables (toner, drum cartridges) are replaced properly.
(3) Check to see if the right paper is used. See the paper specifications.
(4) Check to see if the drum cartridges are installed properly.
8.3 Precautions when taking action on abnormal images

(1) Do not bring your hand or any object in contact with the surface of the OPC drum.
(2) Do not expose the OPC drum to direct sun.
(3) Do not touch the fuser unit, which can be very hot.
(4) Do not expose the image drums to light for over five minutes at the room temperature.
8.4 Preparations for troubleshooting

(1) Indications on the operator panel
A fault status of this printer is displayed in the LCD (liquid-crystal display) of the operator
panel.
Conduct fault repair properly in accordance with the message displayed in the LCD.
8.5 Troubleshooting method

If a trouble occurs in the printer, search for it by the following procedure:
Problem generated
Problem is Repair using the “LCD Repair in detail using

displayed in LCD. message list” troubleshooting flow
(see 8.5.1). (see 8.5.2).
Abnormal image Repair in detail using

(or problems that troubleshooting flow
are not displayed (see 8.5.3).
in the LCD)
44158801TH Rev.3 204 /

8.5.1 LCD Message List
When the printer detects an irrecoverable error, it displays a service call error in the LCD like
the one given below:
Service call
nnn: error
Note! "nnn" is an error code.
When a service call error is issued, an error code is displayed in the lower line of the LCD,
accompanied by the relevant error information. Be sure to make a note of this error information
(numeric values representing an address, etc.) and communicate it to the related departments,
since such information will be required for the subsequent trouble analysis/solution. The error
codes and their meanings, as well as the related remedial methods, are given in Table 8-1-1.
Table 8-1-1 Operator Alarm (1/9)
Ready Attention Code

Display on Operator Panel Description
LED LED nnn
LOAD %MEDIA_SIZE%/ Off Blink The media type in the tray and the print data do not Error
%MEDIA_TYPE% AND PRESS match. Load mmmmmmm/pppppp paper in tttttt 461
ONLINE SWITCH tray (It takes a while until the status disappears after 462
%ERRCODE%:%TRAY% MEDIA you have closed the tray and the lever lifted.) (tttttt:
MISMATCH TrayName,mmmmmm:PaperName.pppppp:Medi-
aTypeName)
Error 461 : Tray1
Error 462 : Ttay2
ex.) 210x297MM
8.5x11.0INCH
for MPTray (menu setting) is used if no unit is speci-
fied by the driver. When the driver specifies a unit,
the unit is used for display.
As a user pressed ONLINE key, the printer could
ignore this error at the just printing job.
LOAD %MEDIA_SIZE%/ Off Blink The media type in the tray and the print data do not Error
%MEDIA_TYPE% AND PRESS match. Load paper in tray (It takes a while until the 460
ONLINE SWITCH status disappears after you have closed the tray and
%ERRCODE%:%TRAY% MEDIA the lever lifted.)
MISMATCH (%TRAY%TrayName,%MEDIA_SIZE%:
PaperName.%MEDIA_TYPE%:MediaTypeName)
Error 460 : MPTray
ex.) 210x297MM
8.5x11.0INCH
for MPTray (menu setting) is used if no unit is speci-
fied by the driver. When the driver specifies a unit,
the unit is used for display.
A user needs to press ONLINE key after changing
the paper.
44158801TH Rev.3 205 /


LED LED nnn
LOAD %MEDIA_SIZE%/ Off Blink The size of paper or media type in the tray does not Error
%MEDIA_TYPE% AND PRESS match the print data. 461
ONLINE SWITCH Load paper in tray 462
%ERRCODE%:%TRAY% SIZE MIS- (It takes a while until the status disappears after you
MATCH have closed the tray and the lever lifted.)
Error 461 : Tray1
Error 462 : Ttay2
The paper size displaying form of the custom mode
is the same as above.
As a user pressed ONLINE key, the printer could
ignore this error at the just printing job.
LOAD %MEDIA_SIZE%/ Off Blink The size of paper or media type in the tray does not Error
%MEDIA_TYPE% AND PRESS match the print data. 460
ONLINE SWITCH Load paper in tray
%ERRCODE%:%TRAY% SIZE MIS- (It takes a while until the status disappears after you
MATCH have closed the tray and the lever lifted.)
Error 460 : MPTray
A user needs to press ONLINE key after changing
the paper.
DOWNLOAD MESSAGE Varies Varies Indicates that message data to be updated is being Error
PROCESSING processed.
DOWNLOAD MESSAGE Varies Varies Indicates that message data to be updated is being Error
WRITING written.
DOWNLOAD MESSAGE Varies Varies Indicates that message data to be updated has been Error
SUCCESS written successfully.
DOWNLOAD MESSAGE Varies Varies Indicates that writing of message data to be up- Error
FAILED %CODE% loaded has been failed.
%CODE% is a decimal value (one digit) and repre-
sents the cause of failure in writing.
= 1 ··· Unknown: Cause of failure unknown
= 2 ··· DATA_ERROR: Hash check error in data
reading/writing, or abnormal FLASH
= 3 ··· OVERFLOW: Downloading failure due to
FLASH memory full at starting or during writ-
ing in a language file
= 4 ··· MEMORYFULL: Memory reservation failure
= 5 ··· UNSUPPORTED_DATA: Downloading data
unsupported on the printer
NETWORK CONFIG Varies Varies This appears during the NIC configuration data is Error
WRITING storing into the flash memory, as the setting was
changed.
WAIT A MOMENT Varies Varies This appears when the NIC initialization is occurred, Error
NETWORK INITIAL as the setting was changed.
44158801TH Rev.3 206 /


LED LED nnn
LOAD %MEDIA_SIZE% Off Blink Printing request is issued to an empty tray. Error
%ERRCODE%:%TRAY% EMPTY Load paper. 491
(It takes a while until the status disappears after you 492
have closed the tray and the lever lifted.)
Error 491 : Tray1
Error 492 : Tray2
In this state, Leisus I/F : corresponding bits of both
LFTERR and LFTERR2 should be '0' (except MP-
Tray).
LOAD %MEDIA_SIZE% AND PRESS Off Blink Printing request is issued to an empty MPTray. Error
ONLINE SWITCH If it goes through a definite period of time (PU firm- 490
%ERRCODE%:MP TRAY EMPTY ware holds time(3 sec)) after a user places paper,
a printer will lift up the multipurpose tray, and will
perform re-feeding.
If a user pushes the ONLINE button before timeout,
the printer perform also re-feeding,.
Error 490 : MPTray
In this state, Leisus I/F : corresponding bits of both
LFTERR and LFTERR2 should be '0'.
Programmer's note: When the ONLINE button was
pressed, the controller (CU) should send MPT-
PECLR command to the engine (PU). The engine
would clear this state after receiving that command.
This error is occurred, when the MPTray is in the
home position and the sensor "PE SNS2" cannot
detect papers.
INSTALL PAPER CASSETTE Off Blink Indicates removal of the paper cassette of Tray 1 Error
%ERRCODE%:TRAY1 OPEN that is a paper path in attempting to print from Tray 2. 440
INSTALL PAPER CASSETTE Off Blink Indicates that paper feed is unavailable in attempting Error
%ERRCODE%:%TRAY% MISSING to print from Tray 1 due to removal of the paper cas- 430
sette of Tray 1. (Occurs only when Tray 2 has been
installed.)
ADD MORE MEMORY Off Blink Memory capacity overflows due to the following Error
%ERRCODE%:MEMORY OVER- reason. 420
FLOW Press ON-LINE switch so that it continues. Install
expansion RAM or decrease the data amount.
- Too much print data in a page.
- Too much Macro data.
- Too much DLL data.
- After frame buffer compression, over flow occurred.
PROTEC PAPER Off Blink This error occurs if a received job does not meet the Error
%ERRCODE%:ERROR security level designated by a printer administrator. 421
A printing operator is not using the printer driver that
is specified by a security manager of the printer.
Displays a warning on the operation panel as waiting
for key press. Does not print the job that is being
processed. (The same operation as job reset)
44158801TH Rev.3 207 /


LED LED nnn
PROTEC PAPER Off Blink Density of the destination image for a woven pattern Error
%ERRCODE%:ERROR is greater than that of the woven pattern. A user 422
must take measures such as increasing density of
the woven pattern or decreasing density of the input
image.
Displays a warning on the operation panel as wait-
ing for key press. Does not print the job that is being
TRUST PAPER Off Blink This error occurs when capacity of specified infor- Error
%ERRCODE%:ERROR mation to be embedded exceeds the capacity that 423
can be embedded in the woven pattern. A printing
operator must reduce data to be embedded in the
woven pattern.
TRUST PAPER Off Blink Density of the destination image for woven pattern is Error
%ERRCODE%:ERROR greater than that of the woven pattern. A user must 424
take measures such as increasing density of the wo-
ven pattern or decreasing density of the input image.
TRUST PAPER Off Blink The area specified for tampering verification is incor- Error
%ERRCODE%:ERROR rect. 425
This error occurs when an image is pushed away or
the unprintable area is specified.
PROTEC PAPER Off Blink Size of information to be embedded is greater than Error
%ERRCODE%:ERROR paper size. It is required to reduce information to 426
be embedded or increase print paper size to make
prints.
PROTEC PAPER Off Blink NTP server setting is not correct. Print JOB is Error
%ERRCODE%:ERROR canceled because it judged that the correct time is 427
impossible to enter. Users need to change the set-
ting of NT server.
REPLACE TONER Off Blink Indicates that a waste toner box represented by Error
%ERRCODE%:%COLOR% WASTE %COLOR% has become full and needs to be re- 414
TONER FULL placed. 415
Error 414 : Y 416
Error 415 : M
Error 416 : C
(Does not occur for K.)
Warning status takes effect at Cover Open/Close
and printing of about 50 copies becomes available.
44158801TH Rev.3 208 /


LED LED nnn
REPLACE TONER Off Blink Toner ends. Error
%ERRCODE%:%COLOR% TONER Error 410 : Y 410
EMPTY Error 411 : M 411
Error 412 : C 412
Error 413 : K 413
Warning status takes effect at Cover Open/Close.
REPLACE TONER Off Blink Indicates the toner cartridge is not for use in the Error
%ERRCODE%:%COLOR% TONER printer. 554
REGIONAL MISMATCH The printer recovers from the error after replacement 555
of the toner cartridge with a toner cartridge for the 556
printer. 557
Error 554 : Y
Error 555 : M
Error 556 : C
Error 557 : K
%ERRCODE%:INCOMPATIBLE printer. 614
%COLOR% TONER The printer recovers from the error after replacement 615
printer. 617
Error 614 : Y
Error 615 : M
Error 616 : C
Error 617 : K
%ERRCODE%:INCOMPATIBLE printer. 620
%COLOR% TONER The printer recovers from the error after replacement 621
printer. 623
Error 620 : Y
Error 621 : M
Error 622 : C
Error 623 : K
GENUINE TONER IS RECOMMEND- Off Blink Indicates the toner cartridge is not for use in the Error
ED printer. 550
%ERRCODE%:NON GENUINE The printer recovers from the error after replacement 551
%COLOR% TONER of the toner cartridge with a toner cartridge for the 552
printer. 553
Error 550 : Y
Error 551 : M
Error 552 : C
Error 553 : K
INSTALL TONER Off Blink The toner cartridge is not installed. Error
%ERRCODE%:%COLOR% TONER Error 610 : Y 610
MISSING Error 611 : M 611
Error 612 : C 612
Error 613 : K 613
44158801TH Rev.3 209 /


LED LED nnn
CHECK TONER CARTRIDGE Off Blink Something is wrong with the toner sensor. Error
%ERRCODE%:%COLOR% TONER This status is indicated in Shipping Mode only. 540
SENSOR ERROR If the same error is detected in FACTORY Mode, it is 541
indicated as service call of 163. 542
Error 540 : Y 543
Error 541 : M
Error 542 : C
Error 543 : K
OPEN FRONT COVER Off Blink Inappropriate size paper was fed from a tray. Check Error
%ERRCODE%:PAPER SIZE ERROR the paper in the tray or check for Multiple-feed. Open 400
and close the cover to perform recovery printing, and
continue.
In this state, Leisus I/F : OPJAM bit #7 should be '0'.
CHECK MP TRAY Off Blink Paper jam occurred during paper feeding from tray. Error
%ERRCODE%:PAPER JAM Error 390 : MP Tray 390
OPEN FRONT COVER Off Blink Paper jam occurred during paper feeding from tray. Error
%ERRCODE%:PAPER JAM Error 391 : Tray1 391
Error 392 : Tray2 392
OPEN FRONT COVER Off Blink Jam has occurred in paper path. Error
%ERRCODE%:PAPER JAM Error 380 : Feed 380
OPEN TOP COVER Off Blink Jam has occurred in paper path. Error
%ERRCODE%:PAPER JAM Error 381 : Transport 381
Error 382 : Exit 382
Error 383 : Duplex Entry 383
Error 385 : Around Fuser Unit 385
Error 389 : Printing Page Lost 389
OPEN DUPLEX COVER Off Blink Jam has occurred nearby DUPLEX unit. Error
%ERRCODE%:PAPER JAM Error 370 : Duplex Reversal 370
Error 371 : Duplex Input 371
Error 373 : Multifeed into Duplex (Duplex Remain 373
Jam)
OPEN FRONT COVER Off Blink Jam has occurred nearby DUPLEX unit. Error
%ERRCODE%:PAPER JAM Error 372 : Misfeed from Duplex 372
INSTALL DUPLEX UNIT Off Blink Duplex unit is open (removed). When this error is Error
%ERRCODE%:DUPLEX UNIT OPEN detected, printing stops. 360
REPLACE IMAGE DRUM Off Blink The life of the image drum (Alarm) Error
%ERRCODE%:%COLOR% DRUM Error 350 : Y 350
LIFE Error 351 : M 351
Error 352 : C 352
Error 353 : K 353
44158801TH Rev.3 210 /


LED LED nnn
REPLACE IMAGE DRUM Off Blink The toner empty error is occurred after the image Error
%ERRCODE%:%COLOR% DRUM drum reached its life. 560
LIFE Error 560 : Y 561
Error 561 : M 562
Error 562 : C 563
Error 563 : K
This is displayed until a user exchanges the image
drum.
REPLACE FUSER Off Blink Notifies the fuser has reached its life. This is the Error
%ERRCODE%:FUSER LIFE error displayed based on the counter to indicate that 354
the fuser has reached its life, and printing will stop.
This error will occur on some user setting mode.
REPLACE BELT Off Blink Notifies the transfer belt has reached its life. This is Error
%ERRCODE%:BELT LIFE the error displayed based on the counter to indicate 355
that the belt has reached its life, and printing will
stop.
REPLACE BELT Off Blink Indicates waste toner full. Warning status takes ef- Error
%ERRCODE%:BELT LIFE fect only once at Cover Open/Close, and the error 356
occurs again when about 500 copies have been
printed.
CHECK TONER CARTRIDGE Off Blink Shows that the toner cartridge lever has not been Error
%ERRCODE%:%COLOR% IMPROP- locked. 544
ER LOCK LEVER POSITION Error 544 : Y 545
Error 545 : M 546
Error 546 : C 547
Error 547 : K
CHECK IMAGE DRUM Off Blink The image drum is not correctly installed. Error
%ERRCODE%:%COLOR% DRUM Error 340 : Y 340
MISSING Error 341 : M 341
Error 342 : C 342
CHECK IMAGE DRUM & BELT LOCK Off Blink Indicates that the belt is unlocked or the black image Error
%ERRCODE%:K DRUM MISSING drum is not set properly. 343
CHECK FUSER Off Blink The fuser unit is not correctly installed. Error
%ERRCODE%:FUSER MISSING (This error is likely issued when the printer is cool at 320
0 deg.C or lower. Turn on the power again after the
printer has warmed up.)
CHECK BELT Off Blink The belt unit is not correctly installed. Error
%ERRCODE%:BELT MISSING 330
POWER OFF AND WAIT FOR A Off Blink Motor Driver IC overheat is detected. Error
WHILE 321
%ERRCODE%:MOTOR OVERHEAT
CLOSE COVER Off Blink The cover is open. Error

%ERRCODE%:COVER OPEN Error 310 : Top Cover 310
Error 311 : Front Cover 311
44158801TH Rev.3 211 /


LED LED nnn
CLOSE COVER Off Blink The cover is open. Error
%ERRCODE%:DUPLEX COVER Error 316 : Duplex Unit 316
OPEN
WAIT A MOMENT Off Blink The printer is receiving the download data. Error
DATA RECEIVE
WAIT A MOMENT Off Off The printer finished receiving the download data. Error
DATA RECEIVED OK
CHECK DATA Off On An error has happened while the printer is receive- Error
REC DATA ERROR <%DLCODE%> processing the download data.
%DLCODE%
1: File size error
2: Check-sum error
3: Invalid printer model number
4: Invalid module I/F version
5: Invalid FAT version
WAIT A MOMENT Off Blink The printer is writing the download data. Error
DATA WRITING
POWER OFF/ON Off Off The printer finished writing the download data. Error
DATA WRITTEN OK
CHECK DATA Off On An error has happened while the printer is writing the Error
DATA WRITE ERROR <%DLCODE%> download data.
%DLCODE%
1: Memory allocation error
2: Download file error
3: Device allocation error
4: No device space
5: File writing failure
6: CU-F/W mismatch
POWER OFF/ON Off Blink A network error is occurring. Error

%ERRCODE%:NETWORK ERROR 300
REBOOTING %CODE% Off On Rebooting of the controller unit. Error

%CODE% is a decimal value (one digit) and repre-
sents the reason to reboot.
= 0 ··· Reboot due to a reason other than the fol-
lowings.
= 1 ··· Reboot due to PJLCommand.
= 2 ··· Reboot in accordance with a menu change.
= 3 ··· Reboot due to quit operator of PostScript
Language.
= 4 ··· reboot by Network Utility (including Web).
SHUTTING DOWN Off Off It is shown that a printer is shutting down. Error
SHUTDOWN Off Off Indicates that the printer has completed shutting Error
down.
PLEASE POW OFF Off Off It is shown that the printer completed shutdown pro- Error
SHUTDOWN COMP cessing. (The backlight of LCD puts out the light)
44158801TH Rev.3 212 /


LED LED nnn
POWER OFF AND WAIT FOR A Off Blink A dew is formed. Fatal
WHILE *Fatal Error is not available in national language. 126
%ERRCODE%:CONDENSING ER-
ROR
POWER OFF/ON Off Blink A fatal error occurred. Fatal

%ERRCODE%:FATAL ERROR For more information, see attached 'Fatal Errors <nnn>
List'.
*Fatal Error is not available in national language.
SERVICE CALL Off Blink A fatal error occurred. Fatal

%ERRCODE%:FATAL ERROR For more information, see "Service Calls List." <nnn>
SERVICE CALL Off Blink A fatal error occurred. Fatal

%ERRCODE%:FATAL ERROR * '*' specifies the detailed error cause. 096
*Fatal Error is not available in national language. 231
128
168
169
POWER OFF/ON Off Blink A fatal error occurred. Fatal

%ERRCODE%:FATAL_ERROR For more information, see "Service Calls List." 002
nnnnnnnn nnnnnnnn nnnnnnnn 'nnnnnnnn' specifies the detailed error cause. ~
*Fatal Error is not available in national language. 011
F0C
F0D
FFE
FFF
POWER OFF/ON Off Blink Downloading Media Table to PU has failed. Fatal
%ERRCODE%:DOWNLOAD ERROR (Related to CustomMediaType.) 209
44158801TH Rev.3 213 /

Table 8-1-2 Service Call Error (1/7)
Message Cause Error Description Solution

Service call Machine Check Replace TBR/TB2-6 PCB.
001:Error Exception
Hardware fault
detected. (Board
defectiveness or
Shortage of power
supply volume)
Power off/on CPU Exception If RAM DIMM is installed,

002:Error remove it, and turn the
~ power off and on again.
005:Error Is the error issued again? Yes Replace the TBR/TB2-6
006:Error PCB.
007:Error Install the RAM DIMM
again.
Replace the RAM DIMM.
service CU ROM Hash Power OFF/ON

020:Error Check Error Does error display reappear? Yes Replace TBR/TB2-6 PCB.
Service call CU Font ROM A font ROM hash check error was Power OFF/ON
025:Error Hash Check Error detected.
(On printers for domestic market Yes Replace TBR/TB2-6 PCB.
only)
Service call CU RAM Check Power OFF/ON

030:Error Error Does error display reappear? Yes Replace TBR/TB2-6 PCB.
Service call CU Optional RAM Is RAM DIMM set properly? No Reset RAM DIMM.
031:Error Check Error Yes Replace RAM DIMM.
Is error recovered by replacing RAM No Replace TBR/TB2-6 PCB.
DIMM?
Service call RAM Spec Error Is a genuine RAM DIMM in use? No Use genuine RAM DIMM.
036:Error Unsupported Is the RAM DIMM installed No Reset RAM DIMM.
DIMM specification properly?
of the CU RAM Is the fault recovered when the Yes Replace RAM DIMM.
RAM DIMM is replaced? No Replace TBR/TB2-6 PCB
Service call CU EEPROM Error Power OFF/ON

040:Error Does error display reappear? Yes Replace TBR/TB2-6 PCB
Service call CU Flash Error Power OFF/ON

041:Error Flash ROM Error Does error display reappear? Yes Replace TBR/TB2-6 PCB
on the CU board.
44158801TH Rev.3 214 /


Service call Flash File System Access to the Flash ROM directly Flash File System Error
042:Error Error mounted on the CU PCB failed. Access to the Flash ROM
~ directly mounted on the
043:Error CU PCB failed. Conduct
045:Error forced initialization of the
Flash (Notice that NIC-F/
W will also be erased. It
needs to be written with
the Maintenance Utility
after the initialization.)
Execute FLASH FORMAT
of MAINTENANCE
MENU of the System
Maintenance Menu.
When "FLASH FORMAT"
is displayed, release the
key and wait till "ONLINE"
(approx. 2 min.).
If the symptom does not
change, replace the TBR/
TB2-6 PCB.
Service call CU Fan Error Is CU Fan connector set properly? No Connect properly.
051:Error Abnormal CPU Is error recovered by replacing fan? Yes Replace fan.
cooling fan on CU No Replace TBR/TB2-6 PCB.
board.
Service call DMA Abort Error Power OFF/ON.
052:Error detected in Image Does error reoccur? Yes Replace TBR/TB2-6 PCB.
processor.
Power off/on PSE firmware fault Power OFF/ON.
070:Error detected. Does error reoccur? Yes Replace TBR/TB2-6 PCB.
Power off/on Engine I/F Error Is CU assembly set properly? No Set properly.
072:Error xx I/F error between Yes Replace TBR/TB2-6 PCB.
PU-CU. Is error recovered by replacing No Replace PU PCB (PRF)
TBR/TB2-6 board?
Power off/on Video Error. Is the CU Assy installed properly? No Redo the installation
073:Error xxxxxxxx A trouble was properly.
detected during Yes Replace the TBR/TB2-6
image data PCB.
development.
[Common] Reinstall or replace the
(Illegal data
optional RAM DIMM.
received)
Replace the interface
cable.Redo the installation
of the PC printer driver.
Power off/on Video Error Fault Is CU assembly set properly? No Set properly.
074:Error xxxxxxxx detected when Yes Replace TBR/TB2-6 PCB
075:Error xxxxxxxx image data is
extended.
Service call Parameter- EEPROM or FLASH has become Replace the CU board if
081: ERROR consistency check incapable of reading or writing. the problem remains after
error cycling the power.
44158801TH Rev.3 215 /


Service call Engine EEPROM Does error reoccur? Power OFF/ON
104:Error setting check is OK Yes Replace PU PCB(PRF)
when power ON.
Then detect read/
write error.
Service call An error detected Does error reoccur? Power OFF/ON
105:Error by checking, at Yes Replace PU PCB (PRF)
printer's power-
om, EEPROM
installation.
Service call Abnormal engine Does error reoccur? Power OFF/ON
106:Error control logic. Yes Replace PU PCB (PRF)
Service call Detected illegal Is Duplex Unit of C5300/C5100 Yes Install Duplex Unit of
111:Error Duplex Unit. installed? MC560.
Service call Detected illegal Is 2nd Tray of C5300/C5100 Yes Install 2nd Tray of MC560.
112:Error 2nd Tray. installed?
Service call PU unit FAN motor 1) Is the FAN in the PU unit No Replace the FAN motor.
120: ERROR error working? Yes Replace the PU board
(PRF).
2) Does the same error occur after Yes Replace the PU board
replacement of the FAN motor? (PRF).
Service call High-voltage power Is cable between PU board and No Connect properly.
121:Error supply I/F error. high-voltage power unit connected Yes Check improper
properly? connections for high-
voltage.
Is there no improperly connections? No Replace high-voltage
power supply.
Service call Low-voltage power Is fan in low-voltage power supply No Check connections for
122:Error supply fan error. unit operating? connector of fan.
Low-voltage power Yes Replace low-voltage
supply temperature power supply.
error. Is fan connector connected No Replace fan motor.
properly? Yes Replace low-voltage
power supply.
Service call Abnormal Power OFF/ON
123:Error environment Does error reoccur? Yes Replace the operator
humidty /Not panel PCB (PRP)
connected humidity
sensor.
Service call Abnormal Power OFF/ON
124:Error environment Does error reoccur? Yes Replace the operator
temperature. panel PCB(PRF)
Service call Condensation in Condensation iss likely to occur in Turn on the printer again
126:Error the printer was printers carried from the outside. after it is left alone.
detected. Turn on the printer again after it is Yes Replace the operator
exposed to room temperature for panel PCB (PRP)
two hours to half a day. Does the
error reoccur?
Service call Error detected Is fan connector connected No Connect properly again.
127:Error at the fuser unit properly? Yes Replace fan motor
cooling fan. Does error reoccur? No Replace PU PCB (PRF)
44158801TH Rev.3 216 /


Service call LED head fault Is LED head properly set? No Install the LED head unit
131:Error detected. (131 = Y, properly.
~ 132 = M, 133 = C, Is the LED head fuse blown out? Yes Check the LED head fuse.
134:Error 134 = K) Yes Change the fuse.
Does error reoccur? No Turn on the power again.
Yes Replace the LED head
unit. (For fuse changing
method, see Subsection
8.6.)
Service call Error detected at Is ID unit set properly? Yes Reset ID unit.
140:Error ID position of Up/ No Turn power ON again.
~ Down(140= Y, 141 Does error reoccur? Yes Replace ID Up/Down
142:Error = M, 142 = C) sensor.
Service call ID unit fuse cannot Is ID unit setting proper? No Reset ID unit.
150:Error be disconnected. Yes Turn power ON again.
~ (150 = Y, 151 = M, Does error reoccur? Yes After check connections
153:Error 152 = C, 153 = K) of cable between PRT
board and PU PCB,
replace PRT PCB.
Is error recovered by replacing PRT No Replace PU PCB (PRF)
board?
Service call Belt unit fuse Is belt unit setting proper? No Reset belt unit.
154:Error cannot be Yes Turn power ON again.
disconnected. Does error reoccur? Yes Check cable connections
and, replace PU
PCB(PRF)
Service call Fuser unit Is fuser unit set properly? No After cleaning for fuser
155:Error fuse cannot be connector, reset.
disconnected. Does error reoccur? Yes Turn power ON again.
Yes Check cable connections
and replace PU PCB (PRF)
Service call Error detected by Is toner cartridge setting? No Set toner cartridge.
160:Error toner sensor. (160 Is toner lock lever setting? No Turn a lock lever of toner
~ = Y, 161 = M, 162 = to a fixed position.
163:Error C, 163 = K) Does error reoccur? Yes Replace toner sensor or
It does not occure assembly.
in factory default
setting.
Service call Thermistor Slope Is an error message indicated? Yes Turn on the power again.
167:Error Error Is the error issued again? Yes Leave the printer as is for
30 minutes, and turn on
the power again.
Service call Compensation Is an error message indicated? Yes Turn on the power again.
168:Error Thermistor Error Is the error issued again? Yes Leave the printer as is for
the power again.
note)
Service call Upper Side Is an error message indicated? Yes Turn on the power again.
169:Error Thermistor Error Is the error issued again? Yes Leave the printer as is for
the power again.
44158801TH Rev.3 217 /


Service call Short circuit in Turn power ON again.
170:Error fuser thermistor or Does error reoccur? Yes Replace fuser unit.
171:Error open detected. note)
Service call Abnormal Turn power ON again.
172:Error temperature Does error reoccur? Yes Replace fuser unit.
173:Error detected by fuser
thermistor (high-
temp or low temp.)
Service call Short circuit in back Turn power ON again.
174:Error up roller thermistor Does error reoccur? Yes Replace fuser unit.
detected (at high
temperature).
Service call Open of back up Turn power ON again.
175:Error roller thermistor Does error reoccur? Yes Replace fuser unit.
detected (at low
temperature). note)
Service call Abnormal (high) Turn power ON again.
176:Error temperature of Does error reoccur? Yes Replace fuser unit.
177:Error back up roller
thermistor
detected.
Service call Option unit I/F Turn power ON again.
181:Error error. (181 = Duplex Does error reoccur? Yes After checking connection
182:Error Unit, 182 = Option parts of connector,
Tray) replace option unit.
Power off/on System Memory Turn power ON again.
190:Error Overflow. Does error reoccur? Yes Add option RAM DIMM.
Service call PU Firmware Error occurered while writing over Turn the printer OFF/ON,
200:Error download Error. the PU firmware. and retry to download
~ the PU firmware again.
202:Error (Usually, the procedure
(PU firmware download)
which isn’t done, so this is
not occur.)
Power off/on Media Table Downloading Media Table to PU has Turn the printer OFF/ON,
209:Download Error download Error. failure.(Related to Custom Media and retry to download
Type) the PU firmware, again.
(Usually, the procedure
isn’t done, so this is not
occur.)
Power off/on An error was Reinstall the CU board. After turn power OFF,
203:Error detected of the CU Is the error message displayed check connections
204:Error program. again? between CU board and
207:Error (203~214 is not PU board. Then turn
208:Error occure in usual power ON again.
214:Error operating.)
F0C:Error
F0D:Error
FFE:Error
FFF:Error
44158801TH Rev.3 218 /


Service call False setting of Take off the HDD or replaced? Yes Reset original HDD.
220:Error a record medium
detected by a print
statistics.
Service call RFID Reader not RFID read device error Yes Check the connection of
230:Error Installed the RFID R/W board.
Is the error issued again? Yes Replace the RFID R/W
board.
Replace the S2V PCB.
Service call RFID Reader I/F An interface error was detected with 01: Same as Error 230
231:Error Error the RFID reader device. 02: Replace RFID R/W
01: communication error between board.
the RFID reader and the engine 03: Check the antenna
PCB. cable connection.
02: the transceiver circuit error of 04: Check to see if
the RFID reader. the quantity of toner
03: communication error between cartridge is correct.
the RFID reader and the toner
cartridge.
04: the toner cartridge detection
error (more than 4).
Service call Secure File Erasing An erasing error of an encrypted file Notify the user that Disk
250:Error Error was detected. ERASE needs to be
Did the user agree to execute HDD executed to erase the
ERASE? encrypted file, so that the
HDD is restored to the
original state as at the
time of purchase. ADMIN
MENU HDD ERASE
Service call Secure Disk An error was detected during Disk Turn the power off and on
251:Error Erasing Error ERASE. again.
Can the error indication be Yes Replace the HDD.
reproduced?
Power off/on Short or open in Is belt thermistor cable setting No Connect cable set
901:Error belt thermistor proper? properly again.
902:Error detected. Yes Turn power ON again.
Does error reoccur? Yes Replace belt thermistor.
Power off/on Abnormal Is belt thermistor cable setting No Connect cable set
903:Error temperature proper? properly again.
904:Error detected by belt Yes Turn power ON again.
thermistor (high- Does error reoccur? Yes Replace belt thermistor
temp or low temp.) and leave aside for 30
min. Then turn power ON
again.
Service call Duplex FANO FAN error inside the Duplex. Check to see if the Duplex
918:Error Alarm Detection Is the error issued again when the is properly installed.
power is turned on again? Yes Check to see if the FAN is
properly connected.
Yes Replace the FAN.
Power off/on Black Image The black image drum (K-ID) does Check to see if the K-ID is
923:Error Drum Lock Error not rotate properly. properly installed.
Is the error message issued again Yes Replace the K-ID.
when the power is turned on? Yes Replace the K-ID motor.
44158801TH Rev.3 219 /


Service call Fuser MotorLock The fuser unit does not rotate Check to see if the fuser
928:Error Error properly. unit is properly installed.
Does the error reoccur after power Yes Replace the fuser unit.
cycling? Yes Replace the fuser motor.
Service call Error by media Media has clung to the fuser. Power OFF
980:Error clinging to the fuser Replace the fuser unit.
SDRAM ERROR PU board SRAM Turn on the printer again.
error Does error reoccur? Yes Replace the PU board
(PRF).
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX A PU download After PU data (PU firmware, Turn on the printer
CRC CHECK NG data CRC check custom media data and LED head again and redownload
error. adjustment data) downloading, a the data (during usual
CRC check error was detected. printer operation, the
downloading is not
performed and the error
does not occur).
LOADER VERSION PU board Flash Turn on the printer again.
XX XX ROM hash check Does error reoccur? Yes Replace the PU board
error (PRF).
WDT ERROR PU firmware went Turn on the printer again.
haywire. Does error reoccur? Yes Replace the PU board
(PRF).
COMMUNICATION An error in a PU- Is the CU assy installed properly? No Reinstall the assy
ERROR CU interface. properly.
Yes Replace the TBR/TB2-6
Does the printer recover from the board.
error by replacing the TBR/TB2-6 No Replace the PU board
board. (PRF).
Note) SERVICE CALL Error 168, Error 171 and Error 175 are likely issued when the printer
is cool at 0 deg.C or lower.Therefore, if the printer is cool, turn on the power again after
it has warmed up.
44158801TH Rev.3 220 /

8.5.2 Preparing for troubleshooting
(1) LCD Display Malfunction.................................................................................................228

(1-1) Nothing is displayed in LCD.................................................................................228
(1-2) The first line is black display in LCD....................................................................229
(1-3) PLEASE WAIT (The display changes to “COMMUNICATION ERROR”
if you leave them as they are)..............................................................................230
(1-4) An error message related to the operation panel is displayed.............................230
(1-5) “RAM CHECK” or “INITIALIZING” are displayed..................................................230
(2) Irregular Operation of the device after turning on the power...........................................231

(2-1) No operation........................................................................................................231
(2-2) Abnormal sound...................................................................................................232
(2-3) Abnormal odor.....................................................................................................233
(2-4) Slow starting time................................................................................................233
(3) Paper Feed Jam(Error 391:1st Tray)...............................................................................241

(3-1) Paper feed jam occurs right after turning on the power (1st Tray).......................241
(3-2) Paper feed jam occurs right after paper feeding starts (1st Tray)........................241
(4) Paper Feed Jam (Error 390:Multi-purpose Tray).............................................................243

(4-1) Paper feed jam occurs right after turning on the power (Multi-purpose Tray)......243
(4-2) Paper feed jam occurs right after paper feeding starts (Multi-purpose Tray).......244
(5) Paper Path Jam(Error 381).............................................................................................245

(5-1) Paper path jam occurs right after turning on the power.......................................245
(5-2) Paper path jam occurs right after feeding paper..................................................246
(5-3) Paper path jam occurs in a path route.................................................................248
(5-4) Paper path jam occurs right after reaching the fuser unit....................................249
(6) Paper Exit Jam(Error 382)...............................................................................................250

(6-1) Paper exit jam occurs right after turning on the power.........................................250
(6-2) Paper exit jam occurs right after feeding paper...................................................251
(6-3) Paper exit jam occurs in a path route...................................................................251
(7) Duplex Print Jam(Error 370,371,372,373,383)...............................................................252

(7-1) Duplex print jam occurs right after turning on the power.....................................252
(7-2) Duplex print jam occurs in the Duplex entry........................................................252
(7-3) Duplex print jam occurs in reverse of the paper...................................................253
(7-4) Duplex print jam occurs in the Duplex input.........................................................253
(7-5) Paper is not fed to a Resist roller from Duplex section........................................253
(8) Paper Size Error (Error 400)...........................................................................................254

(8-1) Paper jam occurs when the end of paper is near IN1 sensor..............................254
(9) ID Unit Up-Down Error(Service Call 140-143)................................................................255

(9-1) An error occurs in the operation of ID Unit Up.....................................................255
(9-2) An error occurs in the operation of ID Unit Down................................................255
(10) Fuser Unit Error(Error 170-177)......................................................................................256

(10-1) An error occurs right after turning on the power..................................................256
(10-2) An error occurs in 1 min. from turning on the power............................................256
44158801TH Rev.3 221 /

(11) Motor Fan Error(Error 120,127,051)................................................................................257

(11-1) Low voltage power unit fan or CU fan does not rotate right after turning
on the power........................................................................................................257
(11-2) ID cooling fan does not rotate in printing.............................................................257
(11-3) DUPLEX fan does not rotate in DUPLEX printing................................................257
(12) Print Speed is Slow (Low Performance)..........................................................................258

(12-1) Print speed decreases up to 2ppm......................................................................258
(12-2) Print speed decreases ........................................................................................258
(13) Option unit is not recognized...........................................................................................259

(13-1) Duplex unit is not recognized...............................................................................259
(13-2) 2nd Tray unit is not recognized.............................................................................259
(14) LED head is not recognized(Error 131,132,133,134)......................................................260

(14-1) Service Call 131-134(LED HEAD Missing)..........................................................260
(15) Toner cartridge is not recognized(Error 540,541,542,543).............................................261

(15-1) Errors caused by consumables............................................................................261
(15-2) Errors caused by toner sensor.............................................................................261
(15-3) Errors caused by machine defects.......................................................................262
(16) Fuse Cutout Error (Error 150-155)..................................................................................262

(16-1) Fuse cutout errors................................................................................................262
(17) Dew Condensation Errors (Error 123).............................................................................263

(17-1) Dew Condensation...............................................................................................263
Note! When the PU PCB(PRF PCB) is replaced, first read the data of the EEPROM chip
of the old PCB, and then, copy it to the new PCB after the replacement. (See 6.4.1
Precautions on the replacement of engine control PCB).
44158801TH Rev.3 222 /

8.5.2.(1) LCD Display Malfunction
(1-1) Nothing is displayed in LCD
Confirmation Items Confirmation Tasks Action at NG

(1-1-1) Confirm fuse
F5 (fuse) of PU PCB (PRF Check to see if F5 is blown out. Replace F5 or PRF

PCB) PCB.
(1-1-2) Confirm connection systems
Connection between low-

Check to see if the cord from the low-voltage power
Redo the insertion
voltage power supply unit supply is connected properly to the POWER connector of the cord properly.
and PU PCB (PRF PCB) of the PU PCB (PRF PCB). Check for any incomplete
connection or skew insertion.
Cord ASSY interconnecting Check to see if the cord has any wire breakage. Replace the cord
the low-voltage power Check to see if the cord has any peel-off of the covering. with a normal one.
supply unit and the PU Check for any fault in the cord ASSY, such as dislocated
PCB (PRF PCB) wire, etc.
Connection between PU Check to see if the 7pin FFC is properly plugged into the Redo the insertion
PCB (PRF PCB) and OPE connector of the PU PCB (PRF PCB). Check to see of the cord properly.
operator panel PCB (PRP if the 7pin FFC is properly plugged into the CN connector
PCB) of the operator panel PCB (PRP PCB). Check for any
incomplete connection or skew insertion.
FFC interconnecting the Check for wire breakage with a circuit-tester. Also, check Replace the FFC
PU PCB (PRF PCB) and visually for peel-off of the covering. with a normal one.
the operator panel PCB
(PRP PCB).
FFC interconnecting the Check to see if the 12pin FFC is properly plugged into Replace the low-
PU PCB (PRF PCB) and the CUIF connector of the PU PCB (PRF PCB). Check voltage power
the CU PCB. similarly the CU PCB side also. supply.
(1-1-3) Confirm the power systems
AC power supplied to the Check the supply voltage of the AC power. Supply AC power.
printer
Voltage setting of low- Measure the supplied AC voltage. Check the power Set the low-voltage
voltage power supply supply settings of the printer in use. (Check the short- power setting to the
unit (100V system/230V circuit plug designed for switching of low-voltage power proper values.
system) setting. Short-circuit plug provided/not provided = 100V
system/230V system.)
power supplied to the
5V Check the 5V power at pin 7 of the POWER connector of Replace the low-
PU PCB (PRF PCB) the PU PCB (PRF PCB). voltage power
supply.
5V power supplied to the Check the 5V power at pin 4 of the CN connector of the Replace the F5 or
operator panel PCB (PRP operator panel PCB (PRP PCB). PRF PCB.
PCB)
(1-1-4) Confirm the power short
V power and 24V power

5
Check for short-circuiting through the POWER connector Replace the short-
supplied to the PU PCB of the PU PCB. circuited part.
(PRF PCB) 4, 5, 6 pin: 24V
7 pin: 5V
8 pin: 0VL
1, 2, 3 pin: 0VP
If there is any short-circuiting, locate it by isolation.
Unplug the cords connected to the PU PCB (PRF PCB),
one by one, and locate the short-circuited part.
44158801TH Rev.3 223 /

(1-2) The first line is black display in LCD

(1-2-1) Check of connections
Connection between low-

Check to see if the cord from the lower-voltage power
Redo the insertion
voltage power supply unit supply is connected properly to the POWER connector of the cord properly.
and PU PCB (PRF PCB) of the PU PCB (PRF PCB).
Check for any incomplete connection or skew insertion.
Cord ASSY interconnecting Check to see if the cord has any wire breakage. Replace the cord
the low-voltage power Check to see if the cord has any peel-off of the covering. with a normal one.
supply unit and the PU Check for any fault in the cord ASSY, such as dislocated
PCB (PRF PCB) wire, etc.
Check to see if the wires are properly connected on a
1-pin to 1-pin basis.
Connection between PU Check to see if the 7-pin FFC is properly plugged into the Redo the insertion
PCB (PRF PCB) and OPE connector of the PU PCB (PRF PCB). of the cord properly.
operator panel PCB (PRP Check to see if the 7-pin FFC is properly plugged into the
PCB) CN connector of the operator panel PCB (PRP PCB).
Check for any incomplete connection or skew insertion.
FFC interconnecting the Check for wire breakage with a circuit-tester. Also, check Replace the FFC
PU PCB (PRF PCB) and visually for peel-off of the covering. with a normal one.
the operator panel PCB
(PRP PCB).
(1-2-4) Check of LSI operation
I/F signal from PU PCB (PRF Check

to see if there is signal output through the OPE
Replace the operator
PCB) to operator panel connector of the PU PCB (PRF PCB). panel PCB (PRP
PCB (PRP PCB) Pin 1: CLK PCB).
Pin 4: Transmitting data (Transmission of PU PCB)
Pin 6: CLR
The signal is permanently output if the PCB is normal.
I/F signal from operator Check to see if there is signal output through the OPE Replace the operator
panel PCB (PRP PCB) to connector of the PU PCB (PRF PCB). panel PCB (PRP
PU PCB (PRF PCB) Pin 3: Receiving data (Reception of PU PCB) PCB).
The signal is permanently output if the PCB is normal.
44158801TH Rev.3 224 /

(1-3) PLEASE WAIT

(The display changes to “COMMUNICATION ERROR” if you leave them as they are)

(1-3-1) Check of installed state of PCB
Connected state between Check the engagement between the CUIF connector
Connect the FFC
PU PCB and CU PCB of the PU PCB and the FFC connector of the CU PCB. properly.
(Engagement between PU and CU PCBs)
Check to see if the option Does the PCB operate after the RAM DIMM or HDD is Correct the inserted
RAM DIMM/HDD is used removed? state of the DIMM.
in the CU PCB. Check for a skew insertion or incomplete insertion. Replace the optional
Is the RAM DIMM/HDD a genuine part? item, if necessary.
(1-3-3) Execution of upgrading of PU firmware version
Upgrading of PU firmware This indication will be produced following upgrading of the error recurs
If
version the PU firmware version. even after the
Verify the PU version by conducting Menu Print or using power is turned on
the maintenance function. again, conduct the
checking of (1-3-1)
and (1-3-2).
(1-4) An error message related to the operation panel is displayed.

(1-4-1) Error messages
Error messages Check the details in the Error Message Table. Follow the
instructions.
(1-5) “RAM CHECK” or “INITIALIZING” are displayed

(1-5-1) Indications on the operator panel freeze.
Operator panel indications

The indication of "RAM CHECK" or "INITIALIZING"
Replace the ROM
remains on permanently. DIMM of the CU
PCB or the CU PCB.
Check to see if the option Does the PCB operate after the RAM DIMM or HDD is Replace the optional
RAM DIMM/HDD is used removed? item, if necessary.
in the CU PCB. Check for a skew insertion or incomplete insertion.
Is the RAM DIMM/HDD a genuine part?
Correct the inserted state of the DIMM.
44158801TH Rev.3 225 /

8.5.2.(2) Irregular Operation of the device after turning on the power
(2-1) No operation

(2-1-1) Check of parts related to power supply
AC power supplied to the Check the supply voltage of the AC power. Supply AC power.
printer
Voltage setting of low- Measure the supplied AC voltage. Set the low-voltage
voltage power supply unit Check the power supply settings of the printer in use. power setting to the
(100-V system/230-V (Check the short-circuit plug designed for switching of proper values.
system) low-voltage power supply setting [CN5]. Short-circuit
plug provided/not provided = 100-V system/230-V
system.)
3.3V, 5V and 24V power Check the power through the POWER connector of the Replace the low-
supplied to the PU PCB PU PCB (PRF PCB). voltage power
(PRF PCB) 4, 5, 6 pin: 24V supply.
7 pin: 5V
8 pin: 0VL
1, 2, 3 pin: 0VP

Connected state of
Check the items of (1-1). Follow the
operator panel The operator panel needs to be detected and start description of (1-1).
operating, so that the printer functions.
44158801TH Rev.3 226 /

(2-2) Abnormal sound

(2-2-1) Check for motor step-out (Abnormal driver)
Operating state of motors

Use the self-diagnostic mode to check to see if the
Replace the PU
motors are operating normally. PCB (PRF PCB)
Check in the presence and absence of a load.
If abnormal, the motors will emit a "boo".
State of motor cords Check the laying of motor cords. Check visually, and Redo the laying of
also check for short-circuiting with a circuit-tester. the cord properly.
Disconnect the motor cord on the PCB side, and check
the resistance between each pin of the disconnected
cord side and the FG.
Replace the motor cord.
(2-2-2) Check for motor step-out (Loading problem of consumables)
Operating state of motors

Use the self-diagnostic mode to check to see if the Replace the
motors are operating normally. corresponding
Check in the presence and absence of a load. consumable.
If abnormal, the motors will emit a "boo". To use a new
consumable on a
trial basis, use FUSE
KEEP MODE of the
System Maintenance
Menu.
(2-2-3) Check for gear tooth skip (Loading problem of consumables)
Operating state of motors Use the self-diagnostic mode to check to see if the
Replace the
motors are operating normally. corresponding
Check in the presence and absence of a load. consumable.
If abnormal, the motors will emit "pup, pup". To use a new
consumable on a
KEEP MODE of the
System Maintenance
Menu.
Installed state of Visually check to see if the consumables are installed in eplace or modify
R
consumables the prescribed positions where their gears are engaged. the necessary
mechanical part.
(2-2-4) Check of laying of cords
Laying of peripheral cords Check to see if the peripheral cords of the FAN are laid
Correct the laying of
around each cooling FAN so poorly that the FAN blades are touching the cords. cords.
If the cords are laid improperly, "cluck, cluck" will be
heard.
(2-2-5) Check of installed state of mechanical parts
Check the installed state of Remove the PCBs and check visually the installed state If the sill plates
the sill plates under the CU of the sill plates. are not hooked
and PU PCBs. in the prescribed
positions, correct
their installation.
44158801TH Rev.3 227 /

(2-3) Abnormal odor

(2-3-1) Location of source of foul smell
Fuser unit Take out the fuser unit, and check for the smell. Conduct (2-3-2).
Low voltage power supply Take out the lower-voltage power supply unit, and check Replace the low-
unit for the smell. voltage power
supply unit.
(2-3-2) Check of state of Fuser unit
Life count of fuser unit Check the life count of the fuser unit in the self-diagnostic If the unit is like-new,
mode. it necessarily emits
some foul smell.

Check for foreign matter in Check for any foreign matter trapped in the fuser unit, Remove the foreign
fuser unit such as a paper chip. matter.
(2-4) Slow starting time

(2-4-1) Check of fuser unit
Halogen lamp
Check the wattage of the halogen lamp installed in the
Replace the lamp
fuser unit. with one having the
specified voltage
and wattage.
(2-4-2) Check of optional parts
Expansion memory, HDD Redo the installation of the optional parts (expansion Replace the optional
memory and HDD), and check their operation. items
44158801TH Rev.3 228 /

(3) Error number and jam location at paper jam
Error No. Name Reference Corresponding Sensor Jam Release Method
370 Duplex reversal J1 DUP-IN, DUP-R Jam release method
371 Duplex input J2 DUP-F, DUP-R Jam release method
372 Feed error at Duplex J3 IN1 Jam release method
373 Multi-feed in Duplex Unit J4 DUP-B Jam release method
380 Feed J5 IN2, WR Jam release method
381 Transport J6 IN1, IN2, WR, EXIT Jam release method
382 Exit J7 EXIT Jam release method
383 Duplex entry J8 EXIT, DUP-IN, DUP-R Jam release method
385 Around Fuser Unit J13 Fuser thermistor Jam release method
390 Feed error at front feeder J9 IN2, WR Jam release method
391 Tray1 J10 IN1 Jam release method ,
392 Tray2 J11 2nd-IN Jam release method
400 Paper size error J12 IN1 Jam release method
Diagram of jam location
J7(382:EXIT)
J13(385: Around Fuser Unit)
EXIT SENSOR J6(381:TRANSPORT) J9(390:MISS FEED AT FRONTFEEDER)
J5(380:FEED) IN2 SENSOR

J12(400:PAPER SIZE ERROR)
WR SENSOR
J8(383:DUPLEX ENTRY)
DUP-IN SENSOR
DUP-R SENSOR DUP-F SENSOR

IN1 SENSOR
J10(391:TRAY1)
DUP-B SENSOR
J4(373:MULTIFEED IN DUPLEX UNIT) J3(372:MISS FEED AT DUPLEX)
J1(370:DUPLEX REVERSAL) J2(371:DUPLEX INPUT) J11(392:TRAY2)
2nd-IN SENSOR
44158801TH Rev.3 229 /

JAM RELEASE METHOD
Removing the jammed paper
Front cover section (Codes: 372, 380, 390, 391, 400)

Open the front cover, and if the leading end or trailing end of the jammed paper is visible, pull
out the paper slowly. If code 400 is issued, the paper may be unloaded automatically. If that is
the case, opening and closing of the cover will clear the error.
If you see the rear edge of paper
Paper
Front cover
If you see the top edge of paper
Paper
Front cover
If you do not see the top edge of paper
Front cover
Paper Exit Part (Code: 382)

Pull out the jammed paper from the exit slowly.
Note! Even when paper is jammed in the delivery section, pull out the paper to the inside
of the printer, if it is visible under the top cover. Forcing the paper out toward the rear
could damage the fuser unit.
44158801TH Rev.3 230 /

JAM RELEASE METHOD
FUSER unit section (Codes: 381, 382, 383,385)
Possible to get burned.
The fuser unit can be very hot. Be careful not to touch it.
If the unit remains hot, do not hasten to work, but wait, until after
the unit has cooled down a little, and then remove the paper.
(1) Raise the lock levers (2, blue) of the fuser unit in the direction of the arrows.
(2) Take out the fuser unit holding it by the handle, and place it on a flat table.
Handle
Fuser unit
locking lever
(blue)
Fuser unit
locking lever
(blue)
(3) While pushing the lever (Blue) of the fuser unit in the direction of the arrow, pull out the
jammed paper always in the direction of the arrow (forward).
Fuser unit
locking lever (blue)
44158801TH Rev.3 231 /

(4) Hold the fuser unit again by the handle and put it gently back in the printer.
(5) Push the lock levers (2, blue) of the fuser unit toward the rear, and fasten the unit
Fuser unit
locking lever (blue)
Handle
Note! After a jammed paper has been removed from the fuser unit section, unfixed toner
may still remain inside the fuser unit. Therefore, execute the Menu Map print (Subsection
3.6), or print blank paper several times.
If the paper jam error is not cleared even after the jammed paper has been removed, remove
the other jammed paper by the procedure described below.
(1) Discharge static electricity by touching the screw by hand.
Screw
44158801TH Rev.3 232 /

(2) Take out the image drum cartridges (4), and place them on a flat table.
(3) Cover the image drum cartridges thus taken out with a black sheet of paper.
Note! • The image drums (green tubular parts) are extremely vulnerable. Use good
caution in handling them.
• Do not expose the image drum cartridges to direct sun or intense light (over
approximately 1500 luxes). Even under the room lighting, do not leave them
exposed for five minutes or longer.
Top cover
Black paper
Image drum cartridge
(4) Pull out the jammed paper slowly.
When the leading end of the paper is visible

Pull out the paper slowly to the inside of the printer.
44158801TH Rev.3 233 /

When neither the leading end nor the trailing end is visible
First slide the jammed paper into the direction of the arrow, and then, pull it out slowly.
Fuser unit
Paper
When the trailing end of the paper is visible

While pushing the lever of the fuser unit into the direction of the arrow, pull out the
jammed paper slowly.
Fuser unit
Fuser unit lever
(5) Put the image drum cartridges back in place.
44158801TH Rev.3 234 /

JAM RELEASE METHOD
Two-sided print unit section (Optional)(Codes: 370, 371, 373)
(1) Open the two-sided print unit cover by pushing the jam releasing lever of the two-sided
print unit section.
Duplex unit cover
Jam release lever

(2) Take out the jammed paper.
If the paper is not visible, close the two-sided print unit cover briefly, and the paper will be
unloaded automatically.
Note! If the two-sided print unit needs to be drawn out, turn off the power of the printer.
Duplex unit cover

JAM RELEASE METHOD
Second tray unit section (Optional)(Codes: 391, 392)
(1) Draw out the paper cassette of the second tray unit section, and remove the jammed
paper.
(2) After removing the paper, open and close the front cover by holding the handle under the
operator panel.
Front cover
Paper cassette
44158801TH Rev.3 235 /
8.5.2.(3) Paper Feed Jam(Error 391:1st Tray)
(3-1) Paper feed jam occurs right after turning on the power (1st Tray)

(3-1-1) Check of state of running route
Paper running route in front Open the front cover, and check to see if there is paper Remove the jammed
unit jammed on the running route. paper
(3-1-2) Check of state of mechanical parts
Check the sensor levers of

Check to see if the sensor levers demonstrate any
Replace the sensor
inlet sensors 1 and 2. abnormal shape or motion. lever with a normal
one.
(3-1-3) Check of electrical parts
Check the state of sensor se the SWITCH SCAN function of the Maintenance
U Replace the PU
signal detection. Menu to check to see if the sensor signal is detected PCB (PRF PCB),
normally. front sensor PCB
(RSF PCB) or the
connection cord.
Check the output levels of Check the following signals through the FSNS connector Replace the front
inlet sensors 1 and 2 of the PU PCB (PRF PCB). sensor PCB (RSF
Pin 4: Inlet sensor 1 PCB).
Pin 3: Inlet sensor 2
Confirm that the above signal levels vary as the sensor
levers are actuated.
Check the power supply of Check the 5-V power through the CN connector of the Replace the
the front sensor PCB (RSF front sensor PCB (RSF PCB). connection cord.
PCB). Pin 5: 5V power
Pin 1: 0VL
(3-2) Paper feed jam occurs right after paper feeding starts (1st Tray)

Paper running route in front Check to see if there is paper jammed on the running Remove the jammed
unit route. paper.
Check the sensor levers of Check to see if the sensor levers demonstrate any Replace the sensor
inlet sensors 1 and 2. abnormal shape or motion. lever with a normal
one.
(3-2-3) Check of operating state of motors
Feed motor Conduct the Motor and Clutch Test of the self-diagnostic Replace the PU
mode, and check to see if the feed motor operates PCB (PRF PCB) or
normally. feed motor.
Feed motor driver Unplug the HOP connector of the PU PCB (PRF PCB), Replace the PU
and confirm the following on the connector side: PCB (PRF PCB).
Several Mohms between pin 1 and FG
44158801TH Rev.3 236 /


Feed motor drive cord Check the connected state of the cord. Redo the connection
Check for incomplete connection or skew insertion, and properly.
check the cord visually to see if it has any assembling Replace the cord
problem. with a normal one.
Feed motor drive cord heck to make sure that the cord is not caught under any
C Replace the cord,
assembled part of the printer. Unplug the HOP connector and correct the
of the PU PCB (PRF PCB), and confirm the following on assembling to make
the cord side: it normal.
Short-circuiting between pin 1 and FG
Feed motor Confirm 3.5 of resistance is seen between 5pin- Replace the feed
6pin,and 7pin-8pin each at the cord side after pulling out motor.
HOPKID connector of the PU board (PRF PCB).
(3-2-5) Check of operating state of solenoid
Feed solenoid Conduct the Motor and Clutch Test of the self-diagnostic Replace the PU
mode, and check to see if the feed solenoid operates PCB (PRF PCB) or
normally. feed solenoid.
Make this checking with the right side plate detached, so
that the solenoid is visible.
Feed solenoid Check to see if there is anything that interferes with the
Correct the
moving part of the solenoid (cord, etc.). assembling of the
printer to make it
normal.
Feed solenoid cord heck the connected state of the cord.

C orrect the
C
Check for any incomplete connection or skew insertion, connection properly.
and check the cord visually if it has any assembling Replace the cord
problem. with a normal one.
Feed solenoid cord Check to make sure that the cord is not caught under
Replace the solenoid
any assembled part of the printer. Assy, and redo
Unplug the HSOL connector of the PU PCB (PRF PCB), the reassembling
and confirm the following on the cord side: properly.
Unplug the HSOL connector, and check to see if there is
a resistance of approximately 89 between pin 1 and pin 2.
44158801TH Rev.3 237 /

8.5.2.(4) Paper Feed Jam (Error 390:Multi-purpose Tray)
(4-1) Paper feed jam occurs right after turning on the power (Multi-purpose Tray)

Paper running route in front Check

to see if there is paper jammed on the running
Remove the jammed
unit route. paper.
Check the sensor levers Check to see if the sensor levers demonstrate any
Replace the sensor
of inlet sensor 2 and WR abnormal shape or motion. lever with a normal
sensor. one.
Check the state of sensor

Use the SWITCH SCAN function of the self-diagnostic Replace the PU
signal detection. mode to check to see if the sensor signal is detected PCB (PRF PCB),
normally. front sensor PCB
(RSF PCB) or the
connection cord.
Check the output levels Check the following signals through the FSNS connector Replace the front
of inlet sensor 2 and WR of the PU PCB (PRF PCB). sensor PCB (RSF
sensor. Pin 2: WR sensor PCB).
Pin 3: Inlet sensor 2
Confirm that the above signal levels vary as the sensor
levers are actuated.
Check the power supply of Check the 5-V power through the CN connector of the Replace the
the front sensor PCB (RSF front sensor PCB (RSF PCB). connection cord.
PCB). Pin 5: 5-V power
Pin 1: 0VL
44158801TH Rev.3 238 /

(4-2) Paper feed jam occurs right after paper feeding starts (Multi-purpose Tray)

Paper running route in

Check to see if there is paper jammed on the running
Remove the jammed
multi-purpose tray route. paper.
Sheet receive (reed) of Check to see if the sheet receive is always located in the Modify the tray,
multi-purpose tray upper position. so that the sheet
receive will be raised
to the prescribed
position.
(4-2-2) Confirm condition of mechanical parts
Check sensor levers at the Check to see if the sensor levers demonstrate any Replace the sensor
entrance sensor 2 and abnormal shape or motion. lever with a normal
WR sensor lever one.
Planetary gears for paper Conduct the Motor and Clutch Test of the self-diagnostic Replace the
feed control mode, and actuate the feed motor (FRONT MOTOR) to planetary gear box.
make sure that both of the planetary gears rotate in their
lower positions. (The planetary gear box is the right-hand
white molded section, which is accessible by opening
the front cover.)
Front cover Check to see if the right and left locks of the front cover Replace the front
are properly locked. unit.
(4-2-3) Check of the operating state of motors
Feed motor Conduct the Motor and Clutch Test of the self-diagnostic Exchange a PU
mode, and check to see if the feed motor operates board (PRF PCB) or
normally. paper feed motor.
Feed motor driver Unplug the HOP connector of the PU PCB (PRF PCB), Exchange a PU
and confirm the following on the connector side: board (PRF PCB)
Feed motor drive cord Check a connection status of the cord.

Correct the
HOPKID connector of the PU board (PRF PCB). connection properly.
Check half connection, incomplete plug-in or installation Replace the cord
status of the cord by eyes. with a normal one.
Cord to drive a paper feed Check to make sure that the cord is not caught under any Return the
motor assembled part of the printer. Unplug the HOP connector installation to a right
of the PU PCB (PRF PCB), and confirm the following on status by exchanging
the cord side: a cord.
Feed motor Confirm 3.5 of resistance is seen between 5pin-6pin, Replace the feed
and 7pin-8pin each at the cord side after pulling out motor
HOPKID connector of the PU board (PRF PCB).
44158801TH Rev.3 239 /

8.5.2.(5) Paper Path Jam(Error 381)
(5-1) Paper path jam occurs right after turning on the power

Paper running route in front Check to see if there is paper jammed on the running
Remove the jammed
unit route. paper.
Check sensor levers of WR Confirm that there is no abnormality in the shape of the Replace the sensor
sensor sensor lever and in the operation. lever with a normal
one.
Use the SWITCH SCAN function of the self-diagnostic
Replace the PU PCB
signal detection. mode to check to see if the sensor signal is detected (PRF PCB), front
normally. sensor PCB (RSF
PCB) or connection
cord.
Check the output level of Check the following signal through the FSNS connector Replace the front
the WR sensor. of the PU PCB (PRF PCB). sensor PCB (RSF
Pin 2: WR sensor PCB).
Confirm that the above signal level varies as the sensor
lever is actuated.
Check the power supply of Check 5V power with CN connector of a front sensor Replace the
the front sensor PCB (RSF board (RSF PCB). connection cord.
PCB). 5pin:5V Power
1pin:0VL
44158801TH Rev.3 240 /

(5-2) Paper path jam occurs right after feeding paper

Paper running route on the

Remove the ID unit, and check to see if there is paper
Remove the jammed
belt jammed on the running route. paper.
Check the sensor lever of Check to see if the sensor lever demonstrates any Replace the sensor
the WR sensor abnormal shape or motion. lever with a normal
one.
Feed motor, belt motor, ID Conduct the Motor and Clutch Test of the self-diagnostic Replace the PU
motor mode, and check to see if the feed motor, belt motor and PCB (PRF PCB), if
ID motor operate normally. the feed motor, belt
Make this checking in the presence and absence of a motor, ID-up motor
load. or ID motor is faulty.
Replace the feed
motor, belt motor or
ID motor. Replace
the ID unit or belt
unit. To use a new
consumable on a
KEEP MODE of the
System Maintenance
Menu.
Feed motor driver, ID up- nplug the HOP connector of the PU PCB (PRF PCB),
U Replace the PU
motor driver, and belt motor and confirm the following on the connector side: PCB (PRF PCB), if
driver Several Mohms between pin 1 and FG the feed motor, belt
Several Mohms between pin 2 and FG motor, ID up-motor
Several Mohms between pin 3 and FG or ID motor is faulty.
Unplug the BELTIDUP connector of the PU PCB (PRF
PCB), and confirm the following on the connector side:
44158801TH Rev.3 241 /


Feed motor drive cord, Check the connected states of the cords.
Correct the
ID motor drive cord, belt Check for any incomplete connection or skew insertion connection properly.
motor, ID-up motor drive of the HOP connector, DCID connector, DCHEAT Replace the cord
cord, fuser drive cord connector, BELTIDUP connector and RELAY connector with a normal one.
of the PU PCB (PRF PCB). Check for any incomplete
connection or skew insertion, and examine the cords
visually to see if they have any assembling problem.
Feed motor drive cord, Check to make sure that none of the cords is caught Replace the cord,
ID motor drive cord, belt under any assembled part of the printer. and correct the
motor, ID-up motor drive Unplug the HOP connector of the PU PCB (PRF PCB), assembling to make
cord and confirm the following on the cord side: it normal.
Unplug the BELTIDUP connector of the PU PCB (PRF
PCB), and confirm the following on the cord side:
Feed motor, belt motor, ID Unplug the connectors of the respective PCBs, and Replace the feed
up-motor confirm that there are the following resistances between motor, ID motor, or
the pins of the cord side: belt motor.
HOP connector of PU PCB (PRF PCB)
Between pin 1 and pin 2: Approx. 3.5
BELTIDUP connector of PU PCB (PRF PCB)
Between pin 1 and pin 2: Approx. 6
Between pin 3 and pin 4: Approx. 6
44158801TH Rev.3 242 /

(5-3) Paper path jam occurs in a path route

Feed motor, belt motor, ID

Conduct the Motor and Clutch Test of the self-diagnostic Replace the PU
motor, ID up/down-motor mode, and check to see if the feed motor, belt motor and PCB (PRF PCB),
ID motor operate normally. or replace the feed
Make this checking in the presence and absence of a motor, belt motor,
load. ID motor, or ID up-
motor, or replace the
ID unit or belt unit.
To use a new ID unit
or belt unit on a trial
basis, use FUSE
KEEP MODE of the
System Maintenance
Menu.
Feed motor driver, belt
Unplug the HOP connector of the PU PCB (PRF PCB), Replace the PU
motor driver, ID up-motor and confirm the following on the connector side: PCB (PRF PCB), if
driver Several M between pin 1 and FG the feed motor, belt
Several M between pin 2 and FG motor or D motor is
Several M between pin 3 and FG faulty, or replace the
Several M between pin 4 and FG motor driver PCB
Unplug the BELTIDUP connector of the PU PCB (PRF if the belt motor is
PCB), and confirm the following on the connector side: faulty.
Several M between pin 1 and FG
44158801TH Rev.3 243 /

(5-4) Paper path jam occurs right after reaching the fuser unit

Fuser motor Conduct the Motor and Clutch Test of the self-diagnostic
Replace the PU
mode, and check to see if the fuser motor operates PCB (PRF PCB).
normally. Replace the fuser
Make this checking in the presence and absence of a motor. Replace the
load. fuser unit. To use
a new fuser unit on
a trial basis, use
FUSE KEEP MODE
of the System
Maintenance Menu.
(5-4-2) Temperature control of rotating roller
Heat roller detection

Check the detection temperature of the heat rollers in the Replace the fuser
temperature self-diagnostic mode. Check to see if an abnormally low unit, or replace the
or high temperature is detected. junction PCB (PRY
PCB) or PU PCB
(PRF PCB). To use
a new fuser unit on
a trial basis, use
FUSE KEEP MODE
of the System
Maintenance Menu.
(5-4-3) Check of installed state of fuser unit
Fuser unit Check to see if the fuser unit is properly installed (whether Install the unit
it is pushed in to the lowest position). properly in the
printer.
44158801TH Rev.3 244 /

8.5.2.(6) Paper Exit Jam(Error 382)
(6-1) Paper exit jam occurs right after turning on the power

Paper running route in

Check to see if there is paper jammed on the running
Remove the jammed
delivery section route. paper.
Check the sensor lever of Check to see if the sensor lever demonstrates any
Replace the sensor
the delivery sensor abnormal shape or motion. lever with a normal
one.

Use the SWITCH SCAN function of the self-diagnostic Replace the PU
signal detection. mode to check to see if the sensor signal is detected PCB (PRF PCB),
normally. EXIT sensor or
connection cord.
Check the output level of Check the following signal through the RELAY connector Replace the EXIT
the EXIT sensor. of the PU PCB (PRF PCB). sensor.
Pin 9: EXIT sensor
Confirm that the signal level varies as the sensor lever is
actuated.
Check the power of the Check the 5-V power through the EXIT connector of the Replace the
junction PCB (PRY PCB). junction PCB (PRY PCB). connection cord.
Pin 1: 5-V power
Pin 3: 0 VL
Signal cord for motor driver Check to see if the FFC is properly plugged in the Correct the
PCB, EXIT sensor cord RELAY connector of the PU PCB (PRF PCB) and the connection properly.
PUIF connector of the junction PCB.
Check to see if the cord is properly connected in the
junction PCB (PRY PCB) and EXIT sensor.
Signal cord for motor driver Check to see if the cords are caught under any other Replace the
PCB, EXIT sensor cord part, or have any peel-off of the covering or any connection cord,
assembling problem. or correct the
assembling properly.
44158801TH Rev.3 245 /

(6-2) Paper exit jam occurs right after feeding paper

Face-up stacker cover Check to see if the cover is completely open or closed.
Eliminate imperfect
opening or closing
of the cover.
Duplex pull-in gate Conduct the Motor and Clutch Test of the self-diagnostic Replace the duplex
mode, and check to see if the Duplex pull-in gate pull-in gate or
operates normally. replace the duplex
Make sure that it is duly on the exit side. solenoid.
Rear panel Check to see if the rear panel is installed properly, and if Redo the installation
it is not obstructing the paper running route. of the rear panel.
Running route in delivery Check visually for any load that obstructs running of Modify the load
section paper along the route of the delivery section.Check to portion.
see if the delivery rollers are stiff in rotating.
Sensor lever of exit sensor Check to see if the sensor lever demonstrates any eplace the sensor
R
abnormal shape or motion. lever with a normal
one.
(6-2-3) Check of operating state of motor
Fuser motor Conduct the Motor and Clutch Test of the self-diagnostic eplace the PU
R
mode, and check to see if the fuser motor operates PCB (PRF PCB),
normally. fuser motor, or fuser
Make this checking in the presence and absence of a unit. To use a new
load. fuser unit on a trial
basis, use FUSE
KEEP MODE of the
System Maintenance
Menu.
Fuser motor drive cord Check the connected state of the cord.
Correct the
Check visually for any incomplete connection or skew connection properly.
insertion of the DCHEAT connector of the PU PCB (PRF Replace the cord
PCB) or any assembling problem of the cord. with a normal one.
Fuser motor eplace the fuser

R
motor.
(6-3) Paper exit jam occurs in a path route

Fuser motor Conduct the Motor and Clutch Test of the self-diagnostic Replace the PU
mode, and check to see if the fuser motor operates PCB (PRF PCB),
normally. fuser motor, or fuser
Make this checking in the presence and absence of a unit. To use a new
load. fuser unit on a trial
basis, use FUSE
KEEP MODE of the
System Maintenance
Menu.
44158801TH Rev.3 246 /

8.5.2.(7) Duplex Print Jam(Error 370,371,372,373,383)
(7-1) Duplex print jam occurs right after turning on the power

Paper running route in Check to see if there is paper jammed on the running route. Remove the jammed
duplex unit Open the front cover and see if there is paper jammed in paper.
the middle of feeding through the Duplex. Open the rear
cover and see if there is paper jammed in the reversal
path.
Draw out the Duplex and see if there is paper jammed at
the insertion inlet to the Duplex. Open the running path
cover of the Duplex and see if there is paper jammed
inside.
Check the sensor levers of Check to see if the sensor levers demonstrate any Replace the sensor
the sensors of Duplex. abnormal shape or motion. lever with a normal
one.
Check the state of sensor Use the SWITCH SCAN function of the self-diagnostic Replace the
signal detection. mode to check to see if the sensor signals are detected Duplex PCB (V7Y
normally. PCB), sensors or
Check the state of signal detection in two cases: With a connection cord.
sheet of paper placed inside the duplex unit and with the
paper removed.
(7-2) Duplex print jam occurs in the Duplex entry

(7-2-1) Check of operating state of solenoid
Duplex solenoid
Conduct the Motor and Clutch Test of the self-diagnostic Replace the V7Y
mode, and check the operating state of the Duplex solenoid. PCB or solenoid.
Separator DUP (Delivery/ Conduct the Motor and Clutch Test of the self-diagnostic Replace the
DUP-intake switching gate mode, and check visually the motion of the gate (EXIT separator DUP.
located immediately after SOLENOID). See if its motion is stiff, or its amount of
fuser unit) opening/closing is abnormal.
On/off timing of duplex Conduct test print with the cover open, and see if the
Replace the WR
solenoid separator DUP opens at the right timing. sensor lever or
solenoid.
(7-2-2) Check of operating state of sensor lever
Dup-IN sensor lever Open the rear cover, touch the Dup-IN sensor lever by Replace the Dup-IN
hand, and see if its motion is stiff. sensor lever.
Dup-IN sensor Use the SWITCH SCAN function of the self-diagnostic Replace the
mode to check to see if the sensor signals are detected duplex PCB (V7Y
normally. PCB), sensors or
connection cord.
Reversal transport path Check to see if there are paper chips, burrs or any Remove the foreign
other foreign matters in the reversal transport path that matters.
obstruct the running of paper.
44158801TH Rev.3 247 /


Duplex motor Conduct the Motor and Clutch Test of the self-diagnostic Replace the V7Y
mode, and check the operation of the duplex motor. PCB or the motor.
Make this checking by the rotation of the rollers, which
are visible as the rear cover is opened.
Duplex intake/reversal Check to see if the intake/reversal roller on the duplex Replace the rear
roller and its pinch roller unit side comes into contact with the pinch roller on the cover.
cover side when the rear cover of the Duplex is closed
(Is the pinch roller also rotating when the duplex roller is
turning?)
(7-3) Duplex print jam occurs in reverse of the paper

(7-3-1) Check of operating state of sensor lever
Dup-IN sensor lever

Open the rear cover and touch the Dup-IN sensor lever
Replace the Dup-IN
by hand. Check to see if its motion is stiff. sensor lever.
Dup-In sensor Use the SWITCH SCAN function of the self-diagnostic Replace the duplex
mode to check to see if the sensor signals are detected PCB (V7Y PCB),
normally. sensor or connection
cord.
Duplex motor Check visually to see if the paper has started reversal Replace the
motion from the slit of the rear cover. planetary gear.
If the reversal motion has not been started, check to see
if the planetary gear in the duplex unit is stiff.
(7-4) Duplex print jam occurs in the Duplex input

(7-4-1) Check of operating state of sensor levers
Dup-R and Dup-F sensor Remove the Duplex, and check the motions of the Replace the sensor
levers sensor levers. levers.
(7-4-2) Check of sensors

Use the SWITCH SCAN function of the self-diagnostic Replace the duplex
signal defection. mode to check to see if the sensor signals are detected PCB (V7Y PCB),
normally. Except for the Dup-In sensor, check the corresponding
state of signal detection in two cases: With a sheet of sensor or connection
paper placed inside the duplex unit and with the paper cord.
removed.
(7-5) Paper is not fed to a Regist roller from Duplex section

(7-5-1) Check the operational condition of the clutch
Duplex clutch Conduct the Motor and Clutch Test of the self-diagnostic Replace the V7Y
mode, and check the operation of the duplex clutch. PCB or the clutch.
44158801TH Rev.3 248 /

8.5.2.(8) Paper Size Error (Error 400)
(8-1) Paper jam occurs when the end of paper is near IN1 sensor.

(8-1-1) Check of state of paper feed
Multiple feed of paper
Open the front cover, and check to see if multiple sheets the error recurs
If
are fed through. even after the
jammed paper was
removed, replace
the reed of the tray
in use.
Paper size Check to see if the paper size specified for printing Change the
matches the size of the paper loaded in the tray. specified paper size
or the paper size in
the tray.
Inlet sensor 1 Check to see if the sensor lever demonstrates any Replace the sensor
abnormal shape or motion. lever with a normal
one.
44158801TH Rev.3 249 /

8.5.2.(9) ID Unit Up-Down Error(Service Call 140-143)
(9-1) An error occurs in the operation of ID Unit Up

(9-1-1) Check for load in the ascent
Load in installing/removing
Check to see if any abnormal load is felt in installing or Replace the ID unit
of ID unit removing the ID unit. or right and left side
plates. To use a
new ID unit on a trial
basis, use FUSE
KEEP MODE of the
System Maintenance
Menu.
Greasing of right and left Check to see if the slant parts of the link levers are Apply grease.
up-down link levers properly greased.
Assembled state of right Check to see if any part around the link levers is Reassemble them
and left up/down link levers obstructing their motion. correctly.
(9-1-2) Up/down mechanism

Assembled state around
Check to see if the link levers are assembled in such a Reassemble them
link levers manner that they link to the planetary gears. correctly.
Right and left link levers Check to see if the link levers are placed in the positions Reassemble them
where the gears are engaged properly (check to see correctly.
if the link levers are placed with several gear teeth
displaced.)
(9-1-3) Check of sensors
Up/down sensor lever

Check to see if the sensor levers demonstrate any eplace the left link
R
(integrated to the left link abnormal shape or motion. lever.
lever)
Up/down sensor Conduct the Motor and Clutch Test of the self-diagnostic Replace the high-
mode, and check to see if the sensor signals are detected voltage PCB.
normally. Block the sensor with a piece of paper, and then,
unblock it to see if the SCAN state varies.
(9-2) An error occurs in the operation of ID Unit Down

(9-2-1) Check of load in the descent
Load in installing/removing Check to see if any abnormal load is felt in installing or

Replace the ID unit
of ID unit removing the ID unit. or modify the right
and left side plates.
Greasing of right and left Check to see if the slant parts of the link levers are Apply grease.
up-down link levers properly greased.
Assembled state of right Check to see if any part around the link levers is Reassemble them
and left up/down link levers obstructing their motion. correctly.
(9-2-2) Installed state of ID unit
At least the cyan ID is Check to see if there is no cyan ID installed when the N- Install a dummy
installed. color mode is set. cyan ID or regular
cyan ID.
44158801TH Rev.3 250 /

8.5.2.(10) Fuser Unit Error(Error 170-177)
(10-1) An error occurs right after turning on the power

(10-1-1) Malfunction of thermistors
Upper thermistor, lower

Check to see if the thermistors are short-circuited or
Replace the fuser
thermistor, frame thermistor open. unit. To use a new
Check the resistance value through the connector pins fuser unit on a trial
below the fuser unit. basis, use FUSE
(See Subsection 9.1 Check of resistance values (Fuser KEEP MODE of the
unit.) System Maintenance
Menu.
Installed state of fuser unit Check to see if the fuser unit is securely pushed in to Redo the installation
such a position that the connector at its lower part is of the fuser unit.
plugged in.
(10-2) An error occurs in 1 min. from turning on the power

(10-2-1) Temperature rise of fuser unit
Thermostat, halogen lamp

Ensure that the heater control is properly exerted, and Replace the fuser
touch the fuser unit to confirm that it is hot. unit. To use a new
If it remains cold, confirm that the resistance between pin fuser unit on a trial
1 and pin 6 of the connectors (2) measures from several basis, use FUSE
Ω to several tens of Ω. KEEP MODE of the
System Maintenance
Menu.
(10-2-2) Temperature rise of fuser unit
Installed state of upper Check to see if the upper thermistor is installed away Replace the fuser
thermistor from its prescribed position, causing the temperature to unit. To use a new
be measured low. Detach the heater cover, and check fuser unit on a trial
visually for warpage of the sensor, etc. basis, use FUSE
KEEP MODE of the
System Maintenance
Menu.
Installed state of lower Check to see if the lower thermistor is located away, Replace the fuser
thermistor whereas it should be in contact with the unit, causing unit. To use a new
a lower temperature than the prescribed one to be fuser unit on a trial
detected. basis, use FUSE
KEEP MODE of the
System Maintenance
Menu.
(10-2-3) AC input for halogen lamp
AC voltage of low-voltage Check to see if the AC voltage for the heater is supplied Replace the low-
power supply normally. voltage power
Between pins 1 and 2 and between pins 3 and 4 of the supply.
CN connector of the power supply.
Heater-on signal delivered heck to see if the heater-on signal turns active at the
C Replace the PU
from PU to low-voltage warming-up timing. "L" active while it is ON. PCB (PRF PCB).
power supply Pin 11 and pin 12 of the POWER connector of the PU
PCB (PRF PCB)
44158801TH Rev.3 251 /

8.5.2.(11) Motor Fan Error(Error 120,127,051)
(11-1) Low voltage power unit fan or CU fan does not rotate right after turning on the power

(11-1-1) Connections and laying of cords
Connections and laying of

Check to see if the connectors are properly connected.
Redo the insertion
cords of low-voltage power Check to see if the surplus portion of a cord is touching of the connector.
supply fan, fuser fan and the blades of any fan. Modify the cord
CU fan laying route. Replace
the fan.
Check of normal CU fan/ Check to see if the CU fan/CU PCB are normal. Replace the CU
CU PCB fan/CU PCB.
(11-2) ID cooling fan does not rotate in printing

(11-2-1) Connection and laying of cord
Connection and laying of Check to see if the connector is properly connected.

Redo the insertion
Duplex fan cord Check to see if the surplus portion of the cord is touching of the connector.
the blades of the fan. Correct the cord
laying route. Replace
the fan.
24V fuse F501 of duplex Check to see if the fuse F501 is blown out or not. Replace the duplex
PCB (V7Y PCB) PCB (V7Y PCB).
24V supply of duplex PCB Check to see if the fuse FU3 of the PU PCB (PRF PCB) Replace the PU
(V7Y PCB) is blown out or not. PCB (PRF PCB).
(11-3) DUPLEX fan does not rotate in DUPLEX printing

(11-3-1) 24V power supply
Fuses F2 and F4 of PU Check to see if the F2 and F4 are open or not. Replace the PU
PCB (PRF PCB) PCB (PRF PCB).
24V power supplied to PU Check the power through the POWER connector of the Replace the low-
PCB (PRF PCB) PU PCB (PRF PCB). voltage power
Pins 4, 5, 6: 24V supply.
Pin 8: 0VL
Pins 1, 2, 3: 0VP
44158801TH Rev.3 252 /

8.5.2.(12) Print Speed is Slow (Low Performance)
(12-1) Print speed decreases up to 2ppm

(12-1-1) Environmental temperature
Environmental temperature Check to see if the printer is located in such a small Review the
of the location where the room that the environmental temperature gets unusually installation
printer is installed high, or the cooling effect of the fans cannot be obtained. environment
(especially, check to
see if the intake port
or delivery port of
the fan is blocked).
(12-2) Print speed decreases

(12-2-1) Setting of Media Weight
Media Weight specified for Check to see if a wrong Media Weight is specified. Correct the Media
printing Weight.
44158801TH Rev.3 253 /

8.5.2.(13) Option unit is not recognized
(13-1) Duplex unit is not recognized

(13-1-1) Duplex PCB
Duplex unit
Check to see if the duplex unit in use conforms to the
Replace the Duplex
MC560 specification (A unit conforming to the C3200/ unit.
C5540/C5510/C5450/C5250/C3100/ML3100/C5200/
ML5200/C5100/ML5100/C5300/ML5300 specification
cannot be connected).
Connections from PU PCB Check to make sure that the cord is properly connected Correct the
(PRF PCB) to duplex PCB from the DU connector of the PU PCB (PRF PCB) to the connections.
(V7Y PCB). duplex PCB.
Square connector Check to see if there is any foreign matter trapped in the Remove the foreign
connecting the duplex unit connecting part of the square connector matter.
to the printer
Square connector Check to see if the pins of the square connector are Replace the
connecting the duplex unit broken. connector.
to the printer
(13-1-3) Check of control signal
Signal delivered from PU Check the signal delivered through the OPTLPN
Replace the PU
PCB (PRF PCB) to duplex connector of the PU PCB (PRF PCB). PCB (PRF PCB).
(V7Y PCB) Pin 6: TXD (PU DUP)
Pin 4: RXD (DUP PU)
(13-2) 2nd Tray unit is not recognized

(13-2-1) 2nd tray PCB
2nd tray unit Check to see if the 2nd tray unit in use conforms to the Replace the 2nd tray
MC560 specification (A unit conforming to the C5800n/ unit.
C3200/C5540/C5510/C5450/C5250/C3100/ML3100/
C5200/ML5200/C5100/ML5100/C5300/ML5300
specification cannot be connected).
Connections from PU PCB Check to make sure that the cord is properly connected Correct the
(PRF PCB) to 2nd tray from the 2nd connector of the PU PCB (PRF PCB) to the connections.
PCB (V7Y PCB) 2nd tray PCB.
Correct the connections. Check to see if there is any foreign matter trapped in the Remove the foreign
connecting part of the square connector. matter.
Square connector Check to see if the pins of the square connector are Replace the
connecting the 2nd tray broken. connector.
unit to the printer
(13-2-3) Check of control signal
Signal delivered from PU Check the signal delivered through the 2nd connector of
Replace the PU
PCB (PRF PCB) to 2nd the PU PCB (PRF PCB). PCB (PRF PCB).
tray PCB (V7Y PCB) Pin 5: TXD (PU 2nd)
Pin 3: RXD (2nd PU)
44158801TH Rev.3 254 /

8.5.2.(14) LED head is not recognized(Error 131,132,133,134)
(14-1) Service Call 131-134(LED HEAD Missing)

Connected state between Check visually the connected state of the FFC.
Redo the connection
CU PCB connector and properly.
head connector
Head FFC Unplug the FFC of the head, and check for any wire Replace the head
breakage or peel-off of the covering along the cord. FFC or CU PCB.
Check of Fuse conduction Check voltage is 5V between capacitor CCP1 (See Replace F504
on CU board section 8.6) or CU PCB
44158801TH Rev.3 255 /

8.5.2.(15) Toner cartridge is not recognized(Error 540,541,542,543)
(15-1) Errors caused by consumables

(15-1-1) Installed state of consumables
ID units and toner Are the ID units installed in the right positions? Check to Redo the installation
cartridges see if the lock levers of the toner cartridges are locked. properly.
(15-2) Errors caused by toner sensor

(15-2-1) State of toner sensor
Toner sensor Is the toner sensor lens stained with toner? Wipe off the stain
Toner sensor Use the SWITCH SCAN function of the diagnostic mode Replace the toner
to check to see if the sensor is normal. Hold a white sensor PCB (PRZ
paper in front of the sensor, and see if the SCAN state PCB), PU PCB (PRF
varies. PCB) or the FFC
between PRZ and
PRF.
Note! How to check a toner sensor operation with SWITCH SCAN in the self-diagnosis mode.
(1) Confirmation of the operation in the device
1) Change to a display that a changing situation of the toner sensor is confirmed from the
operation panel in the self-diagnosis mode.
Refer to Section 5.4.2.3 Switch Scan Test as for how to display the operation panel.
2) When taking out an ID unit and toner cartridge (TC) from the device, there is a window on
the observers’ right from the device, in a position across to the side of the TC.
In that window, a toner sensor is located.
3) Hold up a piece of white paper against a sensor in a place within 3mm from a sensor
window.
4) The operation panel displays “L” if a piece of paper has light reflection and it displays “H” if
not.
5) By holding up a piece of paper, if the operation panel changes “H”to “L” or “L” to “H”, the
device operates normally.
Response in NG:
• Clean a toner of the sensor surface and clear paper dust.
• Confirm a connection state of FFC cable between the toner sensor board (PRF) and PU
main board (PRZ).
• Check an operation again and exchange PU main board (PRZ) or a toner sensor board (PRF)
if there is no change.
(2) Confirmation of the operation in Toner Cartridge (TC)
1) Install a TC and ID unit in a position where normal operation of the device has confirmed in
Confirmation (1) and check operation in the operation panel.
2) The display of the operation panel changes “H” to “L” or “L” to “H” in conjunction with an action
of TC white light reflector when operation of TC is normal.
Response in NG:
• Confirm an operation state of each ID motor by MOTOR&CLUTCH TEST in the self-
diagnosis mode.
• Clean the surface of the white light reflector at the side of TC. (Dirty from a toner or paper
dust.)
• Exchange a TC of a different color and ID unit by the set.
Exchange a TC or ID unit if the set of the different color is OK.
44158801TH Rev.3 256 /

(15-3) Errors caused by machine defects

(15-3-1) Loading on ID unit
ID Unit Is a heavy load imposed on the ID unit, for example, Replace the ID unit.
because the waste toner belt was ruptured? To use a new ID unit
on a trial basis, use
FUSE KEEP MODE
of the System
Maintenance Menu.
(15-3-2) Operating state of motors
ID motor Use the SWITCH SCAN function of the self-diagnostic Replace the PU
mode to check to see if each ID motor operates normally. PCB (PRF PCB) or
Make this checking in the presence and absence of a the ID motor.
load.
8.5.2.(16) Fuse Cutout Error (Error 150-155)
(16-1) Fuse cutout errors

FFC interconnecting the

Check for any incomplete insertion or skew insertion
Redo the connection
PU PCB (PRF) and the of the SSNS connector of the PU PCB (PRF) and the of the FFC properly.
toner sensor PCB (PRZ SSNS connector of the toner sensor PCB (PRZ PCB). Or, replace the FFC.
PCB) Also check to see if the FFC has any wire breakage of
peel-off of the covering.
(16-1-2) Fuse-cut circuit
PU PCB (PRF PCB) After checking the connections, turn on the power again, Replace the PU
and see if the error is issued again. PCB (PRF PCB).
44158801TH Rev.3 257 /

8.5.2.(17) Dew Condensation Errors (Error 123)
(17-1) Dew Condensation

Connection between PU
Check to see if the 13-pin FFC is properly plugged into
Correct the insertion
PCB (PRF PCB) and high- the HVOLT connector of the PU PCB (PRF PCB). of the cord properly.
voltage PCB Also check to see if the 9-pin FFC is properly plugged
into the CN connector of the high-voltage PCB.
Search for an imperfect connection or skew insertion.
FFC interconnecting the Check for a wire breakage with a circuit-tester. Check Replace the
PU PCB (PRF PCB) and visually for peel-off of the covering. connector with a
the high-voltage PCB normal FFC.
(17-1-2) Environmental condition
Heavy variation of Check to see if the environmental condition has changed witch on the
S
environmental condition from a low-temperature condition to a high temperature printer again after
condition in a short time. acclimatizing it to the
(For example, the printer was moved from storage in a new environmental
cold region to an office environment.) temperature for one
hour or so.
Before turning on
the power, touch the
sheet metal of the
controller panel on
the back and internal
sheet metals in
order to see how the
casing of the printer
is warming up.
Turn on the power
again when much
difference from the
room temperature is
no longer perceived.
44158801TH Rev.3 258 /

8.5.3 Image Problem Troubleshooting
(1) Color is totally pale (Fig.8.2 A ).......................................................................................262

(1-1) Color is pale.........................................................................................................262
(2) Background is dirty (Fig.8.2 B ).......................................................................................263

(2-1) Background is dirty (partly)..................................................................................263
(2-2) Background is dirty (totally).................................................................................263
(3) Blank Print (Fig.8.2 C )....................................................................................................264

(3-1) Blank on the whole page.....................................................................................264
(4) Vertical lines are printed..................................................................................................265

(4-1) Thin vertical lines (with color) (See Fig.8.2 D )....................................................265
(4-2) Thin vertical lines (without color) (See Fig.8.2 F )...............................................265
(5) Cyclic Print Trouble (Refer to Fig.8.2 E ).........................................................................265

(5-1) Vertical cyclic print trouble...................................................................................265
(6) Color registration is wide.................................................................................................266

(6-1) "IN ADJUSTING COLOR REGISTRATION" is shown only a short time..............266
(6-2) Although REG ADJUST TEST of the engine maintenance function is OK,........266
(7) Solid Black Print..............................................................................................................267

(7-1) Solid black on a full page.....................................................................................267
Note! Read a content of EEPROM chip on the old board and copy it to a new board
when exchanging a PU board (PRF PCB).
a Light or faded image B Dirty Background c Blank

on whole page
D Vertical black belt or line e Defective image of f Vertical white belt or line
regular interval
Figure 8.2
44158801TH Rev.3 259 /

8.5.3.(1) Color is totally pale (Fig.8.2 A )
(1-1) Color is pale

(1-1-1) Toner
Remaining quantity of toner Check to see if "ORDER TONER" or "REPLACE Replace the toner
TONER" appears on the operator panel. cartridge with a new
one.
Tape at the opening of Check to see if the tape placed at the opening of the Close the lever of
toner cartridge toner cartridge has been removed or not. the toner cartridge,
and peel off the tape
from the opening.
(1-1-2) LED head
LED head lens heck to see if the lens surface of the LED head is
C Clean the lens with
stained with toner or paper chips. a soft cloth.
Installed state of LED head Check to see if the LED head is properly installed in the Correct the
LED head holder. Also check to see if the right and left installation properly.
tension springs are properly installed.
(1-1-3) Print media
Type of medium Check to see if the medium loaded in the printer is not se the prescribed
U
something particularly thick. paper.
(1-1-4) High-voltage terminal
ID unit terminal Ensure visually that the high-voltage terminal of the ID Replace the ID unit
unit is duly in contact with the contact ASSY (see Figure or modify the high-
8-3). voltage terminal. To
use a new ID unit
FUSE KEEP MODE
of the System
Maintenance Menu.
(1-1-5) Installed state of ID unit
Lowest position of ID unit

Draw out and insert the ID unit by hand repeatedly, and Check the
(Deficient transfer) check to see if it is normally lowered to its lowest position U-grooves of the
free from any abnormal load. Not acceptable (NG) if the side plates for any
leading edge of a sheet of paper inserted in between the trouble. If the trouble
drum and the belt can readily be passed through. is irreparable,
replace the printer.
44158801TH Rev.3 260 /

8.5.3.(2) Background is dirty (Fig.8.2 B )
(2-1) Background is dirty (partly)

(2-1-1) ID unit
Drum exposed to light Check to see if the ID unit has been left in an
Replace the ID unit.
environment where its surface was exposed to light for a To use a new ID unit
long time. on a trial basis, use
FUSE KEEP MODE
of the System
Maintenance Menu.
Leak of toner Check to see if toner is leaking from the ID unit or toner Replace the ID unit
cartridge. or toner cartridge.
To use a new ID unit
FUSE KEEP MODE
of the System
Maintenance Menu.
(2-1-2) Fuser unit
Offset toner of fuser unit Check to see if the fuser unit has offset toner from the epeat idle printing
R
previous print job sticking. by using waste
medium, until the
offset toner is
exhausted to the
print medium. Or,
replace the fuser
unit. To use a new
fuser unit on a trial
basis, use FUSE
KEEP MODE of the
System Maintenance
Menu.
(2-2) Background is dirty (totally)

(2-2-1) Print medium
Type of medium Check to see if an especially thin medium is used for Use the prescribed
printing. paper.
unit is properly in contact with the contact ASSY (see or modify the high-
Figure 8-3). voltage terminal. To
use a new ID unit
FUSE KEEP MODE
of the System
Maintenance Menu.
44158801TH Rev.3 261 /

8.5.3.(3) Blank Print (Fig.8.2 C )
(3-1) Blank on the whole page

(3-1-1) State of toner
Remaining quantity of toner Check

to see if a sufficient quantity of toner remains in Replace the toner
the toner cartridge. cartridge.
(3-1-2) State of exposure
LED head Check to see if the LED head faces the drum properly Correct the installed
in the prescribed position when the cover is closed. position of the LED
Also check to see if there is something on the light- head.
emitting surface of the LED head that obstructs the light
emission.
Connected state of LED Check to see if the LED head is properly connected. Replace the LED
head head.
Drum shaft Check to see if the drum shaft is so mounted that it Replace the ID unit.
properly touches the right and left side plates. To use a new ID unit
FUSE KEEP MODE
of the System
Maintenance Menu.
unit is properly in contact with the contact ASSY (see or high-voltage PCB.
Figure 8-3). Or, modify high-
voltage terminal. To
use a new ID unit
FUSE KEEP MODE
of the System
Maintenance Menu.
44158801TH Rev.3 262 /

8.5.3.(4) Vertical lines are printed
(4-1) Thin vertical lines (with color) (See Fig.8.2 D )

(4-1-1) State of ID unit
Filming of ID unit Check to see if the print was conducted in the absence Replace the toner
of toner. cartridge with a new
one. If still the error
is issued, replace
the ID unit. To use a
new ID unit on a trial
basis, use FUSE
KEEP MODE of the
System Maintenance
Menu.
(4-2) Thin vertical lines (without color) (See Fig.8.2 F )

(4-2-1) State of LED head
LED head Check to see if the LED head has any foreign matter Remove the foreign
sticking to the light-emitting surface of the SELFOC lens. matter.
(4-2-2) Running state of paper
Path route Check to see if there is a burr in the paper running path Remove the burr.
before fuser that scratches unfixed toner.
8.5.3.(5) Cyclic Print Trouble (Refer to Fig.8.2 E )
(5-1) Vertical cyclic print trouble

(5-1-1) Periodicity
Image drum Check to see if the periodicity is 94.25 mm or not. Replace the ID unit.
Development roller Check to see if the periodicity is 39.68 mm or not. Replace the ID unit.
Toner supply roller Check to see if the periodicity is 58.36 mm or not. Replace the ID unit.
Charging roller Check to see if the periodicity is 37.7 mm or not. Replace the ID unit.
Roller on the fuser unit Check to see if the periodicity is 86.39 mm or not. Replace the fuser
unit.
Transfer roller (Black) Check to see if the periodicity is 50.27 mm or not. Replace the belt
unit.
Transfer roller (Color) Check to see if the periodicity is 43.98 mm or not. Replace the belt
unit.
o use a new
T
consumable part
FUSE KEEP MODE
of the System
Maintenance Menu.
44158801TH Rev.3 263 /

8.5.3.(6) Color registration is wide.
(6-1) "IN ADJUSTING COLOR REGISTRATION" is shown only a short time

(6-1-1) Color registration result
Color registration time Execute REG ADJ UST TEST in the self-diagnostic Replace the sensor
(Approx. 50 sec if normal) mode, and check the result. that originated NG.
Any error issued is not displayed if the ONLINE indication Clean the sensor.
is on. Replace the shutter.
Replace the PU
PCB (PRF PCB).
(6-1-2) Toner
Remaining quantity of toner Check to see if "ORDER TONER" or "REPLACE Replace the toner
TONER” is displayed on the operator panel. cartridge with a new
one.
(6-1-3) Color registration sensor
Dirty sensor Check to see if the sensor has toner or paper chips Wipe off the dirt.
sticking.
(6-1-4) Color registration sensor shutter
Defects of the shutter Check the shutter operation in the self-diagnostic mode. Replace the shutter
operation or modify the
mechanism.
(6-2) Although REG ADJUST TEST of the engine maintenance function is OK, Color drift is seen

(6-2-1) Paper feed system
State of paper feed system Check to see if there is anything on the paper feed route Remove the
of running route that hinders the paper from running. obstacle.
44158801TH Rev.3 264 /

8.5.3.(7) Solid Black Print
(7-1) Solid black on a full page

(7-1-1) High-voltage contact state
CH terminal
Check visually from above to see if the terminal
Replace the terminal
extending from the printer is properly in contact with the of the printer side.
high-voltage terminal on the left side of the ID unit.
CH terminal Check to see if the high-voltage terminal remains in Redo the installation
normal contact on the high-voltage PCB. Remove the of the terminal
high-voltage PCB by opening the left cover, and check to properly.
see if the terminal is abnormally installed.
ID unit terminal Ensure visually that the high-voltage terminal of the ID Replace the ID unit,
unit is properly in contact with the contact ASSY (see high-voltage PCB,
Figure 7-3) or modify the high-
voltage terminal. To
use a new ID unit
FUSE KEEP MODE
of the System
Maintenance Menu.
(7-1-2) State of high-voltage output
CH output If a high-voltage probe is available among the Replace the high-

maintenance tools, open the left cover, and check the voltage PCB.
CH output with the high-voltage probe through the
solder side of the high-voltage PCB while the machine is
printing.
(The high-voltage probe is not an ordinary maintenance
tool.)
Charging Roller
Ground
Developing Roller
Toner Supply Roller
Figure 8.3
44158801TH Rev.3 265 /

8.5.4 Actions after forced initialization of HDD/Flash
This subsection explains the actions to be taken after a troubled HDD or Flash has been sub-
jected to forced initialization.
1) Action after forced initialization of HDD

If the HDD is forcibly initialized, the following data is deleted. There is no way to recover it.
• Unprinted data inside the HDD
• Log data of JobAccount (If JobAccount is active at the time)
2) If the Flash is forcibly initialized, the following data is deleted, making it impossible to use
the network.
• NIC-F/W
• Web Page data
• Demonstration page data for OEM (If the printer is for OEM)
The above NIC-F/W, Mac address and Web Page data need to be written to a flash by means
of the Maintenance Utility.
Note! Do not execute this initialization in normal condition.
44158801TH Rev.3 266 /

8.5.5 Network Troubleshooting
(1) Cannot print from Utility.

(1) Check of LINK light
Check of LINK light Check to see if the LINK light (green) is on. Redo the connection
Check to see if the HUB and the printer are properly of the network cable.
linked. (Check to see if the network cable is properly
connected.)
Check to see if a straight cable is in use. Replace the cable
with a straight cable.
Insert a Network cable to a different HUB port. Replace the HUB.
(2) Check of network information
Check to see if network Press the Push-SW of the NIC card to print the network Rewrite NIC-F/W
information can be printed information. with the utility.
correctly.
(3) Check of contents of network information
Check the IP address, Check an IP address, Subnet mask, Gateway address Set an IP address,
SUB-net mask and printed on Network information. Subnet mask, and
gateway address. Gateway address
correctly.
(4) Check to see if communication can be held through the network.
Check to see if a Ping Check the IP address, SUB-net mask and gateway Set an IP address,
command can be sent from address which are printed in the network information. Subnet mask,
the PC to the printer. Gateway address
correctly.
(5) Check of Utility
Check the settings of the Check the set items of the OKILPR Utility. Set the set items of
OKILPR Utility. the OKILPR Utility
correctly.
(6) Check through standard OS port
Check the standard LRP Set the standard LPR port conforming to the WINDOWS Set the standard
port conforming to the standard (NT, 2000, XP), and see if print can be LPR port conforming
WINDOWS standard (NT, executed. to the WINDOWS
2000, XP). standard (NT, 2000,
XP) correctly.
44158801TH Rev.3 267 /

8.6 Check of fuses

If any of the following errors is issued, check the corresponding fuse on the CU control PCB (TBR/
TB2-6 PCB), PU control PCB (PRF PCB) or high-voltage power supply PCB. (See Table 8-6.)
Table 8-6 Fuse Error
Fuse Name Error Description Insert Point

PU PCB F1 Hopping error Feed motor, IP up/down motor, 24V
ID up/down error High voltage, fan, update Ver.
F2 Power supply fan error Power supply fan, paper feed solenoid,
Hopping error 24V
F3 Duplex fan error Duplex, 2nd 24V
2nd hopping error
F4 Cover open Belt motor, high-voltage PCB, 24V
F5 Power interruption PU PCB, 5V
F6 Scanner no paper PU PCB, 24V
High Voltage IP901 Cover open High voltage, 24V
PCB
CU control PCB F504 Service Call LED HEAD 5V
Errors 131 to 134
(TBR/TB2-6 PCB)
44158801TH Rev.3 268 /

8.7 Troubleshooting
This section is given to locate and resolve the causes of troubles so as the MFP is always
in good working condition. The trouble modes, relevant units and maintenance methods are
described below.
When a problem occurs, troubleshoot the problem according to the symptoms it shows.
Check the following first:
1. Is anything operated improperly?
2. Does the problem recur, or is it regular?
Figure 8.7.1 to Figure 8.7.3 show the troubleshooting flowcharts.
The causes and maintenance methods for each failure mode are described in Table 8.7.1
through 8.7.7
8.7.1 Troubleshooting flowchart
8.7.1.1 Power ON to the MFP ready
Power on
LCD shows
No
Booting Up. See Table 8.7.1
Message
Yes
LCD shows
Scan to Menu
Wait for command

from host
Figure 8.7.1 Power on to the MFP ready
44158801TH Rev.3 269 /

8.7.1.2 Copy operation
Copier online troubleshooting
Mono/Copy No
Button press?
Yes
Check Printer No
See Table 8.7.2
online ?
Yes
No Scanning
See Table 8.7.3 performed
Yes
Printing No
See Table 8.7.4
completed
Yes
No Image
See Table 8.7.5 not clear
Yes
Yes Noises
See Table 8.7.6
generated
No
END
Figure 8.7.2 Copy operation flow
44158801TH Rev.3 270 /

8.7.1.3 Email operation
Email online troubleshooting
Mono/Copy No
press?
Yes
Connect SMTP No
See Table 8.7.8, Table 8.7.9
Server?
Yes
No Scanning
See Table 8.7.3 performed?
Yes
Transferring No
See Table 8.7.8, Table 8.7.9
compleat?
Yes
END
Figure 8.7.3 Email operation flow
44158801TH Rev.3 271 /

8.7.1.4 Control panel operation
Copier online troubleshooting
Wait for key No

pressing?
Yes
LCD shows No
See Table 8.7.7
message?
Yes
Value
setting
Yes
END
Figure 8.7.4 Control panel operation
44158801TH Rev.3 272 /

8.7.2 Tables
The following tables provide detailed troubleshooting information.
Table 8.7.1 The LCD does not display.

Table 8.7.2 Printer does not react.
Table 8.7.3 Optical path dirty or hardware problem.
Table 8.7.4 Printer does not print.
Table 8.7.5 Image not clear.
Table 8.7.6 Noise generated.
Table 8.7.7 LCD does not show message after command.
Table 8.7.8 The MFP is not connected to the network.
Table 8.7.9 The MFP cannot send email.
44158801TH Rev.3 273 /

8.7.2.1 LCD does not display
Table 8.7.1
Cause Relevant Unit Check Method Maintenance Method

Unplugged from None Visual check Insert the AC plug into the
outlet outlet
DC power un- None Visual check Insert the DC power adapter
plugged from unit cable into the unit
AC voltage failure None AC outlet voltage None
check
Power adapter out- Power unit Output voltage Replace the power unit
put voltage failure (+24v) check
PCB failure Main control PCB Tester check (+24V, Remove the cause or replace
GND) the PCB
LCD module main LCD module main Visual check Plug the connector and secure
board connection board it firmly
failure
8.7.2.2 Printer does not react
Table 8.7.2

Printer cable failure Printer cable Visual check Secure printer cable firmly or
replace the printer cable
Printer link failure Main PCB Visual check Replace the PCB
Printer paper jam Visual check Remove paper
Printer paper Visual check Insert paper
empty
Printer problem Visual check See printer manual
Printer busy Visual check Wait till printer ready
8.7.2.3 Scanning is not performed
Table 8.7.3

Scanner cable fail- Scanner cable Visual check Attach the scanner cable
ure
Scanner link failure Main PCB Visual check Replace the PCB
Scan Module Replace the Scan Module
Scanner no power PU PCB Tester check Replace the PCB
or
Replace the F6 (PU PCB)
44158801TH Rev.3 274 /

8.7.2.4 Printer does not print
Table 8.7.4

Printer select Printer Visual check Make sure the printer informa-
wrong tion on the LCD display is cor-
rect.
Paper size incor- Paper tray Visual check Replace paper tray (The paper
rect size being selected is inconsist-
ent between the printer & the
scanner).
Printer problem Visual check Check printer
8.7.2.5 Image unclear
Table 8.7.5

Lamp too dark Lamp Visual check Replace the lamp
Dirt on flatbed Flatbed glass Visual check Clean the flatbed glass with
glass isopropyl alcohol
Printer toner low Printer toner Visual check Check printer toner or replace
the toner
Printer memory not Printer Visual check Add printer memory
enough
8.7.2.6 Noise generated
Table 8.7.6

Motor unit failure Motor unit Replace the motor Replace the motor
unit
Main control PCB Main control PCB Replace the main Replace the main control PCB
failure control PCB
Scanning module Scanning module Check scanning Replace the scanning module
failure module shakiness
Dirt on rail None Visual check Clean the rail with oil
8.7.2.7 LCD does not show message after command
Table 8.7.7
Cause Maintenance Method

LCD module cable failure Attach the LCD module cable and se-
cure it firmly
LCD problem Replace the LCD module
Push button failure Replace the LCD module
44158801TH Rev.3 275 /

8.7.2.8 MFP is not connected to the network
Table 8.7.8

RJ-45 connector is not Plug the connector in
plugged in
Network cable is damaged Replace a good one
IP address is invalid Ask MIS for a valid address
Subnet Mask is invalid Ask MIS for a valid value
Gateway IP is invalid Ask MIS for a valid address
8.7.2.9 MFP cannot send email
Table 8.7.9

SMTP server IP is wrong Ask MIS for a correct SMTP server ad-
dress
“From” address is wrong Check “From” email account
“To” address is wrong Check “To” email address
Other causes Please refer to the following error code
table
44158801TH Rev.3 276 /

8.7.2.10 Error message (LCD of scanner)
8.7.2.10.1 Error message during initializing
Error Message Meaning

Hardware Error Hardware Error
Check Scanner
Lamp Error Lamp Error
Check Scanner
Home Sensor/Lock Error Home Sensor or Lock Error
Check Scanner Release the Lock
ADF Paper Jam ADF Paper Jam
Check Scanner Remove the paper
PIN ID Error Please Re-input
Please Re-input
Failed to Failed to detect printer. 90second Time-out
Detect Printer Check the printer is on line or cable is connected
Failed to get Failed to get printer information
Printer Information
Check The Printer Failed to detect printer or failed to get printer infor-
Press Stop key mation.
44158801TH Rev.3 277 /

8.7.2.10.2 Error message during printing and copying

Printer is off-line Shows off-line status
Check The Printer Press ONLINE button of printer
10007 Check The Printer
Check The Printer
Optimizing Temperature Because the drum temperature is high, printing is tempo-
Check The Printer rarily suspended. Or, the printer is waiting for implementa-
tion of heat measure for media switch from narrow paper
to wide paper.
10058 Auto registration adjusting in progress
Check The Printer
10988 Auto tone adjusting in progress
Check The Printer
10994 Auto density adjusting in progress
Check The Printer
Black Toner Low Toner low.
Order K Toner This message is also displayed when Y, M or C waste
Yellow Toner Low toner box is near full.
Order Y Toner
Magenta Toner Low
Order M Toner
Cyan Toner Low
Order C Toner
Y Waste Toner Full The printer can still print. Allows printing about 50 pages
Replace Y Toner of A4 size at 5% density, then stops with Waste Toner Full
M Waste Toner Full Error again. The LCD message indicates that the Waste
Replace M Toner Toner box is full.
C Waste Toner Full

Replace C Toner
K Toner Empty If a toner empty occurs and a user opens/closes the cover
Replace K Toner or reboots the printer, this phenomenon happens. When
Y Toner Empty the printer printed approx. 50 pages (A4, density 5%), the
Replace Y Toner error occurs again.
M Toner Empty
Replace M Toner
C Toner Empty
Replace C Toner
K Drum Near Life Drum near life.
Order K Drum
Y Drum Near Life
Order Y Drum
M Drum Near Life
Order M Drum
C Drum Near Life
Order C Drum
Fuser Unit Near Life Fuser unit near life.
Order Fuser
Belt Unit Near Life Belt unit near life.
Order Belt
44158801TH Rev.3 278 /


K Drum Life If a drum life error occurs and a user opens/closes the
Replace K Drum cover or reboots the printer, this phenomenon happens.
Y Drum Life When the printer printed 500 pages, the error occurs
Replace Y Drum again.
M Drum Life
Replace M Drum
C Drum Life
Replace C Drum
Fuser Unit Life If a fuser life error occurs and a user opens/closes the
Replace Fuser cover or reboots the printer, this phenomenon happens.
When the printer printed 500 pages, the error occurs again.
Belt Unit Life If a belt life error occurs and a user opens/closes the cover
Replace Belt or reboots the printer, this phenomenon happens. When the
printer printed 500 pages, the error occurs again.
10053 Belt Reflex Check error. This is not a user-level error.
Check The Printer (If it happens, change the mode to Shipping mode. See
the Maintenance Manual.)
10976 This is not a user-level error.
10975 This is not a user-level error.
10050 Registration error. This is not a user-level error.
10054 Sensor calibration error. This is not a user-level error.
10051 Gamma error. This is not a user-level error.
10052 Registration sensor error. This is not a user-level error.
10944 Adjusting data of LED HEAD is not written in PU FLASH
Check The Printer (only when VE LED Head without EEPROM is used)
10945
Check The Printer
10946
Check The Printer
10947
Check The Printer
MP Tray Empty MP tray, or tray1 is empty.
Load Paper in MP Tray Treated as Warning until printing to the empty tray is des-
Tray1 Empty ignated. “MP Tray Empty” is displayed when paper feed
Load Paper in Tray1 from MP tray is attempted, but the tray is empty. When
printing of the job is completed, this warning disappears if
a user opens/closes the cover or reboots the printer.
40994 The data of COPY is memory-full.
Check The Printer
44158801TH Rev.3 279 /


10982 Job cancelled because of no permission for printing (Related
Check The Printer to JobAccount) Cleared by pressing ON-LINE switch.
30114 Invalid data was received. Press the On-line switch and
Check The Printer eliminate the warning.
Displayed when unsupported PDL command is received or
a spool command is received without HDD.
411yy Manual paper feed is required. Manually insert the paper
Check The Printer shown by mmm.
480yy Media Mismatch The media type in the tray does not match the print data.
Check The Printer Load mmm/ppp paper in MP Tray, or Tray1.
482yy Media Mismatch
Check The Printer
483yy Media Mismatch
Check The Printer
30993 Network initializing.
Check The Printer
472yy Tray1 Empty Printing request is issued to an empty tray1.
Load mmm in Tray1
470yy MP Tray Empty Paper feed from MPTRAY is attempted, but the tray is
Load mmm in MP Tray empty. Loading mmm paper and pressing the On-line
switch will start printing.
30097 Memory capacity overflows. Press ON-LINE switch so that
Check The Printer printing continues. Install expansion RAM or decrease data
size.
Y Waste Toner Full * waste toner will fill up the box.Toner replacement is nec-
Replace Y Toner essary.
M Waste Toner Full * = Y, M or C
Replace M Toner
C Waste Toner Full
Replace C Toner
K Toner Empty * toner empty
Replace K Toner * = K, Y, M or C
Y Toner Empty Warning status takes effect at Cover Open/Close, while
Replace Y Toner allowing printing approx 20 pages at least 5 times. (A4,
density 5%).
M Toner Empty
Replace M Toner
C Toner Empty
Replace C Toner
Have You Replaced Y Displayed to confirm whether the user has replaced the *
Toner? Yes / No toner after Cover Open/Close (after Waste Toner Full er-
Have You Replaced M ror).
Toner? Yes / No The selection of "Yes" will reset the toner counter while
clearing Waste Toner Full error. The selection of "No" will
Have You Replaced C bring the printer to waste toner full warning status.
Toner? Yes / No
Paper Size Error Inappropriate size paper was fed from a tray. Usually paper
Open Front Cover is automatically exit out, and error message is displayed.
After Cover open and close , error is recovered. If paper
is remained in the printer, remove paper and close cover.
Open and close the cover to perform recovery printing,
and continue.
44158801TH Rev.3 280 /


Paper Jam-MP Tray JAM has occurred.
Open Front Cover MP Tray
Paper Jam-Tray1 JAM has occurred.
Open Front Cover Tray1
Paper Jam-Feed JAM has occurred.
Open Front Cover Feed
Paper Jam-Transport JAM has occurred in paper path.
Open Top Cover Transport
Paper Jam-Exit JAM has occurred in paper path.
Open Top Cover Exit
40980 Displayed if jam is occurring in Duplex Unit and the Duplex
Check The Printer unit is removed. If a user removes the Duplex Unit when
jam is not occurring in the Duplex unit, Service Call Error
181 occurs.
K Drum Life Drum life. Warning status takes effect at cover open/close.
Replace K Drum When the printer printed 500 pages, the error occurs
Y Drum Life again.
Replace Y Drum
M Drum Life
Replace M Drum
C Drum Life
Replace C Drum
Fuser Unit Life Fuser life. Warning status occurs at cover open/close. When
Replace Fuser the printer printed 500 pages, the error occurs again.
Belt Unit Life Belt life. Warning status takes effect at cover open/close.
Replace Belt When the printer printed 500 pages, the error occurs again.
Waste Toner Full Waste toner full. Warning status takes effect at cover open/
Replace Belt close. When the printer printed 500 pages, the error occurs
again.
40034 Drum is not correctly installed.
Check The Printer
40035
Check The Printer
40036
Check The Printer
40033 Belt is unlocked or black drum is not correctly installed.
Check The Printer
40037 Belt unit is not correctly installed.
Check The Printer
40992 Fuser unit is not correctly installed.
Check The Printer
Printer Top Cover Open Cover is open.
Close Cover Top Cover
Printer Front Cover Open Cover is open.
Close Cover Front Cover
Duplex Cover Open Cover is open.
Close Cover Duplex
40967 Download mode when download data is received in normal
Check The Printer operation.
Show download data is receiving.
44158801TH Rev.3 281 /


30027 A network error is occurring.
Check The Printer
40057 Service Calls.
Check The Printer
Copy is Unusable Color & Mono copy are unusable.
Color Copy is Unusable Mono copy only
Setting Failed Setup isn’t changed
Setup isn’t changed
Warning Failed to the Updated
Failed to the Updated
Set Supported Paper Set Supported Paper
Got Un-support Value Confirm Printer Setting
Confirm Printer Setting
Set Letter Paper Set Letter Paper
Set A4 Paper Set A4 Paper
Paper Empty Paper Empty
Menu Map Printing Failed
Printing Failed
Printer Demo Page Printing Failed
Printing Failed
MFP Usage Report
Printing Failed
Consumable Remaining
Printing Failed
Send Log Report
Printing Failed
Printer Error Check the Printer
Check The Printer
Adjust Density
Failed
Adjust Registration
Failed
Printer is OFFLINE Check the Printer
Check the Printer
44158801TH Rev.3 282 /

8.7.2.10.3 Information codes during networking

Connection failed The connection failed.
Check network settings
Address is invalid The destination address is invalid.
Network is down Network is down.
Network is unreachable Network is unreachable.
Connection aborted by The connection aborted by the server.
server
Connection reset by server The connection reset by the server.
Connection time out Connection timed out.
Connection failure The attempt to connect failed.
Host is not able to reach The destination host is not able to reach.
Fail to connect E-mail server Fail to connect Email Server
Check network environment
SMTP Sever is empty Please input IP or domain name for SMTP Server into
Please setup SMTP Server SMTP server item of network configuration in Admin.
in Admin
SMTP Server address is Please make sure SMTP Server’s domain name or IP is
Wrong correct.
POP3 Server address is Please make sure POP3 Server's domain name or IP is
wrong correct.
Check POP3 Server in
menu
Fail to connect POP3 server Fail to connect POP3 server.
Contact your network
administrator
Fail to login POP3 server Please check user login name and password.
Check your login name and
password
TIFF or MTIFF Please select raw data format or select text mode or re-
compression fail duce resolution.
Check DNS server’s IP Please input the IP of DNS server into DNS server item of
network configuration in Admin.
Fail to get Please make sure the filing server’s domain name in Tar-
filing server's IP get URL is correct and DNS server’s IP is correct.
Failed to search Failed to send DHCP discover packet. Please check net-
DHCP Server work environment.
If there is no DHCP Server in your network environment.
Please turn off the setup of DHCP, and input Subnet Mask,
Gateway IP, and IP on network configuration in Admin key.
44158801TH Rev.3 283 /


Failed to get network Failed to get network setting (DHCP Server’s IP, Sub-
setup by DHCP net Mask, Gateway IP) from DHCP Server. Please check
DHCP Server.
Failed to get IP from Failed to get IP from DHCP Server. Please check DHCP
DHCP Server Server.
Failed to renew IP from There is no response from DHCP Server after sent a re-
DHCP Server new IP request. Please check DHCP Server.
44158801TH Rev.3 284 /

8.7.2.10.4 Error message during E-mailing

Device internal failure Device internal failure
Reboot the scanner
Fail to connect Fail to connect Mail server
Mail server
Contact network
administrator
Fail to get Fail to get Mail server response
Mail server response
Contact network
administrator
Unpredicted error Unpredicted error
Contact network
administrator
Service unavailable Service not available, closing transmission channel. The
Contact network Server is going to shut down.
administrator
No support SMTP Mail server doesn't support SMTP Login extension
Login extension
Contact network
administrator
No support SMTP Mail server doesn't support SMTP Login authentication
Login authentication
Contact network
administrator
SMTP Login error SMTP Login user name error
Check Login name
Mailbox unavailable Requested mail action not taken: mailbox unavailable
Check “To” address
Processing error Requested action aborted: local error in processing
Contact network
administrator
Insufficient Requested action not taken: insufficient system storage
system storage
Contact network
administrator
Temporary authentication Temporary authentication failure:
failure The authentication failed due to a temporary server failure.
Contact network
administrator
Command error Syntax error, command unrecognized
Restart Scanner
Parameter or Syntax error in parameters or arguments
argument error
Check Network Settings
Sequence error Bad sequence of commands
Restart Scanner
44158801TH Rev.3 285 /


Command parameters Command parameters not implemented
not implemented
Check Network Settings
Authentication required Authentication required:
Contact network Mail server requires authentication in order to perform the
administrator requested action.
Action not taken Requested action not taken: mailbox name not allowed.
Check "To" address
User not local User not local: please try again.
Exceeded storage Requested mail action aborted: exceeded storage alloca-
Allocation tion
Mailbox name not allowed Requested action not taken: mailbox name not allowed
Transaction failed Transaction failed
Contact network
administrator
Connection error Connection broken during data transmission.
Check network
environment
File size is too large File size is larger then the size that is set in “scan size
limit” of menu
44158801TH Rev.3 286 /

8.7.2.10.5 Error message during filing

Fail to connect Fail to connect FTP server
FTP server
Contact server
administrator
Unpredicted error Unpredicted error
Contact server
administrator
FTP Login error FTP Login name error
Check Login name
FTP Password error FTP password incorrect
Check Password in folder
Can't enter directory FTP can't enter this directory
Make sure privilege
Can't check file FTP can't check file existed or not
Make sure privilege
Can't change data FTP can't change data transfer type
transfer type
Contact server
administrator
Store file error FTP store file error
Make sure privilege
Insufficient storage Insufficient storage space in system
space in system
Contact server
administrator
File name not allowed File name not allowed
Change file name
Can’t create directory FTP can’t create directory
Make sure privilege
CIFS Login fail CIFS (User level) login fail
Check ID & Password
Can't make subdirectory CIFS (User level) can not make subdirectory
Check the account
CIFS fail to connect CIFS fail to connect
Check server supports
CIFS
Network share name CIFS Network share name incorrect.
incorrect
Check directory in
folder
Computer name error CIFS Computer name error
Make sure computer name
in directory
CIFS dialect negotiation CIFS dialect negotiation fail
fail
Contact server
administrator
CIFS fail to create file CIFS fail to create file.
Make sure you have full
control privilege
44158801TH Rev.3 287 /


CIFS send data error CIFS send data error
CIFS fail to access file CIFS fail to access file attribute
attribute
Make sure you have full
control privilege
HTTP fail to connect HTTP fail to connect
Check IP & HTTP port
HTTP unauthorized HTTP Unauthorized
Make sure your account
has authorization
HTTP forbidden HTTP Forbidden
This action is forbidden
MKCOL method not allowed HTTP MKCOL method not allowed
Contact server
administrator
MKCOL method not HTTP MKCOL method not implemented
implemented
Contact server
administrator
HTTP PUT method not HTTP PUT method not allowed
allowed
Contact server
administrator
HTTP server internal HTTP server internal error
error
Contact server
administrator
PUT method not HTTP PUT method not implemented
implemented
Contact system
administrator
HTTP server unavailable HTTP server unavailable
Contact server
administrator
HTTP No support HTTP server does not support HTTP version 1.1
That server does not
support HTTP
Resource not found HTTP Resource not found
Contact server
administrator
44158801TH Rev.3 288 /

8.7.2.10.6 Error message on fax
Error Dode Error Message Meaning

200 NO_STATUS = FAX_ERR_BASE,
201 NO_DIALTONE_ERROR,
202 NO_COMMON_MODULATION_ERROR
203 NO_FAX_RESPONSE,
204 NUMBER_BUSY,
205 OPERATOR_CANCELLED,
206 V8_ANSWER_ERROR,
207 COMMAND_REPEAT_ERROR,
208 NO_DIS_DTC_RECEIVED,
209 NO_OR_LOST_FAX_CONNECTION,
210 V34_CC_RETRAIN_TIMEOUT,
211 CFR_RESEND_ERROR,
212 COMMAND_REPEAT_ERROR1,
213 REMOTE_CANNOT_RX_OR_POLL_ER
ROR
214 POLL_FAILED_NO_PAPER_IN_ADF,
215 POLLING_DISABLED,
216 CONFIDENTIAL_POLLING_FAILED,
217 CONFIDENTIAL_TX_FAILED,
218 CIG_DID_NOT_MATCH,
219 CIG_NOT_RECEIVED,
220 POLL_PASSWORD_DID_NOT_MATCH,
221 PWDP_NOT_RECEIVED,
222 ANSWER_NON_V34_MODE_ERROR,
223 V34_NOT_SUPPORTED_IN_JM,
224 PRI_ERROR_EOR,
225 FAILED_TO_TRAIN_WHEN_SENDING,
226 TOO_MANY PPR_ERRORS,
227 V34_PPR_COUNT_ERROR,
228 T30_T5_TIME_OUT,
229 PC_CTS_TIMEOUT_ERROR,
230 TX_G3_PAGE_IMAGE_DATA_NOT_RE
ADY_ERROR,
231 CANNOT_RESEND_PAGE_ERROR,
232 CFR_SENT_NO_RESPONSE_ERROR,
233 DID NOT RECEIVE NEW DIS ERROR
234 RX_MEMORY_FULL,
235 TX_JOB_LOST,
236 TX_JOB_DELETE,
237 RTN_ERROR,
238 EOR_Q_ERROR,
44158801TH Rev.3 289 /

8.8 Scanner Shipment Setting List

8.8.1 The outline of Menu structure
Each Function
Push Menu Key
Information
Printer Menu
Network Settings
Mail Server
FAX Setting
Report Print
Management
8.8.2 Scanner operation panel
“2” key is used for standing up of scanner with

Fax Service mode=ON. Menu key : to enter the menu.
Each mode keys (Copy, ScanTo and Fax) Additional Settings key is used to enter
the Additional Settings menu for each
modes.
44158801TH Rev.3 290 /

Each Function
Push Menu Key
Information
Model
Device Name
Scanner MAC Address
Printer Serial No.
F/W Version : Combine Printer F/W ver. with Scanner F/W ver.
, Key
Printer Menu After the following setup is finished, returned to this class.
Tray1 Paper Size
Tray2 Paper Size
MP Paper Size
Tray1 Media Weight
Tray1 Media Type
Tray2 Media Weight
Tray2 Media Type
MPTray Media Weight
MPTray MediaType
Density Control
Adjust Density
Adjust Registration
, Key
Network Settings After the following setup is finished, returned to this class.
Select
Input Admin. Password
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway IP
DNS Server
DHCP Enable
Device Name
IEEE802.x1
EAP Method
User ID
Password
, Key
Mail Server After the following setup is finished, returned to this class.
Select
SMTP Server
SMTP Port
POP3 Server
POP3 Port
Authentication Method
If Authentication Method is selected to SMTP or POP3,
Login Name* this item become active
If Authentication Method is selected to SMTP or POP3,
Password* this item become active
44158801TH Rev.3 291 /

Def. Subject : Enter subject.

Def. From : Enter from address.
Scan Size Limit
FAX Setting After the following setup is finished, returned to this class.
Phone Book
Select
Add Speed Dial!
Add Group Dial!
Delete Speed Dial!
Delete Group Dial!
Delete All! : Execute (Return to Menu Settings after the execution.)
Append Phone #
Reprots
Activity Report
Transmission Report
Transmission Report
Broadcast Report
Protocol Dump Report 1
Image in MCF
Cancel Fax Jobs
Setup FAX
Station ID
Fit to Page
Detect Dial Tone
Detect Busy Tone
Re-dial
Redial Interval
Ring Response
Dial Prefix
Manual Receive
DRD Mode 1
DRD Pattern 1
ECM mode
Speaker Volume
Service mode
Activity Report
Fax Header
Attenuator
MF Attenuator
Transmission rate
Monitor Control
44158801TH Rev.3 292 /

Pulse Dial Rate

Pulse Make Ratio
Tone Duration
Calling Timer
Tone Send Test
Pulse Send Test
Tone Send Test
Modem Sinal Send Test
Tone/Pulse
Clear Fax Report 1
, Key
Report Print
Menu Map : Menu settings printing
Printer Demo Page : Printer Demo Page printing
MFP Usage Report : Scan count & Print count printing
Supplies Status Report : Printer Status printing
, Key
Management After the following setup is finished, returned to this class.
Select
Date Format
Date/Time
Password
Add "To" Addr.
Auth Method
Auth Setting
Pow Save
Pow Save Time
Default Mode
Stand-by Timer
Country Code
Fax Forwarding 1
Fax To Email Address 1
Fax To Fax Number 1
Language
Scan Log Repot
LDAP Settings
LDAP Server
Port Number
Login Name
Password 1
Timeout
Scanner Applicability
Max Entries
NonPlus N/A
BaseDN
Plus applicable
Search Field1
Search Field2
Search Field3
Email
LDAP Auth Method
44158801TH Rev.3 293 /

8.8.3 Menu Settings
Menu Settings ODA OEL/OEL (SKU2)

Informa- • Model MC560 /CX2033 MFP MC560 /ES5460 MFP
tion • Device (This is only information and Optional strings Optional strings
Name can not be changed here.) (Initial strings : "OL" + (Initial strings : "OL" +
MAC Address lower 6 MAC Address lower 6
digits) digits)
• Scanner MAC Address Scanner's MAC Address Scanner's MAC Address
• Printer Serial No. Printer's Serial No. Printer's Serial No.
• F/W • Printer CU F/W Version Version Version
Version • Printer PU F/W Version Version Version
• System F/W Version Version Version
• Scanner F/W Version Version Version
• Web Page Version Version Version
• Resource File Version Version Version
• Configuration Version Version Version
• PTT Table Version Version Version
Printer • Tray1 Paper Size Letter A4
Menu • Tray2 Paper Size Letter A4
• MP Paper Size Letter A4
• Tray1 Media Weight Medium Medium
• Tray1 Media Type Plain Plain
• Tray2 Media Weight Medium Medium
• Tray2 Media Type Plain Plain
• MPTray Media Weight Medium Medium
• MPTray Media Type Plain Plain
• Density Control Auto Auto
• Adjust Densty - -
• Adjust Registration - -
Network • IP Address 192.168.1.1 192.168.1.1
Settings • Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
• Gateway IP 192.168.1.254 192.168.1.254
• DNS Server 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
• DHCP Enable OFF OFF
• Device Name Optional strings Optional strings
(Initial strings : "OL" + (Initial strings : "OL" +
MAC Address lower 6 MAC Address lower 6
digits) digits)
• IEEE802.1x DISABLE DISABLE
• EAP Method TLS TLS
• User ID BLANK BLANK
• Password BLANK BLANK
Mail • SMTP Server BLANK BLANK
Server • SMTP Port 25 25
• POP3 Server BLANK BLANK
• POP3 Port 110 110
• Authentication Method No No
• Login Name BLANK BLANK
44158801TH Rev.3 294 /


Mail • Def. Subject BLANK BLANK
Server • Def. From BLANK BLANK
• Scan Size Limit NoLimit NoLimit
Fax Phone • Edit Speed Dial! - -
Settings Book • Edit Group Dial! - -
• Delete Speed Dial! - -
• Delete Group Dial! - -
• Delete All! No No
• Append Phone # OFF OFF
Reports • Activity Report - -
• Transmission Report - -
• Transmission Report Yes Yes
• Broadcast Report - -
• Protocol Dump Report - -
• Image in MCF OFF OFF
• Cancel Fax Jobs - -
Setup Fax • Station ID: Name : BLANK Name : BLANK
Station # : BLANK Station # : BLANK
• Fit to Page ENABLE ENABLE
• Detect Dial Tone DISABLE DISABLE
• Detect Busy Tone ENABLE ENABLE
• Re-dial 1 1
• Redial Interval 1min 1min
• Ring Response 1ring 1ring
• Dial Prefix blank blank
• Manual Receive DISABLE DISABLE
• DRD Mode DISABLE Pattern1
• DRD Pattern Pattern1 Pattern1
• ECM mode ENABLE ENABLE
• Speaker Volume 0 0
Report • Menu Map - -
Print • Printer Demo Page - -
• MFP Usage Report - -
• Supplies Status Report - -
44158801TH Rev.3 295 /


Manage- • Date Format [MM/DD/YYYY] [DD/MM/YYYY]
ment • Date/Time Current Time Current Time
Ex). 2007/06/27 20:02:14 Ex). 2007/06/27 20:02:14
• Add "To" Addr. ON ON
• PIN Setting OFF OFF
• Auth Method OFF OFF
• Auth Setting Copy Copy
• Pow Save ENABLE ENABLE
• Power Save Time 5min 5min
• Default Mode Copy Copy
• Stand-by Timer 60 [sec] 60 [sec]
• Country code U.S.A International
• Fax Forwarding DISABLE DISABLE
• Fax To Email Address BLANK BLANK
• Fax To Fax Number BLANK BLANK
• Language Eng Eng
• Send Log Report - -
LDAP • LDAP Server BLANK BLANK
Settings • Port Number 389 389
• Login Name BLANK BLANK
• Timeout 60 60
• MaxEntries 100 100
• BaseDN BLANK BLANK
• Search Field1 cn cn
• Search Field2 sn sn
• Search Field3 givenname givenname
• Email mail mail
• LDAP Auth Method simple simple
44158801TH Rev.3 296 /

8.8.4 Additional Settings
Additional Settings (FAX) ODA OEL/OEL (SKU2)

Quality Fine Fine
Denisty 0 0
Doc.Size Letter A4
Delayed Time Current Time Current Time
Ex). 06/27/2007 20:02 Ex). 27/06/2007 20:02
Manual Feed OFF OFF
Poll to Receive OFF OFF
Overseas Mode OFF OFF
Additional Settings (Copy) ODA OEL/OEL (SKU2)

Denisty 0 0
Quality Speed Speed
Collate OFF OFF
Duplex OFF OFF
N-Up 1 in 1 1 in 1
Edge Erase *1 0 0
Margin Shift-Right *1 0 0
Margin Shift-Bottom *1 0 0
Paper Supply Letter A4
Input Tray Auto Auto
ID Card Copy OFF OFF
*1:ODA=Inch, OEL=mm
Additional Settings (Send to) ODA OEL/OEL (SKU2)

Attachment BLANK BLANK
From BLANK BLANK
Reply To Address BLANK BLANK
Color Output • File Format PDF PDF
Format • Compression Rate Low Low
B&W Output • Multi-Level B&W-Gray OFF OFF
Format • File Format PDF PDF
• Compression Rate Low Low
Resorution 200 200
Manual Feed OFF OFF
Document Size Letter A4
Density 0 0
Copy Function ODA OEL/OEL (SKU2)

Copy Count 1~99 1~99
Copy Scaling Preset scaling : 100% Preset scaling : 100%
44158801TH Rev.3 297 /

Send to Function ODA OEL/OEL (SKU2)

To BLANK BLANK
Subject BLANK BLANK
Cc BLANK BLANK
Bcc BLANK BLANK
Fax Function 43611501 43611502 - 43611506

Fax [Time00:00] Current Time Current Time
Fax[20:02] Fax[20:02]
8.8.5 Fax Service Mode
Menu Setting ODA OEL/OEL (SKU2)

Activity Report ENABLE ENABLE
FAX Header ENABLE ENABLE
Attenuator 10db 10db
MF Attenuator 8db 8db
Transmission Rate 33.6Kbps 33.6Kbps
Monitor Control DISABLE DISABLE
Pulse Dial Rate 10pps 10pps
Pulse Make Ratio 40% 40%
Tone Duration 100 ms 100 ms
Calling Timer 60 60
Tone Send Test 2100Hz 2100Hz
Pulse Send Test
Tone Send Test
Modem Signal Send Test V.34 (33.6Kbps) V.34 (33.6Kbps)
Tone/Pulse Tone Tone
Clear Fax Report - -
* 50 entries (Auto to clear after Printing)
44158801TH Rev.3 298 /

8.9 How to distinguish a Non Plus unit from a Plus unit

There are 3 methods as following.
Num Item Method Non Plus Plus

Label It could be distinguished 44162401 44162408
by the label on the 44162402 44162409
scanner back side. 44162403 44162410
1 44162404
44162405
44162406
44162407
Menu Map It could be distinguished nonexistence of existence of destination
print by the display existence destination
or nonexistence of
2
destination at the system example) example)
firmware version right System F/W = 2.23 System F/W = 3.07 OEL
side on Menu Map.
Display of Power OFF existence of FAX nonexistence of
LCD | board destination FAX board destination
Keep pressing “0”
| example) example)
3 Power ON MC560 OEL MC560 OEL
| LCD: OEL LCD: blank
the LCD display existence
or nonexistence of FAX
board destination
44158801TH Rev.3 299 /

9.1
Unit Circuit diagram & configuration Part schematic Resistance value
44158801TH Rev.3
Red
1
Between pin 1 and pin 2: 3.4Ω
M Between pin 3 and pin 4: 3.4Ω
Brown
2 or
Transport belt
Between pin 1 and pin 2: 5Ω
motor
Yellow Between pin 3 and pin 4: 5Ω
3
Blue
Check of resistance values
9. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
ID motor Both ends of IP1: 1Ω or less
IP1
300 /
44158801TH Rev.3
M Between pin 1 and pin 2:6.1Ω
Between pin 3 and pin 4:6.1Ω
ID up/down 2 or
motor
3 Between pin 3 and pin 4: 8.5Ω
Fuser unit motor Both ends of IP1: 1Ω or less
IP1
301 /
44158801TH Rev.3
M Between pin 1 and pin 2: 3.4Ω
Feed motor 2
or
Between pin 1 and pin 2: 5Ω
3 Between pin 3 and pin 4: 5Ω
M
2 Between pin 1 and pin 2: 2.4Ω
Duplex
motor
3
M
Second tray feed 2 Between pin 1 and pin 2: 3.4Ω
motor Between pin 3 and pin 4: 3.4Ω
3
302 /
Upper roller heater #1 Between pin A -1 and pin A -6:

Several ohms to several tens of ohms
44158801TH Rev.3
B -6
Between pin B -1 and pin B -6:
Upper roller heater #2 Several ohms to several tens of ohms
A -6 Between pin B -4 and pin B -5:
Approx. 590Kohms to 5338Kohms (0-93)
Thermostat
B -1 Between pin A -2 and pin A -3:
Approx. 104.5Kohms to 806.5Kohms
A -1 (0-43˚C)
Between pin B -2 and pin B -3:
Fuser unit Upper thermistor Approx. 104.5Kohms to 806.5Kohms
B -4 (0-43˚C)
Between pin A -4 and pin A -5:
B -5 Open
Lower thermistor
A -2
A -3 A 2345 B 2345
Frame thermistor
B -2
B -3 1 6 1 6
A -4
A -5
Fuse
303 /
9.2 Component layout

(1) Print engine controller PCB (PRF PCB)
Component side
DEBUG
R2
C3 IC1
CP1
C4
R3
C37
R13
IC8
R8 R5
R10 R17OSC1
1
R11
R1
R19
OPE
R14 R20
FM1
C1
R15 R21
C2
1
5 RFID 1
C42
R5
IC3 R28 IC2

FET1
FET2
R87
RM1 60 1
C41
C6 IC4 R31
C40
C38
240
60
R9
FET3
FET4
DCID
R86
R85
RM4
11 10
ARMORED
RM3
R23
R24 C7
CP2
R25 R27
1
RM5
SSNS
120
181
1
R33
11
121 180
R32
CUIF
R60
R44
R45
R46
R47
R48
R49
R50
R51
R52
R53
C14
C15
C16
C17
C18
R56 R81
R54 R82
RM8
R59
R39
R41
C10
C11
C12
C13
R58
C8
C9
R29
12
PE
COHP
R80 C36
D10
3
D9
IC5
R79
OPAMP3
F1
D7 D8
1
Q13
FSNS
R61 CP3 R84

OPAMP1
Q5
5
C21
IC7
IC6
1
HOP
Q2
Q1
1
4
Q9
Q8
R75
HSOL
Q6 Q3
DCHEAT
F5
CP4
CP5
2
R67
R69
D1 D2
D3
R77 R78
POWFAN
R64
Q10
1
R57
Q4
SCANNER BELTIDUP
1 8
13 HVOLT 1
R25
R26
BF5
C22
R74
9
F2 F3 R71 R72
R73
3
OPTION POWER
F4
1 21 1 13
20 RELAY 1
2 22 2 14
44158801TH Rev.3 304 /

R510
BF502
R538
R525
R523
R522
R524
R518
R519
R520
FET508 R595 R509
D505
BF504 C503
C521
C520
44158801TH Rev.3
R507
Q502 Q501
FET507 R594 BF503
IC501
R517
R588
R587
C551
C542
R515
R621 R508
R506
R545 Q504
R599
C555
C511 C502
R570
R600
C528
C534
D501
C527
R585
C550
R586
R569
C533
R598 Q503
C510 C509
D507
Q509 Q510
C526
C547
C549
C548
C508
R623
RM503
R622
C525 C524
R593
C554
C546
R584
C545
R567
C541
R559
R560
C535
C507
C523
C522 C518 C515 C513 C512
R512
R505
R504
RM502
Solder side
C501
R503
R502
R501
C506
C519 C516 C514
R544 R543
C532 R542
R582 R541 R528
R592 R550
C561
C562
C563
C564
R566 R551 R540 R527

R513
R612 RM504
R539
R611 C558 R607 R581 Q506 C531 R529
R606 R591 C530 R526
R605
R613
R614
R615
R616
C560 R603R604 C540 R558 FET504

R549
R610 R602 C539 C504

C557 C538 Q505
C559
D506
D503 FET506
C537
R601
R590 R580 R579 R536
C553 R577 R578 R565 R556
C544 R576 R564 C556 R596
C543 R575 R563 R533
C552 R574 R573 R562 R554
R589 R572 R571 R530
R548 R547 R546

C536 R552
FET503 FET502 FET501
305 /
(2)-1 Main controller (TBR PCB)
Component side
R55
R56
RM80 C40
R44 C22
R89 C53
R57
C57RM32
C56
C12 C49
C10 C18
C11 C30
R58
C35 RM25
C13 RM18 RM33
C45 RM28
C46
C47 RM29RM44
C48
C50
C51
C52
C54 RM30
C55
C14
C15
C16 RM19RM34
C17
C19 RM20
C20
C21
C23
C24
C25 RM22
C26
C27
C28 RM23
C29
C31
C32 RM24
C33
C34
C36
C37 RM26
C38
C39
C41
C42 RM27
C43
C44
RM31RM48
RM21
RM35
RM36
RM37
RM38
RM39
RM40
RM41
RM42
RM43
RM45
RM46
RM47
2 IDE 50 PU735
16
RM79
1
C9
C6
C8
C7
1 49 R111
C1 RM75 RM77 R6 R7
C58
R112
1
RM76 RM78
2 POW1 10
CP3
R1
L2
C2
FET2
R2
TH1
C3
9
L3
CP4
CP1
FET3
C59 C60 C61 C62 C63
2
DLMODE
R3
C4
199 41 39 1
DMMBS
3
FAN
L4 200 42 40 2
1
R129
R4
FET4
1
CP5
C5
R130
TH2
C70 C71
CC1ZA2 C65 C66 C67 C68 C69
MPUCI
CP12
CP2
RM2 RM4 RM6 RM8

WT
2.5V_2
34
A
R24
R9 R25 FET1
IC_VREF
RM1 RM3 RM5 RM7 CP11
20
10
R10
1
K
IC2
C72
R12
L1
20
R37
R13
R5
R38
AA
R14 R39
R15 R40
MPUZA1
C79 1.2V
10
RM73
MPU
BR QREO
BG DBG TA
MPUZA2 C R98
C
K
R19 1 R99
RM74
AP
1
TS
R20 R101
R102
A
34
AACK R21
CP6
DBWO R22R27
MPUCLK
R17
A
CP8
C85
20
10
C75
R94 R95
CP7
RM9 RM11 RM13 RM15

20
RM16
C74
C77 2.5V_1 C86

RM10 RM12 RM14
RM72
C76 C78
C87 R119
10
R74 R80 CC1ZA1

R75 R81
R76 R82
R90
1
AP
R52 R77 R83 IC4

R60 R78 R84
C80 C81C82 C83 R61 R79 R85R88
CN201
1 2
1
143
DIMMAS R117
144 2 R118
1
CN301
25
24
25
24
C96 C92
C88 R91
3
R92
C89
FLCS1
R93
DOC1
C93
R65
R66
48
R105 LED4
C90
1
48
C91 RM50 RM52 RM54 RM56 C94

R108 LED7
R87 RM58
C95
R110
R72
R73
RM49 RM51 RM53 RM55 RM57 LED9

20
10
CC4
RR1
Y
CC2
CC3
RM59
1.8V
RM60 DBF1
SCLOCK
CHEAD
SCLK1
24
CIF2
K
1
RR2
CC7
DBF2
CC5
CC6
R29
DBF3
MHEAD
24
C101
RM62
RM63
RM64
RM65
1
A
R120R122
CC10
20
10
RR3
DBF4
RM66
CC8
CC9
R121 R34
C153 C102 RM61 DBF5
C99
YHEAD
C128 C147
C148C149
C103 C109 24
RM67
R123
C140
R41
R47
R48
C100
R63
R68 OSCLAN
R124
C127
C129
C117 R125 C104 1

C115
CC13
R46
C118C123
CC12
RR4
DBF6
CC11
R50 C124
R128
C111C114 C110 C116

C130 C105 DBF7
R35 C131 C150
C122C12
KHEAD
BF1 R126 C151

C112 R42 C132 R127 C152 DBF8 24
C136
R28 C126C134 C141C142 C106

C143
C144
C145
C146
C113 R43 C121R49 R51 R69 C135 1

CP15
L6
L5
C138C139
C107C108
CCP1
C133
R18
R8
2 8
1 7
R53R59R70
LED3 LED2 LED1
LAN
100L 10L ACT 2 1
C137
3 4
I2CS
USB
44158801TH Rev.3 306 /

307 / 44158801TH Rev.3
R752
R751
C839
C838
R772 C856 C857
F504
R771
FUSE
DBF532
RR504
DBF531
DBF530
DBF529
R769
C858
RR508
F505
DBF513
DBF515
DBF528
DBF527
DBF526
RRM508 DBF516 RRM507
DBF525
RR507
R639
DBF509
DBF511
DBF524
DBF523
C667
R638 DBF522
DBF521
RR506
C687
C697
C708
R665 R664
R628 C707
DBF520
DBF505
DBF507
DBF519
R668 R667
C713
DBF518
R654
R697
R627 DBF517
RR505
BF504 BF505 C771 R683

R696 C724
C758
C759
C765
RRM504 DBF514 RRM503 DBF510RRM502 DBF506 RRM501
DBF512RRM506 DBF508 RRM505
R626 C726 R704 C770

R625 R701 C723
72
C861 R768
C718
C736
C744
C753
37
R661
C701
C785
R637
C686
C690
C684
C774
R624 C769
36
C764
C742
DBF501
DBF502
DBF504
C784
C752
73
R644 C741
R767
R623 R636 C796

R648 C700 C722 C795
R622
DBF503 IC506
C767
C756
C763
C685 C696 C706 C721

R621 C801
C695
C628
LANIC
R610 C710
IC509
R619 C709 C733 C750 C791 C800

C627
C653
C732 C749
C717
C725
C762
C773
R618 C699 C816

108
C716 C731
C626
C735 C734
C652
C694
C705 C704
C712 C711
C743
R617
1
RR503
RM586 C651 C698 C790 C813

144
R616 C651 C715 C730 C812 C815

109 C689
RM585
R615 C811
R679 C714 C729
RM573
R614 C657 RM588

C625 C624
R653 R596 C688 C728 C748

C783
C794
R677
C778
C623
C798
C656
C727 C747
RR502
OSCUSB1
C807
C641 C789 C797 C809

RM587
R567 C740 C808
R643
R647
R652
R693
R656
C703
RM565 C755
R566 C739 C793
C738 C792
R581
RR501
C737 C761
RM564
R642
C782
BE503
C781
RM563
R580 R705 C768

R699
C754 C767
C613
C565
C780
R698
RM527
C594
C579
C581
C649
C766
C603
C622
C648
RM529
RM554
RM518
C554 R555 RM522 RM569 C746

C842
R554 C655 R607 C679 C787

C745
C570
C578
C585
C590
C597
C602
C609
C564 R646 C828

RM562
C593
R539 R553 C678 C692

C563 R606
R538 BF502
C562
RM568
RM544
C584
C601
IC502
C772
C621
IC505
IC504
C569
C577
C551
IGTD501
C561
C600 C647
C592
C560
RM558
C550 C549 C620 C646 RM526 RM533 C825

RM538
R579
C568
C576
RM559 RM557
C677
RM551
C559 C608 C619 R578
C583
C599 C824
C558 C607 R609 RM541
C645
C549
C557 C606
RM543
C567
C575
C582
C589
C596
C598
IC503
C802
RM535
C546
C614 R675
C556
C640 C676 R692
C595
C605
C566
C580
C639 C675 R691
R671
C612
R709
R711
C638 R605 C674 R689 C823

RM549 RM548
C637 R604 C702

RM556 RM555
C673 C786 R718

C604 C610 C757 R717
RM578
C779
R715
R529
C508 R736
R528 R713
C543
R527 R708 R712 R734 RM582
RM573 RM572
IG501
RM513 R526
R732
RM511 R634
C636 R731 RM581
RM510 R633 C827 R742
R591 R741
RM509 R590 R632
R563 R589 C831
RM508 R588 C682 R729 C830
R561 R587 R740
RM507 C635 R586 C681 R739
OSC1
R585 C829
RM506 R722
R560 R584 R719 R721
RST501
RM502 RM505 C814 R720
C683
C822
R511
RM501 RM504
R601
R603
C832
C634
RM503 C837
RM512 R747
C841
R746
C661 C660 C659 C658

C662
C666 C665 C664 C663
C760 C834
R645
R650
R745
RM531
RM546
RM550
R663 R659
C840
R629
RM532 R631
RM553 R700
R594
R612 RM528
R655 RM540
R660 R658 RM542
R666 R667 RM545
RM547
R710 RM570
R744 RM579
RM583
R593
R592
C650
C833
R608 RM524 R611
R649
R707 RM566 R706
RM552
RM575 R725 RM574
RM520 R600 RM519

RM530
C720
RM517 R598 RM516 R597
RM577 R727 RM576 R726
C777
RM561 R703 RM560 R702
R630
C644
RM537 RM534 RM536
RM539
RM567
RM571
RM521
RM525
R743 RM580
RM684
C836
C776
C643
C835
C719
SDRAM2
SDRAM4
SDRAM1
SDRAM3
C611 C633
F501
C615
C642
R508
C591
R507
C775
R532 R529
R531 R535
R522 C518 R534
C501
D501
C516 C524 C535
C542
C821 C820 C819 C818
C672 C671 C670 C669

R515 R521
D505
C505
C574
C504 IC502
R514
C503
C515
C817
C668
C573
D504
C514 C523 C534 C588 R548
BF501
C502 R542 R547
C541
C522 R537
TR502 R520
R505
R519 C517 R533
TR501 R541 R546
C513 C521 C533
R504
C587 R545
C540
R513 R518
D503
C572
IC501
R512
C512
C571
D502
C511 C520 C532 C586 R544
R540 R543
C539
R517 C519 R536
C506
C510 R525
R530
C526
C528
C531
C537
C538
C545
C548
C553
R524
C525
C527
C530
C536
C544
C547
C552
C555
Solder side
(2)-2 Main controller (TB2-6 PCB)
Component side
R55
R56
RM80 C40
R57
C57
R44 C22 RM22
R89
R58
C56 C55
C11 C30
C12 C50
C10 C18
C13
RM82 RM32 RM48

C35
C45 RM29
C46
C47 RM30
C48
C49
C51
C52
C53
C54 RM31 RM47
C14
C15 RM19 RM33
C16
C17 RM20
C19 RM21
C20
C21
C23
C24
C25 RM23
C26
C27
C28
C29 RM24
C31
C32 RM25
C33
C34 RM26 RM40
C36
C37 RM27 RM41
C38
C39
C41
C42 RM28
C43
C44
RM34
RM35
RM36
RM37
RM38
RM39
RM42
RM43
RM44
RM45
RM46
2 IDE 50 PU735
16
1
RM79
C9
C6
C8
C7
1 49
C154
C1 RM75 RM77 R6 R7 C161
C160
1
RM76 RM78
2 POW1 10
C58
CP3
R1
C2
L8
FET2
LED4
R2
TH1
C3
9
LED7
L3
CP4
C63
CP1
FET3
C59 C60 C61 C62 LED9

R129
2
R3
C4
DLMODE
199 DMMBS 41 39 1
3
FAN
200 42 40 2
L4
1
R4
FET4
1
CP5
C71 R130
C5
R93 KGND BG
TH2
C65 C70
C66 C67 C68 C69
CC1ZA2
RSRV WT
KVDD BR
CP11
CP12
DBG QREQ
CP2
PAD25V
RM11 RM13 RM15RM17
34
R24
A
R9 R25 FET1 R110
IC_VREF
R10
RM10 RM12 RM14 RM16
K
IC2
OSC1
R139 R134
20
R12
A
R167 R163
Y
R37
DBWO
L1
R13 R38 R164

R14 PAD33V1
1
R39
AA
R15 R137 R165
C79 R40 R169 R166 C72
10
MPUZA1
AACK
PAD12V
RM73
MPUZA2
MPU
C
R98
10
10
CBG1
R62 R127
C
R99
1
CDBG1
R19 R135 R136
AP
RM74
1
R128 R101
TA
R20
R102
TS
R170 R22
CLED2
CLED1
34
MPUCLK
R23
CP6
20
20
R171
R27
A
Y
C85
RM2 RM4 RM6 RM8
CP7
20
RM1 CP8 C86
CPUIO
RM3 RM5 RM7 TESTPIN
C74
C75
RM72
10
C87 R119
C76 C78
CC1ZA1
R74R80
R75R81
CP9
R76R82
1
AP
R77R83 IC4
R90
R52 R78R84
R60 R79R85 R88
R61 C84
C80 C83
C81 C82
1 2
C163
C157
1
C92 C96
3
C88
25
24
25
24
FLCS1
R65
C89
IC7
C93
R66
48
48
1
1
C90
GNT4
IFCS1
RM50RM52 RM54 RM56 C95

RM59 C91
RM81
R72
R73
RM60 RM49RM51 RM53 RM55 RM57

20
1
10
SCLK1 SCLOCK
IC6
Y
Y
RM58
PAD18V
DBF1 28
CP13
CHEAD
CIF2
K
CC7
CC5
CC6
1
DBF2
R34 28
DBF3
MHEAD
C101
CC10
1
CC8
CC9
20
1
10
DBF4
DBF5 28
C102
YHEAD
CC13
CC12
C103
CC11
1
DBF6
C104 28
DBF7
C105
KHEAD
C106 1
C108
C107
C158
C156
100L 10L ACT

RM62
RM65
RM63
RM64
R120 R122
R121
C116
RM61
C153 RM66
C148C149
C147
R123
RM67
C140
R124
R125
C150
C142 C151
C152 DBF8
C143
C144
C145
C146
C141 OSC3
CCP2
C135 CP14
L6 R148
I2CS
CP15
R147
BF4
C137
CN2
44158801TH Rev.3 308 /

R732
R734
R736
R731
RM573 RM572
R717
R715
R713
R712
C798
RM556 RM555
C801
C794
C796
C795
C793
C792
C790
C797 C789
C800 C791
C783
C785
C784
C782
C781
R692
R689
C780
R694
R691
C786
C779
C778
C770
C771
C766
C755
C756
C768
R677
C702
CC503
C761
RM549
C757
RM548 RM584
C767 C754
CC502 RM583
R745
C894
RRM507 RRM506 RRM505
C769 C742
C741
C895
RRM508
R802
DBF515 DBF511 DBF507 DBF503 R743
C740
C739
C738
C737
R744 RM580
R675
R672
R671
RM579
C750 C733
C749 C732
C748 C728
C747 C727
DBF513 DBF509 DBF505 DBF501
C722
C721
C724
C723
RM577 RM576
RRM504 DBF514 RRM503 DBF510 RRM502 DBF506 RRM501 DBF502 R727 R726
44158801TH Rev.3
C730 C715
C729 C714
C710
DBF516 DBF512 DBF508 DBF504 R725
RM575 RM574
C709 C683
C699
RR504 DBF536 RR503 DBF535 RR502 DBF534 RR501 DBF533
C689
C857 C856 R772

C858 C821 C820 C819 C818 C817
C688
RM571
C731 C716 C698 C651

R771 R769 RM570
R710
R707 RM566 R706 RM567
RM561 RM560 R702

R801 R800 R799 R703
R778
R776
R773
R798
R700
RM553
R747
C837
R746
C841 RM552
C915
C914
F506
CC501
IGTD501 C836 C835
DBF520
DBF524
DBF530
DBF529
DBF532
DBF523
DBF522
C833
F505
DBF525
DBF527
DBF526
DBF519
DBF518
DBF517
DBF531
DBF528
DBF521
C839
C838
C834
C907
C842
RM550
C832
RM582
RM581
C831
C829
R740
R742
R741
SDRAM4 RM547
RM578
RM551
C828
IC506 C772 RM546
R739
R720
R721
RM545
C823
C825
R666
C827
RST501 R663 R662
BF505
R812
C830 C815
R660 R659
C816
R711 R658 RM542
R701
C808
C807
C822 C814
49
RM565
RM564
RM563
R655
48
RM569
RM558
RM557
R719
RM559
C809
64
RM539
C813
C812
R709 SDRAM3 R650 RM540 R649
R705
RM562
RM587
RM588
R645
C824
R704
C774 C773 IC509 RM554 RM537 RM536
R768
RM586 RM591 RM534
R822
C787
C765 C764 C763 C762
16
RM532 R631
R823
R782
R630
33
R668 R667 C758 C777 C776 C775 R629
17 RM530
R679
32
R684
C753 C859 RM531
C760
C752
RM585
RM590
C744 C743 C759 R767 R664 RM528
C745
C720 C719 R612 R611 RM525
C736 C735 C734 R665 RM544
C746
R608
BF504
C726 C713
C725 RM543 C906 RM524
C708 RM538 RM520 RM519 RM521
C718 C717 RM541 C901 R600
C697
C675
C707
IC505
C712 C711 SDRAM2 R598
C687 R597
C673
RM517 RM516
C905
C692 R646
C703
R640
C705 C704
C706
RM535
C674
C701
C676 C904
C700
RM533 R599 C683
C682
C681
C694
R634
C672 C671 C670 C669 C668
C677
C693
C696
R627
R626
IC504 R595
C900
C695
C690 C667
R653
R652
R628
C686 RM526
C903
R648
C640
C638
C639
C899
C637
R647 RM523
R609
C657 BF503 SDRAM1
R644
C656
R643 R642 IC510
IC511
C923
C684
C924
C652
C685
C806
Solder side
C543
C649 IG502
C650
C805
R636
R635
C804
C651
C653
C648 C642
R566
C803
C636
C896
C644 C643
C922
C641
C627 C625 C623
R622
R621
R610
R619
R618
R617
R616
R615
R614
C902
F507
R579
R578
C646
C610
C647
C645
R577
C921
C626 C624
C633 C615 C611 F501
R548
R547
C555
R546
R545
R544
R543
C604
C552
C867 C553
C547
C588
C587
C586
C666 C665 C664 C663 C548

R540
R542
R541
C591 C545 C544

C866
R555
R603 RM529 C868 C574 C573 C572 C571
C662 C538 C536
R601 D505 D504 D503 D502 C537 C530
C679
C678
C584 C661 C660 C659 C658 RM527 C869 C531
C875 C528 C527
C569 C542 C541 C540 C539
R535
C529
RM522 C526 C525
R606
R607
R530
C898
C890
C603
C594
C876
C595
C612
C575
IC502
C590
IC501
RM518
R525
C556 C570 C597 C566

R532
R531
IC508
C622
C889
C877
C621
C549
C550
C508
C608
C602
C562
C557
C888 C878 R504 R505
C510
C504
C607 C606 C609 C564 C598 C897 D501
C655 R511
C559 C577
C913
C912
C560 C582 C558 C596 C599 C865 C505

C503
C887 C879 TR501 TR502

BF501
C593
C589
C567
C585
C862
C634
C554
C551
C880
C620
C886
C613
C619 C561 C546
C563
C576 C568
C605
C580
C885
C882
C579
C884
C581
C881
C863
C534
C533
R537
R536
C532
C535
R534
R533
C578
C565 C883
R817
C523
C522
C521
C520
C519
C524
C518
C517
C892
C864
BF510
C873
R794
C515 C512
R520
R522
R519
R517
C511
C516
C514
C513
C874
R795
R797
R514 R512
R521 R515
R518 R513
C502 C501 C506
C614
C891
R796
C872 C871
R565
R564
C870
C635
RM502
309 /
R590
R589
R588
R591
R819
R818
R811
C583
(3) Junction PCB (PRY PCB)
Component side
C1
PUIF
1
24
EXIT
3
C2
J1
FUSER
8 1
S1
RCR DENS
4 4
1 1
5 1 CP1 LCR
Solder side
BFUSE BFUCUT
44158801TH Rev.3 310 /

(4) Duplex print control PCB (V7Y PCB)
Component side
J23
J24 J25
SNS03 SNS12 SNS4
6 1
J34
2
6 1
J35
CL1
J20
J21
J33
FLASH J22
3 1
J32
J19
J18
7 1
J10
CP2
J30
CL2
1
J31
J7
J6
J17
1
OSC
CP1
J12
J13
MAIN1
J29
D6
C1 C2
4
MOTOR
J8
J27
J28
J11
D3
13
J3
J9
J4
1
J15
J16
D5
D4
J5
J1
1 3 D2
J26
J2
FAN
Solder side
R567
R566
R569 R568 R561

R565 R564
R544
R543
R541
R542
R562 R560
FET502
C523
R551
J513
FET501 C522
R547
R545
C520
R548
D510
J511
R549
C521
J512
C515
IC503
J510
R578
C514
D509
R530
C508
R533
R532
C505
C506
C509
D508
J507
17 16
IC502 R527
1
32
C502
CPU
R570 33
64
J520
F501
48 49 C501 R504
J503
TR501
R511
R505
R506
J501 R503
R501
Q501 R502
D501
R531
R559
R521 J509
D505D506 R526
R552
J506 R518 D507

R553
R558
C524
R554
R557
R555
R556
J514
R522
J524
J516
R524
R520
C535
C532
R576
J523
J518
C504
J505
R580 R579
J502 R514 R515
C534 C533
R575 TR502
R577 J504 IC501
D503C503
D504
R574
R573
Q502
R534
J522 R572
R510
R517
R508 R507
R509
D502
J521 R571
R516 R519
J519
44158801TH Rev.3 311 /

(5)
D510 MAIN1
FET502
13 1
44158801TH Rev.3
J11
J8 J20
C535 6
R578
J524
R541
R544
R577
CP2
R543
C534 C533
R580 R579
J523
IC502
7
SNS03
J516
1
J522 R572
R569
R575
R559
R517 C532 R501
6
J24
R574 R576 J3
J519
FLASH
R573 J26
R558
R516 R519
J2
J521 R571
J520
1
R511 J4
J17
J12
R568
33
32
J503 J13
SNS12
J21
Q502
R557 R506
R556
1
R555
R534
TR502
R567 J18
48
17
R554
Second tray control PCB (V7Y PCB)
R553
OSC
CPU
R552
49
16
J514 R566
C508
J25
Solder side
C506
1
C505 J513 J1
64
C514
Component side
J19
C504
R527
J505
IC503
C509
R551
C522
R533
R509
R510
J504
R532 J512
J6
R565 R564
R549
R524 C521 J7
R502
J28 J10
R508
R522
IC501
R521 J509
R504
J518
C503 J511 J5
J506 R518 D507
R547
J32
J31
C1
J510
R562
D505 D506 R526
R507
D504
C523
R561
J502 R514 R515 R545
R520
J33
C520
D509 J34
R560
C2
J507
D2
F501 J30
J29
C502 J35
D508
J15 CP1
J27
J16
R530
1 2
1 4
MOTOR CL1
312 /
(6)-1 Control panel PCB (PRP PCB)
Component side
S19
S20
S1 S2
1
S3
J15
S24
J14
S10
S11
CN
J5
J6
J11
D1
J8
SW2
S6 S8
9
S5
J13
SW5
J4
IC1
J2
S7
J7
D2 SW4 SW6
CP1
SW3 SW1
Solder side
R510
R508
C504
R506
R505
R504
C503
R501 R502
R514 R515
C502
C501
(7) Toner-Low sensor PCB (PRZ PCB)

11
SSNS
KTNR YTNR MTNR CTNR

1
R2
R1
R3
44158801TH Rev.3 313 /

(8) Inlet sensor PCB (RSF PCB)
IN2
IN1
R2
R1
WR 5 1
CN
(9) Color adjustment sensor PCB (PRC PCB)
A
K
SNS
CN
C
E
(10) High-voltage power supply PCB

CN4
CN2
TR-K TR-Y TR-M TR-C
CN1 CN5 CN3
(11) Low-voltage power supply PCB

Short-circuit
plug for CN6
To PRN PCB
POWER connector
To fuser unit I/F connector
CN6 CN2
CN3
CN1
Notes!
CN6: Connector for switching AC input voltage setting
Short-circuit plug installed for 120-V system/Short-circuit plug not installed for 230-V system
44158801TH Rev.3 314 /

(12) ID unit
ID unit (For consumables) Contacts
Fuse
Toner-Low sensor PCB (PRZ PCB)
Contacts
ID unit
(13) Transfer belt unit
Transfer belt unit (For consumables) Contacts
Fuse
Driver junction PCB (PRY PCB)
Contacts
Transfer belt unit
Fuse
44158801TH Rev.3 315 / 315

Oki CX2033 MC560Series MM Rev3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Oki CX2033 MC560Series MM Rev3

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Oki CX2033 MC560Series MM Rev3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CX2033/CX2033Plus

Oki Data CONFIDENTIAL

(Example) ABCD-3 Printed circuit board

2. EXPLANATION OF OPERATION . .....................................................................22

5. PANEL SWITCH FUNCTIONS..........................................................................136

Connector Connector PSU Fan Motor 22 4

MC560/CX2033MFP/ES5460MFP Scanner Connection Diagram

USB (5 Pin) Power (4 Pin) Motor

Scanner CCD board

2 Pin 4 Pin 3 Pin Cable

Inverter Motor Home

1.2 MFP configuration

• Electrophotographic processing section

Figure 1-2 represents the configuration of the printer.

1.3 Composition of optional items

(1) Second tray

(2) Duplex Unit

(3) Expansion Memory 256 MB / 512 MB

(4) Hard disk

Category Item MC560/CX2033MFP/ES5460MFP

Category Item MC560/CX2033MFP/ES5460MFP

Legal 13/13.5/14, letter, executive, A4, A5, B5, A6, C5,

Category Item MC560/CX2033MFP/ES5460MFP

Category Item MC560/CX2033MFP/ES5460MFP

Document Flatbed Letter, A4, A5

Category Item MC560/CX2033MFP/ES5460MFP

Scanning Platen 21.59cm x 29.72cm

Document/ Platen 20mm

Category Item MC560/CX2033MFP/ES5460MFP

1.5 Interface specifications

1.5.2 USB interface specifications

1.5.2.1 Outline of USB interface

(1) Basic specifications

1.5.2.2 USB interface connectors and cables

Connector pin assignment

• Cable side: B-plug (Male)

1.5.2.3 USB interface signals

Signal name Function

1.5.3 Network interface specifications

1.5.3.1 Outline of network interface

1.5.3.1.1 Basic specifications of network interface

Protocol family Network protocol Application

1.5.3.1.2 Basic specifications of network interface

Protocol family Network protocol Application

1.5.3.2 Network interface connectors and cables

Connector pin assignment

1.5.3.3 Network interface signals

Pin No. Signal name Direction Function

1.5.4 Telephone Line Interface Specification

1.5.4.1 Outline of telephone Line Interface

1.5.4.2 Telephone Line Interface Connector and Cable

Printer side : RJ-11

Connector contact arrengement

1.5.4.3 Telephone Line Interface signal

Contact No. Signal Name

(1) Electrophotographic process

Power LED head

Paper OPC drum

OPC drum Development roller